A PROGRESSIVE GRAMMAR oF THE TELUGU LANGUAGE WITH COPIOUS EXAMPLES AND EXERCISES. re The Rev. A gu'Arden, Ma. (GECOND EDITION). Aladras: PUBLISHED AND SOLD BY THE SOCIEPY FOR PROMOTING CHRISTIAN KNOWLEDGE, MADRAS. Price, In paper, Hs. 4.) [Bound in cloth, is. 5. AND by Mussrs, Suwrsin, MansHant, Haumtox, Kent & Co., Lrp., Loxpox Price Six Shillings Net. 1905, ll. Rights reserved.132 sll 34) PREFACE. Iw offering this book to the public, the Author is far from undervaluing the Telugu works, which have been already published with a similar object. The student of Telugu must ever feel specially grateful to Mr. ©. P. Brown, by whose efforts so much has been done to bring the language into its present position, and to render it accessible to Europeans. ‘The Author, however, believes that its acquisition may be accelerated by the system pursued in this book, in which it has been his endeavour, not in such a manner, as to enable merely to give information, but to arrange it the student to master it with ease and rapidity. The early portions of the book will be found specially suited for BEGINNERS, as they are based apon papers, which were drawn up by the Author, when he himself was commencing the study of Telugu. ‘These papers were carefully corrected and improved by the late Rev. J. E. Sharkey, one of the best Telugu scholarsof the day. Hence All those difficulties, with which s beginner is usually perplexed, have, it is hoped, been met and ed. exp! Throughout the book, the great effort of the Author has been, to lead the student on step by step, giving such information only as is positively required, at the stage at which the student has arrived. The special feature, therefore, of the book is intended to be its PROGRESSIVE character. The endeavour to make the book essentially progressive, whilst it greatly accelerates the acquisition of the language, must at the same time be plesded as an excuse for any peculiarity of arrangement, which may at firat sight strike the reader as somewhat complicated.iv PREFACE. The student must not be disconraged at the size of the book. The print is large, and a considerable portion of it is taken up with Examrurs and Exercises. If these were omitted, the book would be greatly reduced in size, but it is in these that the chief value of the book consists. All of them have been supplied by Natives, and are consequently thoroughly idiomatic and colloquial. In Telngu the dialect used in ordinary conversation differs so much from that used in grammatically written books that thousands of Natives, who use the language as the only medium of conversation, cannot read a grammatically written book, or understand it, when read to them. For the same rereon, a foreigner may be able to read and understand a Telugu book, but at the same time may be unable to converse with the Natives, or understand what they say to him. Owing to this great difference between the colloquial and the grammatical dialect, in the present work the former has been kept entirely distinct from the latter. ‘The design of the Author has been to present English-speaking persons with » book in which they may commence Telugu, and gradually acqnire thorough knowledge of the colloquial dialect, and afterwards an intro- ductory knowledge of the grammatical dialect. The book has, therefore, been divided into three parts. THE FIRST PART commences with some general information about the Janguage, and the manner in which it should be studied. The aLPHABET is then explained. As this is somewhat difficult, ils acquisition is rendered more ensy by an introductory chapter, in which a few only of the letters are given, and the general principles of the alphabet explained. In chapter IIT the alphabet is given in full, together with some Ezereises in reading. Chapter IV, which is based upon “Prendergast's mastery of languages,” provides the student with brief OurLINE oF Tenvav GRAMMAR and a few Mons SenrENces. This chapter is entirely independent of the rest of the book, and all the information given in it is repeated in Part II, with fullerPREFACE. v explanations. It is inserted merely to enable the student to begin speak- ing the language, as soon as possible, without having first to master the grammatical details of even the colloquial dialect. THE SECOND PART contains a ComPLeTE GRAMMAR OF THE COLLO- qutat Diauger. Chapters Vand VI give an explanation of all the parts of speech, except verbs. Then follow several chapters upon the various parts of verbs, and the several classes into which they are divided, together with rales of Syntax, and copious Ezercises and Eramples. By the introdue- tion of three chapters upon Adjective, Adverbial and Noun Sentences, a complete explanation is given of Subordinate Sentences, a subject much neglected in previous works. As some readers may not have studied the Analysis of English sentences, an explanation is given of the above terms, sufficient to make these chapters easily intelligible to all. Chapter XVII contains Miscellaneous Information, unnecessary for the student to know when commencing the language, but of much importance, after he has made some progress. This part concludes with a chapter containing GENERAL EXERCISES, in the form of Conversations, Letters and Stories, which illustrate the foregoing rales, and form useful models for imitation. This chapter, if carefully studied, provides the student with a considerable amount of useful reading. THE THIRD PART forms an INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMATICAL DiavEct useD IN nooKs. It is written on the same general principles as the preceding portions of the book, and contains such information in addition to, and in continuation of, that already given, as will enable the student to study a Native Grammar, and to read such books as the Vikramdrka Tales, Kasiaytra, Panchatantra, Nitichandrika, Vémana, ete. It is divided into two chapters. The first gives the Grammatical forms of individual words. The second explains the rules for ontraction, Elision, Euphony, ete. As Native Grammarians, whose works are the principal guides in this branch of the subject, differ in their opinions, it has been thought advisablevi PREFACE. to select one particular work, and to adopt its decision on doubtful points. ‘The Grammar thus selected is Chinniah Soory’s, since it is most largely used, and generally regarded as the best authority. As colloquial dialects of Telugu slightly differ, the book has been arranged to suit, as far as possible, all dialects, The chief differences may be exhibited by comparing the language spoken in the Northern Circars with that spoken in the Cuddapah District. For this reason, the Telugu spoken in the Kristna and Godaveri Districts, which is the purest and most largely used, has been taken as the standard, and the principal differences, met with in the Cuddapah District, have been pointed out and explained, Although the primary object of this book is to teach Telugu to English- speaking persons, yet Native youths will derive much benefit from the atudy of it, especially from the study of Chapters XI to XVI. A careful perusal of these chapters will prove of great assistance in translating accurately. The Author takes this opportunity of expressing his truest thanks to the numerous European and Native gentlemen, who have given him s0 much valuable assistance in the preparation of this work. He cannot refrain from specially mentioning the name of the Rev. J. Olay, of the 8. P. G., Cuddapah, who has for many years been Telugu Examiner to the ‘Madras University. This gentleman has more than once carefully revised the manuscript and added much valuable information. In the preparation of this book, the works mentioned in the subjoined list have been carefully consulted, and the Author's best thanks are due for much valuable information that has been derived from them. (1) A Grammar of the Telngu language by 4. D. Campbell, C.9. 1816 and 1820. @) A Grammar of the Gentoo language, by William Brown, C. composed at Masulipatam, with the help of Mdmidi Venkayya, 1817.PREFACK. vii (8) A Grammar of the Telugu language, by 0. P. Brown, G. 1840 ond 1857. (4) The Telugu Primer, by Adaki Subbarow, Munshi in the Telugu ‘Translator's office. 1851. (5) A Telugu Grammar by Chinniah Soory. 1858 and 1871. (6) The Niti Sangrahamu, with an Analysis of the Telugu language, by Lingam Lakshmaji Pantulu, Deputy Inspector of Schools, Vizaga- patam. 1863. (7) The Rudiments of Telugu Grammar, by Paupinani Abboyi Naidu. 1868. (8) An Abridgment of Telugu Grammar, by Rev. 4. Biccaz, Vizaga- patam. 1869. (9) Ashort Grammar of the Telugu language, by Madddli Lakshmi Narusayya, Telugu Munshi to the Civil Engineering College. 1870. (10) The Elements of Telagu Grammar, by @. P. Seoundranayagam Pillai, B.A., B.L. 1870. (11) The Vibhakti Chandrika, by K. Subbarayudu. 1870. ‘MasvLiPaTaM, } A.H.A. March, 1873. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION, This Edition has beon revised and re-arranged by the Rev. W. H. Campbell, M.a., and the Rev. D. Anantam, B.A. Mapras, —) September, 1905. ) E. 8.CONTENTS. PART I. Chap. L. Introductory Observations... II, Introduction to the Alphabet III. On the Alphabet and Orthography On Writing Telugu with English Letters On the Classification of Words IV. Skeleton Grammar and Model Sentences - Sentences PART II. V. On Nouns On Postpositions On Adjectives ‘VI. On Pronouns ' On Composite Nouns On Adverbs On Conjunctions On Interjections On Numerals ‘VIL. On Verbs Bs On the Positive Form of Verbs . + First Conjugation... = Second Conjugation aw. Third Conjugation ‘VII. On Telugu Syntax eae On the Meanings of the ceveral Tenses... B o1 102 106 110 3Chap. Ix. XI. ‘XIL. XIv. XVI CONTENTS. On Irregular Verbs On Passive Verbs On Reflexive Verbs On Causal Verbs . On the Negative Form of Verbs On the Felugu equivalent to the verb fo be On various ‘uses of Pronominal Afiixes, where in English the Copula is used cee aes . On Defective Verbs On Compound Tenses On cértsin Auxiliaries On Verbal Nouns ed On the Infinitive Mood ... On Verbal Participles On Adjective Sentences On the use of Relative Participles On the use of such Adjective Sentences as end in ™*, and include the pronoun Jase, ete. On Adverbial Sentences ai On Adverbial Sentences and phrases expressing Condition ... On Noun Sentences . we On Noun Sentences, which in English are not introduced by the conjuiiétion that, expressed or understood a On-Noun Sentences, which in English are introduced by the conjunction that, expressed or understood On Noun. Sentences involving the.zepetition of words pre- viously spoken or written Om Noun Sentences ending with the affix 839 or E77 ... On Idiomatig Uses of the words ©9, 88, ©88, Yo, VST... Page i2z 197 128 134 145 166. 17s 178 226. 281 aL 260 260 262CONTENTS. xi Chay. Page XVII. Miscellaneous information—(on proper names—on giving answers—on blessing and cursing—on certain afizes—on onomatopoeia terms. On OME Sease.—On Sanscrit prefixes) oe ae asa nee nee nee 8B XVIII. General Exercises, neat ane 280 Notes... oe eee nee ae nee ate OB. PART III. On THR GramMaticaL DiaLEct vsep iy Books. XIX. On Orthography, a eae ae ae BLE On Postpositions ... wea nee BIB On Nouns, D¥sgs0e0 or THT HG On Adjectives, SSsicaxive0 On Pronouns, SOga*SSss09 ... a On the Copulative Conjunction, “Soniye tee ae BOE. On Numerals, Sorgen On Affixes On Verbs Miscellaneous Information on ae on XX. On S0§, 2,5s%, BH HB, SwTrSai, ete. . 841 On Special Rules On SssreSsho200 ‘Table of Vowel Compounds wae nee nee nee 80 ‘Table of Consonant Compounds cee ee) we B51TELUGU GRAMMAR. — CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. On the meaning of the word Telugu, and the extent of the Telugu Country. 1. The language now under consideration is called Telugu or Tenugu. ‘The Sanscrit name is Andhra. The words Telugu and Tenugu are cor- ruptions of the word Telinga, which is the same as Trilinga, and means—the country of the three lingams, (from the Sanscrit tri three, and linga the emblem of Siva). ‘There is a tradition that the God Siva, in the form of a lingam, descended upon the three mountains named Kélésvaram, Srisailam, and Bhimésvaram, and that these three lingams marked the boundaries of the country, which was in consequence called the Trilinga, Telinga, or Telugu country. 2, The Telugu language is spoken by about twenty millions of Hindoos, who occupy the tract of country on the eastern side of the Indian Peninsula, which extends along the sea coast nearly from Madras to the confines of Bengal, and far inland into the heart of the Dekkan. This tract of country comprehends the British districts of Ganjam, Vizagapatam, Godavery, Krishna, and Nellore, the greater portion of the Nizam’s territories, the districts of Kurnool and Cuddapab, the northern and eastern portions of Bellary, the eastern part of Mysore, and North Arcot. On the History of the Telugu Country. 3. ‘In such a work as the present it would be out of place to write at any length upon this subject. For what is known of the early History of the Telugu country, the reader can consult such works as Elphin- stone's History of India. Vishnu Vardhana, who reigned at the end of the eleventh century, and Kriskna Rayalu, who reigned at Vijayanagar (or Bijayanagar) in the beginning of the sixteenth century were the most renowned patrons of Telugu literature, and in the reign of the former the first part of the Mahébhérat was translated from Sanscrit into Telugu.2 INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 4, Worunkal, the old capital of the kings of Telingana, fell into the hands of the Muhammadans in 1332, and the kingdom of Vijayanagar in 1556. During the Muhammadan rule Telugu literature was dis- couraged, and many foreign words, especially Hindustani, crept into the language. On the Telugu Language. 5. Although many Sanscrit words are used in Telugu, yet the language has not its origin in Sansorit. Pure Telugu is formed from roots, which have a close connexion with the roots of the other languages of South India, eg., Tamil, Canarese, etc. ‘These cognate languages form a distinct family of languages, which are distinguished by the term Dravidian. 6. As the people of the Telugu country embraced the religion of the Brahmans, who settled in large numbers amongst them and who were the religious and intellectual class, they adopted, at the eame time, much of the language of the Brahmans, which was Sanscrit. Hence many of the words in common use, especially such as are abstract, religious, or scientific terms, are Sanscrit. All the esrly Telugu grammarians also, who were Brahmans, not only borrowed their arrangement, illustrations, and grammatical terms from Sanscrit, but in many cases wrote the grammar itself in the Sanscrit language. 7. Native grammarians divide the words of the Telugu language into five classes, namely— (2) Words of pure Telugu origin. (2) Sanscrit derivatives. (8) Sanscrit corruptions. (4) Rustic or provincial terms. (5) Words introduced from foreign languages, that is, Hindustani, ete. 8 The greater part of Telugu literature consists of Poetry, which is written in the higher dialect. So different is the higher dialect from the dialect used in common conversation, that they form distinct branches of study. 9. ‘Telugu is remarkable for its melody of sound, which has gained for it the name of the Italian of India. It is regular in construction, and though copious, it is often like Tamil very laconic. In common con- versation a single word, or short phrase, is often used to convey theINTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 3 meaning of a whole sentence, Pronouns and the verb to be are frequently omitted; and ideas are usually expressed by linking together past participles, instead of, as in English, by a succession of finite verbs, linked together by conjunctions. 10. Whilst the language used in poetry is uniform, local dialects of Telugu vary. For instance, there is a certain amount of difference between the Telugu spoken in Rajahmundry, and that spoken in the Cuddapah district. ‘The present work is arranged so as to suit, as far as possible, all dialects, and where any differences exist, they are pointed ont. On the Way to Study Telugu. 11. ‘The Telugu language, like many others, may be viewed as consisting of three branches, namely—(1) The language of common conversation. (2) The language of prose books. (8) The language of poetry. Each of these three branches differs considerably from the others not only in the choice of words, but also in the grammatical forms of the same words. The greatest difference exists between the first and third branch, while the second branch holds a middle position between the other two, and partakes of the natnre and peculiarities of both. 12, Asa child first acquires the spoken language of every day life, before learning that of books or of poetry, so it will be found most advisable for those who are about to study a living language, and especially for those whose duty it will hereafter be to converse with the natives in their own ” vernacular, to master the spoken language first. ‘Those who have been aceustomed to study dead languages, must continually bear in mind, that the study of a living language must be pursued in a different man- ner from that of a dead language, or fluency in speaking will never be attained, ‘This is especially the case with Telugu, where the language of ordinary conversation differs so greatly from that which is employed in poetry and grammatically written books. 13. After the language of ordinary conversation has been mastered, a little additional study will enable the student to read such books as Morris's Telugu Selections, Brown's Telugu Selections, Brown's Telugu Reader, the Vikramarka Tales, and such religious books as the Telugu Bible, Telugu Prayer Book, Telugn tracts, ete. 14. If the student afterwards proceeds to read Telugu poetry, he will find it a distinct branch of study to master not only the prosody, but also the grammatical forms, and the uncommon words and expressions, which are peculiar to the literary dialect.4 INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. On the Choice of a Teacher. 15. It is impossible to learn the right pronunciation of many Telugu letters and words without a good teacher. It is therefore most unadvis- able for a student to attempt to begin the study of the language by him- self. If the student is in England, a competent teacher can generally be obtained by applying to the London University, to one of the Mis- sionary Societies, or to Kegan Paul, Trench, Tribner & Co. If the student is in India, a native Munshi can easily be obtained. Telugu, as spoken in Madras, is impure and much intermixed with Tamil. It is therefore advisable, if possible, to get a Munshi from some mufassal town in the Telugu country. 16. At the commencement, it is advisable to have » Munshi who knows English, but his services should be dispensed with as soon as possible, for one who knows the vernacular only. An English-speaking Munshi is generally more eager to improve his own English than to impart his ‘Telugu, and the ‘Telugu lesson degenerates into an English conversation. The natives as a rule have a very poor idea of teaching # foreigner Telugu. In most cases they will commence with the highly gramma- tical language; and hence they require to be continually reminded to teach the colloquial language only. ‘A Shastri will probably condemn the greater part of thie book, because it is written according to the usages of common conversation, instead of according to the abstruse rules of grammar. 17. On the other hand a vulgar style must be avoided. The Munshi ‘ought to be @ person of some education. Pariah servants use a vulgar pronunciation, and low words which are offensive to the upper classes of natives. A good style can be easily understood by all. In England an English gentleman has no occasion to adopt a vulgar pronunciation and low words in order to be understood by a labouring man. Teluga vulgarisms can soon be understood, and therefore they need not be learned, nor used when understood. 18, Very great care and pains must be taken to acquire from the first an accurate pronunciation. t will take time, but it is far from being lost time. If a bad pronunciation is acquired at first, it will be very difficult to remedy it afterwards. The student should be particularly careful not to mumble. He should hold up his head, use a loud tone, and insist upon the teacher's correcting his pronun- ciation, until it becomes exactly like that of a native.INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 5 19. The Munshi should be asked to read over occasionally the following passage, which requests him—(I) to teach at first only the language used in common conversation ; and (2) to correct carefully all mistakes in pronunciation. gohtpares Booron Bwybk WoPoawe sows, so Sew wan BPOVaomowe* ors HoXBodsoh — Aassood Se SL SOySspt TE BULA Taw BO SHE XHY TH BHR WGSTVPAS Spi argrvrasioor Hoses? sey Ucrowth Pas Booties soordvr sey Sodsnas, GB SHPO H_riee TAS SoM Boros Ff XOAS Rigo, GoFswost arwoy Basar Fs AYywoaswa, Se OSV Sopgsoorr ~Se SoPSrshesios wea Pasmm Prise Ayers Paoadwa, soda Bw Ts TSE onohSvares Mops BOakty¥ oor HEF oofixio BPPEKAW Swwt0d asndss, supbrrss day AAs BARS SO BT yeas aww an, Grr BXSvawa, 6. Be Be 2. BG BBS B.S, core PLB Mors BSio Rawr OSG BeySoaiws. sda o, ¥, ORE CLs Dosh PAawors SH NAW we aswourysrastoas HR sowrr Boos Svaswoas, Truggy Swrhr8 Gow MrBosins Tots Soro om Soopgasoorr SSM YToMHo HI Sodciow, Boose, MPrSrasiarre SoM shrasiowow wey Basmes PSS Srrurrcotoss Bydoas, SHIT Tw SAS BABATS cITTrsDd AxSbaor DEW eAKEH SN DOS SygrosoB_aswjyd. ——>>.6 INTRODUCTION TO THE ALPHABET. CHAPTER Il. INTRODUCTION TO THE ALPHABET. 20. This chapter is merely an introduction to the alphabet, which is explained at length in the next chapter. In this chapter, a few only of the letters are given and their formation explained, with the design of making the next chapter more easy for a beginner. Ql. The sign & is a Telugu vowel, and represents the sound of the English vowel in India, local, &c. mn © is @ Telugu consonant, and represents the sound of the English consonant s. ‘Thus the English syllable &s (as in assist) might be represented in Telugu thus, oo 22, But the form e is only used, when the vowel occupies the position of the first letter in a word. When it stands in any other position, it takes the following shape ~, and is placed at the top of the consonant to which it belongs. Thus the English syllable sés might be represented in ‘Telugu thus—e. (i.e. #), 23, That form of a vowel which is used, when it occupies the position of the first letter in a word, as ©, is called the initial form of the vowel. That form of a vowel which is used, whenever it occupies any other position than that of the first letter in a word, as v, is called the secondary form of the vowel. 24. | When a consonant has no secondary vowel form belonging to it, the sign © is put in the place of a secondary vowel form, and implies that a secondary vowel form is wanting. Thus the English syllables sds and ds would be more correctly written in Telugu as follows— 85, 5. It must be especially remembered that the sign & does not represent any sound, but simply denotes the absence of a secondary vowel form.INTRODUCTION TO THE ALPHABET. 7 25, When a consonant form is written with a secondary vowel form belonging to it, as %, the whole is called a compound letter. 26. Subjoined are five of the Telugu vowels, and five of the Telugu con- sonants, with their corresponding powers in English. Five Initial forms of Vowels. © has the sound of the English @ in the word local. father. in, pin. . eel, feel. . ember, member. Secondary forms of the above Vowels. ~ is the secondary fonn of © too] Five of the Telugu Consonants. § has the sound of the English k in kin. g « 27. If to these 5 consonants we add the secondary form of the vowel ©, namely ~, they become the coMPOUND LETTERS— OX Sy SS It will be noticed that in the case of the first three compound letters the secondary vowel form is written touching the consonant form, as 8, X, S, but in the case of the two last compound letters the secondary8 INTRODUCTION ‘to THE ALPHABET. vowel form is written without touching the consonant form as 3, S. It will be noticed also that the only distinction between # and © is, that in the case of the latter letter ~ does not touch the consonant form. If to these consonants we add the secondary form of the vowel 8, namely —e, they become the COMPOUND LETTERS— mm, Tm If to these consonants we add the secondary form of the vowel 9, namely 9, they become the COMPOUND LETTERS— 8 A, OR, 8 Re If to these consonants we add the secondary form of the vowel -&, namely %, they become the coMPOUND LETTERS— BA & & OB If to these consonants we add the secondary form of the vowel .), namely ~, they become the comPouND LETTERS— BR SB By 28. Thus far, therefore, the following portion of the Telugu alphabet has been given, viz.:—. Initial forms of 5 Vowels. o% & Gg od Secondary forms of the above 5 Vowels. - (&) = (@) 9 (9) 9 (&). > (2). 25 Compound letters. © v 8 8 % x ~ a A R s a a a 3. 3 > a & 2 * > g & oo N. B.—The cowpound letters must be learnt in hurizuntal lines.INTRODUCTION TO THE ALPHABET. Exercise |. ‘Name the following letters:— Bz os eK 8 8 & 9 3 7 wr a 8 mie & B a 6 d 8 > A x 2 a wr; ee s § r 8 3 a s wri 8 4 A B a 3 6 s > ud g§ & 29 8 B ® nm § oe A me oF Exercise Il. Write out the following words in English letters:— (1) XS, SS, SS, 65, 5. (2) 85, ak, 95, af, 38, as, @) &s, 85, 4 4&8. (4) 85, BS, OK. Key to the above Exercise. (2) Gan, nan, pan, san, sup. ) kin, gig, nip, pig, pin, sin, sip. (8) keen, peep, see, seen. (4) ken, pen, peg. NV, B.—As an exercise, the above words may be written out again from the English into Telugu. 2 SACHA yw a 410 INTRODUCTION TO THE ALPHABET. Exercise Il. The following Telugu words must now be read, written out and learnt by heart:— a shed. a fly. hatred. a feather sinner. heat. SX ajewel. on an oath. we ‘& crow. 5) work. a7r a turban. SR little. ua oy xis divers. henceforth. therefore, made of iron. ~ besides. sand.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. i CHAPTER Ill. ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 29. The letters of the Telugu alphabet and their combinations are very numerous, and at first sight make the language appear difficult. But in reality they make it far more easy to acquire correctly; for there is a distinct letter for each sound, and therefore every word is pronounced ecactly as it is spelt. In English the same letter may have several sounds, ¢. g., the sound of the letter « in the words but, put, hull, full, bury, busy. Such an ambiguity can never arise in Telugu; but after the correct sounds of the Telugu letters have been once acquired, every word can be pronounced with perfect accuracy. Hence it is of the greatest importance to acquire from the very first the exact pronunciation of each individual letter, especially as on the length of a vowel, or the harsh or smooth pronunciation of a consonant depends in many instances - the meaning of a word. 30. ‘Telugu is written from left to right like English. The letters ought to be upright, or slightly sloping towards the left. Care must be taken to form them in the proper way. This can only be done by watching how the teacher forms them. 81. Each letter must be repeated in a loud voice several times after the teacher. 32. ‘The Telugu letters are divided, as in English, into vuwels and con- sonants. (1) Initial forms of the Vowels. 33, ‘There are 13 vowels in common use. Their initial forms are as follows:— 6g HB Gam Soe 34. ‘The second, fourth, sixth, ninth und twelfth vowels are the lung sounde of the short vowels which precede them. ‘The letters © and &” are also long, und can only be represented in English by diphthongs.1a ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 35. ‘The sound of each Telugu letter should be learnt by hearing the teacher pronounce it. A few remarks, however, upon the pronunciation of the Telugu letters may be found useful. Corresponding powers of the Telugu Vowels in English. 36. In giving the powers of the Telugu letters in English, the object of the author is not to teach the student how to write Telugu with English letters, but merely to represent the sound of each of the Telugu letters by that letter which is most commonly used in English to express the same sound. Writing Telugu with English letters should always be avoided, if possible; but when necessary, that system of transliteration should be used which is given in a subsequent chapter of this book. - 37. It must be remembered that the name of a vowel in the English alphabet, and its sound in an English word are often very different; for instance the name of the vowel a, and its sound in the word futher. In English also the saie vowel often has several sounds; for instance the sound of the vowel win but and put. In Telugu the name of ech of the Telugu vowels and its sound ure one and the same; and each vowel has one and only one distinct sound. Hence in giving the powers of the ‘Telugu vowels in English, the student must consider not the NAME, but the sounb of the corresponding English vowel; and only that vaRTICULAR SOUND which is illustrated in the English words given us examples. Table of sounds. has the sound of the English a in the words era, local, India. has the sound of the English a in the word futher. has the sound of the English i in the words in, pin, gig, rip. has the sound of the English ce in the words eel, feel, need, heel. has the sound of the English u in the words pull, put, full. EO KDae has the sound of the English w in the words June, crude, rule.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 13 It must be specially noticed that the Telugu letters & and 6 never have the soft sound (pronounced like you) of the letter w in such English words as unison, use. The sound of the English « in such words as up, us is (as already stated) represented by the ‘Telugu letter 5. has a slightly shorter sound than the English ru in rupee. has the sound of the English ¢ in the words ember, fen, leg, beg, peg. a The letter 2) never has the sound of the English ¢ in such words as équal, elongate, era. This sound of ¢ is the same as that of ce, and would be represented in Telugu by &. has the sound of the English a in the words ache, fate, late. has the sound of the English diphthong ai in the word aisle. hhas the sound of the English o in the words solemnity, police. (This sound of o is rare in English.) Pow has the sound of the English o in the words old, gold, sold. has the sound of the English diphthong ou in the word ounce. ye 39. It must be specially remembered that there are no letters in Telugu to represent—(1) The sound of the English a in such words as pan, can, sat, hat. It is a common mistake for Europeans to pronounce © in this manner. This mistake must be specially guarded against.—(2) ‘The sound of the English o in such words as hot, got, object, ostensible. (2) Secondary forms of the Vowels. 40. The preceding letters, which are called the initial forms of the vowels, can only be used (as the name implies), when they occupy the position of the first letter in a word. In every other position each vowel uses a secondary form, which is never written by itself, but is always compound- ed (in a manner hereafter explained) with one of the consonant forms, 20 that the two together make but one compound letter. Although the secondary forms cannot properly be written separately, they are so writ- ten in the subjoined table in order to show more clearly what they are.14 ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY, Initial form. Secondary form. Initial form. Secondary form. i» - Each of the secondary forms has a distinctive name, which will be given hereafter. The letters a>, "2, and ‘O°, are usually inserted after the letter a0». In ordinary writing ‘ is never used, but in its place the vowel © is added to the consonant on the line, and the consonant « is subscribed ; as % a6, The letters wore and ‘Z> are merely lengthened forms of am and 43) Consonants. 41, A Telugu consonant is never written by itself (except in a few in- stances which are mentioned hereafter), but is always compounded toith one of the secondary forms of the vowels, 30 that the two together make but one compound letter. In order to sound the consonants in the alphabet, the secondary form of @, namely ~, is used; but in the case of eight letters (as mentioned below) ~ is only sounded, but not written. Whilst learning the consonants the subjoined notes must be read over. 42. The consonants are 35 in number. They are as follows— ¥ » x % 8 s o a fcc + & 8 “ & a: 6 & & 5 x 3 < o e Eo am so S F KR 5S H FE SK To these may be added the letter 0, called swuna, which stands for Nor M.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 6 43. The letter &, called SB*Us"e, is sometimes used instead of S. 44, The letter e, called wo&8 or ¥¥0S%, is usually inserted in the alphabet. Theoretically it has a somewhat harsher sound than 3, but practically no difference is made in the pronunciation. In grammatical ‘writing e9 ought always to ‘be used in certain words, e. g. Maso, $7 es; but in ordinary writing 8 is used instead, ¢. g. MS, S788. Notes on the Consonants. 45. (1) It will be observed that the first 25 consonants are arranged in five lines of five letters each. The.letters in the second and fourth per- pendicular columns are the aspirates of those in the first and third columns. The letters in the fourth horizontal line are the smooth sounds of those in the third line. 46. (2) In the case of the eight letters p, %, @, @, 4» €% 2, O, the vowel ~ is sounded, but not written. 47. (3) In the case of the six letters 3, 5, $, SS, %, ss, the vowel form is written without touching the consonant form. 48. (4) It is useless to waste much time upon the pronunciation of @ and @, for they very rarely occur. 49. (5) The letter +5 has two distinct sounds, namely ch, as in charity, and ff, as in hats, The letter 2 has also two distinct sounds, namely j, as in jar, and dz, as the ds in swordsman. When + and have the second mentioned sounds, they are some- times written thus— ¥ and 2%. They are so written throughout this chapter only. 50. (6) 4, &, ea, and ¥ must be pronounced with special care. They are very harsh ¢, d, n, and 7, made by curling back the tongue, and forci- bly striking the under part of it against the roof of the mouth. and & are very smooth ¢ and d, pronounced by placing the tongue against the top row of teeth. They have the sound of the English th in Thanet and that. © and sare smooth J and x, as in love, nothing. The letters ¢, 2%, ©, and ¥ are much harsher than the English letters ¢, d, n, and J; and the letters &, 2, %, and © are smoother. In fact the English letters are a medium between the two sets of Telugu letters,16 ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. © 51. (7) All the aspirate letters, except &, have the sign of aspiration, which is a small straight stroke written underneath the letter, as x. ‘They must be pronounced with great care, and at first with some exagger- ation. ‘The right aspiration is not the same as in the English letter h, (which corresponds with the letter ss»), but proceeds directly from the chest. 52. (8) Thesix letters ¥, 3, 2, &, &%, and 3 answer to the English letters k, p, b, m, y, and h. 58, @) The letters X and & are pronounced like hard g and r in the words gun and run. 54. (10) The letter has a sound intermediate between the English letters v and te. In some words it is more like », in others more like w. 55. (11) ¥ has the sound of the second ¢ in issue. The tongue must be placed againet the roots of the lower teeth. x has nearly the sound of « in show. ‘The tongue must be placed near the roof of the mouth. % has the sound of s in sun. 56. (12) The letter 25» is often written with the secondary vowel form touching the consonant form. 57. (18) & is merely the combination of y’and xs, and is pronounced kali 58, (14) Occasionally in the case of a pure Sanscrit or a foreign word a final consonant is written without the secondary form of a vowel. In this case the sign < is put in the place of the secondary form of a vowel to denote that secondary vowel form is wanting ; as—S, X, 5, etc., thus—es7S. (See para. 25). On writing TeLcteu with Exctish Lerrers. 59, When it is necessary to write Telugu with English letters, the following system is usually adopted :— Vowets © is represented by a. aor is represented by ri es - - = a —- — -—e 3 o- > s&s - = = Be - - 1 o —- — — ai é —- — —.4 2B -— = — o @ —- — —-14. & — = wm - ri. Cr —- — — aON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. is represented by | OY Oy Bm Mm OG HB ne ey | I | Consonants. xk. kh. g. gh. ng. ch, or ta. chh. j, or dz, dh. Sis represented by ee yoo & Ff - — — goo = S - —- - & —- —- — 5 ~~ § - 2. Foo fe 5 - - + Foo Se 5 - - + 5 - = + P,P - - & - - = a > oS Doe = 17 norm Example. €% w SB, vowsis% BYSTH, yossd™ srr TESBSN O08), HOY Gay d KOE SE Fee ROY aiyossss M0l,O Gy Pwymyw. Repu tandri-giru Bandaruku vella valenu. Ayanaté kida vella valenani mikkili korika unnadi ganuka padi rddzulu selavn ippintsa valenani mikkili prarthistuondnu. On Spelling. 60. When using the dictionary, it must be remembered that some words have more than one mode of spelling. Thus, for instance, some words use \ or ~ at pleasure, ¢. 9. Se or SME, Seg or SHH, Naw 318 ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY, or XB¥, Sou or So%X, Vrwks or Vews, ete. Some words use ~ or SD at pleasure, e. g. S*oXOotHes or SADT, BSA or ‘B-D4, etc. Some words have other vowels optional, ¢. g. SAB or SRY, WOT or Trev, etc. Some words have _) at pleasure, ¢. g. bors or 808, § or 85%, ete. Some words also are occasionally written in a contracted form, ¢. g. BBA or 88, SSarS or SYS. 61. | When an English word ending in a consonant or silent is intro- duced into Telugu, the vowel © is generally added. Thus the word book is usually written and pronounced 20%,» instead of 25. So sho office, ete. 62. In writing Telugu, contractions are sometimes used, ¢.g. @i for 58 ws, Bl for BD, Sli for Gy, Gi for GHVss, ete. 63. The terminations > and 9 are sometimes dropped; as Wc for AaosGH, Sz for SIZ. On Vulgarisms. 64. The following vulgarisms are common, but must be carefully avoided— (1) The use of for =; as w*dSouis6o for Wdoeisoo, WS for BS. (2) The use of 6% for 5; as Sosy for By, Cor for Be. (8) The use of > for; as on for Vows, (4) The use of ¥ for 5; as SoBSA for SORA. (6) The insertion of o and —; as Vows or Vos for O53, and 08, for Bod. (6) The insertion of aspiration; as xo for 7°, S°S for S78. (4) Compound Letters. 65. _After all the foregoing letters have been thoroughly learnt, and can be written down and repeated from memory, the next step is comparatively easy. It is the union of the secondary forms of the vowels with the conso- nant forms, to form COMPOUND LETTERS. 66. ‘The compound letters are, with few exceptions, formed upon very regular principles, and are therefore very easy tolearn. Whilst learning them the subjoined notes should be read. Hach line of the following table of compound letters must be carefully studied, until each letter can be named when pointed to, or written down when named.19 ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. ibhkhb bp Gbb hhh bbhbhhbbh bbb hh k Src bbbeebrbhbhbhbheer bbs Rbbbb sr wee bb bebe bb bhbhbhbbb babe bhhuhbby Srl eld A olmlel 2 Aleleel lel elma el cle) el eo] A pl el led A el Mele g PeKrinepwrs sen Per enerre ped erone take ws teers. 3 d Le & T plea ae aag aga aaa POP OR OF PITRE RGN THBRRNAG HAG wazdeerat seek eseguaevaiedissve taisd ee ble of Compou! to ea doers goaatecsananaabbonaawdadad | iw tak Cone Zoaet@acaaaanaaediooawrdahod HREGD EE ES DD DER RR BRAS REESE SHRHAEEES segxtewadoventoengenn seddcons wn hex bewd bud q g Z g Note.—In this list 2 and g are Si20 ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGHAPHY. Notes on the Compound Letters. 67. It will be noticed that—- (1) All the secondary vowel forms, except \y ‘x 9 and 2 are written above the consonant forms; \ and ‘v~ are placed to the right, on the same line a6 the consonant forms ; ) is placed to the right, partly underneath and partly on the same line as the consonant forms; and 2 is placed partly above and partly below them. 68. (2) The cowel v invariably retains its place above a consonant form, unless that actual position is occupied by another secondary vowel form. Hence all the consonants (except those in which ~ is only sounded, and not written) retain Y when adding ‘x, \s~, or ). Hence also in the case of the following letters ~ is retained, when adding =, °*, “*, and **; viz.—#r, Bye, Sor, die, FIT, SH, are, Bot, Hp, wr, HF, Ser, Soe, Sie~, SH, When thus retained, ~ is silent, and the other secondary vowel form only is sounded. 69. (3) The sound of —, when added to >, changes it into 3, and the sound of 5, when added to 9s, changes it into Os-. 0. (4) The forms ox and ov are used without 2 and 5 being ex- prewed, because this letter has the sound of inherent in it. 71. (5) The letters %, %, §, and their long forms are written ina peculiar manner to distinguish them from 3% and 3. 72. (6) The following letters instead of using S* and * generally use a peculiar form, namely, 3°, 3*, Bs, Br, Bw, Bsr, S*, S*. In com- mon writing however the forms °* and ** are occasionally used, as S*, Instead of $5°* und 6 the forms Hr and “~~ are sometimes used.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 21 Exercises in Reading. All the exercises in this chapter are upon reading and pronunciation only. No attention must as yet be given to the grammatical structure of the words or sentences. N.B.—As all these exercises contain common words only, they should be learnt by heart, and will form a useful vocabulary. Exercise |. 6%... desire. Ge>.... a fountain, SoS... favour. Exercise 1, OS... rain. ‘wrch...unripe fruit. B7.. well. Sre-....very, much. 5-5... mat. ‘OS.... a grandfather. Ws....language. * Soe...a word. Exercise Il. a river. Tro... & stone. +. 8 CLOW. S.....harm, 2&.....punishment. wet. 7... wind. ‘w...a way. 3rd... slander.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. morality. + poor. . an ant. shadow. manner. Sr... w call. Soothe... three. Gi6...... a village. ‘$rbo..... the earth. Sor. .. sight. 2-8... certain, sure. -s...... worship, BW...... curry. five. Boe. dirty. Bo....... outside, 0%....... if. BS aside. Sing ... fifty. Exercise IV. Exercise V. 82 ......8 wire. RB ....... a she buffalo. AB...... by. Ae .. separate, different. So..... a name, Be......... soil. Exercise VI. aPX..... smoke. a wall. 34... powder. Se0...... 0 place. 57. a tail, S*en...... leather. S%e....0 garden. 840.00. @ fort. §°8..... a fowl. DD... yes. §*8..... amonkey. 3 eh...... sult land.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 23, Exercise VII. an island. S808» ... a blaze. G08... all. .. medicine, _8o%..... colour, 802. ... below, under. 3808 ..... people. 3800 ... good. Sots ... fruit. os ... a flock. 2008 ...a carriage, cart. Yo ... a hedge. 202% ... before. 208...... a ball, Xot ... a bell. Exercise VIII. ZB ... .. twenty, FONso0, difficult. ATM... .. an umbrella, a lock. WPASao...... paper. .. light, lamp. S®......... @ mattress. . @ cot. Youe...\..... apen. +. God. Rorasie ... ... a quality. BBS... the body. Ye... the stomach, -SsS-arWSo.... intercourse. (8) Subscribed Consonants. In English two consonants often come together in one word, as for instance in the words butter, upper, grim, misled, ete. When this happens in Telugu, the latter consonant is subscribed or written under- neath the former consonant and has no secondary vowel form attached to it, Thus the word dappi, thirst is written 8. A consonant which is written underneath another one is called a subscribed consonant,24 ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 75. ‘The consonant on the line is pronounced first, and generally forms in reality a part of the previous syllable. Then the subscribed consonant and the vowel attached to the consonant on the line are pronounced together; thus %8 is pronounced dép-pi, @ay) is pronounced zib-bu, gRSxw in pronounced inh-té-mu, SEs60 is pronounced rar-nd-mu, ete., ete. 16. The subscribed consonants never have a vowel form, or the sign = (see paras, 24 and 58) attached to them, and in the case of eight letters they have a different shape from that which theysuse when written on the line. In the case of many other consonants also the shape is slightly altered. 77. The eight consonants, of which the subscribed form shave a different shape from that which they use when written on the line, are exhibited in the subjoined table. In it each of these consonants has its subscribed form written underneath it. oy 4 a 3 85 & 2 § 78. | When the letter is written underneath ©, or >, it is usual to join them to subscribed 5, instead of to the consonant on the line ;— thus, instead of writing &%y it is usual to write GiSp salt; s0 in like manner Diy fire, GSyH now, ete., ete. 79. When consonants are doubled in Telugu, they are pronounced far more strongly than in English. Thus $3 a cloth is pronounced far mote strongly than the English word butter. The neglect of this im- portant caution often causes Europeans to pronounce Telugu badly. 80. In English the letter R, when followed by a consonant, is usually pronounced smoothly, as in the words cart, curtain, etc. But in Telugu the letter 8 is invariably pronounced roughly even though followed by a conwnant, as in the words 8%, BY, SSO, Sogaoo, 81. _ In some words there are more than one subscribed consonant, as, woman, Such words are not very numerous,ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 25 Exercise IX. we a grandfather, MB,sho a horse. es a grandmother. QAYswv books. Bog, a father. Dy achild, 8 ‘@ mother. seassfogeo men. Oy an elder brother. work carriages. SRpws @ younger brother. Shp a tree, OF an elder sister. bo water. geo a younger sister. 2 names. Exercise X. Degas merit. Wooo formerly. ‘BW~y8gs9 intention. XEGsSo9 pride, Soopgssoo especial. S8Gss9 a mountain. EGS @ sentence. Be thegrammatical subject. Bye bravery. By the grammatical object. Exercise XI. Ssh a lesson. SSerrasho an oath, ran certainly. Sekoreaiss a journey. eg understanding, ~gagabo a dispute. 86 astory. REGS A9 aright, a3 desire. SFG surprise. 8 reverence. DF yaioxoo certainty.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. Exercise XIl., wssy a curse, resogeso the sun. HO Ao clean. Dao clear. besw quick. PesoReo a disciple. DH leave. Roy easy, BD a short space of time. 28 the body. ars money. we schools, Exercise XIII. sore a punkah (noun). — o*% pull (Imperative). 8 that (Adj. pron). eX don’t pull (negative Imper). we this (Adj. pron). SoD7> gently (adverb). xgar strongly (adverb). BoE? OK Pull the punkah. ta Sow orX Pull this punkah. © Sow NSH Don't pull that punkah. Bowe Meare eX Pull the punkah strongly. HoT? BHT or Pull the punkah gently. © BoB Kir erK SH Don't pull that punkah strongly. Exercise XIV. Imperative moods Nouns. BxOK oe bring. Oy a plate. dxowat take away. zreo milk. : Bxo¥'orssz don't bring. Reo an umbrella, Bxoyswx don’t take away. 58 a stick.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. wn 8 5S, BET Bring that stick. 6 Os) browatse Don't take away that plate. R°tioX> BX o> Bring an umbrella. wren BY OSE Don’t bring milk. Ba Ra BxoNTt Take away this umbrella, © 8G, baasm Don’t take away that stick. D%y Bxos'oe Bring a plate. Exercise XV. Imperative moods. Adverbs, See dust. Bhs here. Beso wash. 8,8 there. dom send. Sore quickly. Ep put. wr well. SEG Ws Typ Put that stick here. Bi SOT Hoy Dust this punkah. RTesNo SOU SoH Send an umbrella quickly. Be OS) W7r Sea ‘Wash this plate well. shen Sore Beever Bring milk quickly. ATK OB, Bhp Pat the umbrella there. Exercise XVI. Imperative moods. Nouns, Sess Don’t dust. Souk a blanket. SHOKSK Don’t.wash. 2R 8 box, Sosse Don't send. GBBx9 a letter. BRS Don't put. sg a knife.ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 8 DR meow Ba Sound FesX 8 B8Biio Som © DS) VENSH © RN Sosasz 8 DR OHS Wwe ¥Q Bio 8 DR bwrstsee 8 EG, SossmH Dust that box. ‘Wash this blanket. Send that letter. Don’t wash that plate. Don’t send that umbrella. Don’t put that box there. Bring a knife. Don't take away that box. Don't send that stick. Exercise XVII. ©D those (things). g® these (things). ap, a table. go Bsoradt BD Wre Fer Bw Moy © %by Heosse~y Ais Beyer 8 Rowse Sossye 8 WR VAKsH © %8y Som © OY, BU Tp Bi SHOT OHS Tp 868) Sgore Bxosoe Sw WM Seow gO Sossx 0d bor orsee By a chair. SoS a cot, bedstead. &Sx0 a lamp, light. ‘Take these (things) away. Wash those (things) well. Dust this table. Don't dust that chair. Bring a light. Don’t send that cot. Don’t wash that box. Send that chair. Pat that table here. Put this cot there. Bring a chair quickly. ‘Wash that table well. Don't send these (things). Don’t bring those (things).ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 29 General Observations on the Alphabet and Orthography. 82. A letter is called VLSs9 or S¥g. The alphabet is called S,ssSr~00, The mark of aspiration is called 2%, and an aspirate letter 2848s, The vowels are called Nye, and the consonants Srgge. 88. In common writitg and talking, instead of the initial vowels, the following letters are often used, namely— cS instead of ©. - B® instead of a. Gr eee [oo sfesleteest Gh O97 eres Be % a. Hr eeseceee @. ‘Thus instead of writing—6i, Sno, etc., it is common to write— Sr, GoM, ete. 84. ‘The use of &, Gb, Gow, and H¥ (instead of a, 5, ©, and Z) is especially common. 85. The sign © (called BoSeex) written on the line, adds the sound of R to the syllable but one before it; thus Aye-s60 is pronounced the same as Ags, 86. The sign 8, called O¥, only occurs in Sanscrit words, At the end of a word it is pronounced ha, as “Ct; but in the middle of a word it has the sound of kk or of kp, according as it is followed by © or by Sj as CSW Ser, SMSG-VGasoo,30 ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 87. The names of the secondary forms of the vowels are as follows :— ‘Secondary form, Name. Secondary form. Name, Y veeeecees SORbp, hee ee see BGS. ae eeees Bago. aerate Saga. Serer 8. lense + BECSo, Seen 8 AS x. Bo seeee snes BSG. Screens SMS. erent Siig ps0. Nr eeeeenes OTH xg, BD cesses, DGS. Qocrreeree Sey soa, 88. A subscribed consonant is called 3. ‘Thus in the word 89 the letter © is called e323. The subscribed consonant is called S558, and the subscribed consonant \_, is called (73j0°S4. 89. The letters <5 and @ are pronounced ch and j in all Sanscrit words without exception, and also in all pure Telugu words, except when followed by the vowels “, —, \ \s, S*, %*, and >, in which case they are pronounced ts and dz. 90. The letter 0, called *8, is pronounced like N, when followed by any consonant asfar as %. When followed by any other consonant, or when placed at the end of a word, it is pronounced like M, as—vo%b, HSo. 91. __ Inprinted books euch letter and each word is written separately; but in ordinary writing a running hand is usually adopted, called A"exmo¥ty, in which the letters and also the words are ran into each other. In R*eoxo¥$p the letters are often somewhat differently shaped. On Punctuation. 92. In modern Telugu books the English system of punctuation is usually adopted. In old books | answers to a comma, and Ito a full stop. In poetry the mark | is placed at the end of each line, except the last, which takes the mark I! .ON THE ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY. al ON THE Cuassirication oF Worps. 93. The words of the Telugu language are classified as follows :— First. Bigs or Sty Ags, i. e. the language of the land, or words of pure Telugu origin, e.g. 2B, S%, NOM, Secondly. SSS, i.e. Sanecrit words introduced into Telugu according to certain fixed rules. These words contain the crude forms of Sanscrit, but they assume certain terminations, in order to be assimilated to pure Telugu words, e, g. Sanscrit Us, Telugu T™0%%, Sanscrit Bogs, Telugu Sows. Thirdly. Seyi, i, ¢. Telugu corruptions of Sanserit words, formed by the substitution, elision, or insertion of letters, ¢. g. Sanscrit “Sows, Telugu Youks, Sanscrit Aoate, Telugu esis, Fourthly. ,jga60, 4, ¢. Colloguialisms. ‘These are colloquial forms which, though commonly used by all classes, are not authorized by the rules of grammar, e.g. Say, BSyrryw, Fifthly. wg Bigs, i.e, words introduced into Telugu from foreign languages, e.g. Tamil, Canarese, Hindustani, English, etc. e.g. Ser aday (Hindustani), ¢§% an office (English). 94, SBySossveo consist chiefly of abstract terms, and words connected with religion, Brahminicsl customs, science, law, medicine, ete. All words which contain any of the letters mw, a7, @ U>, 2, o ¥, &, 4, or any of the aspirate letters, are SSyss0e0. The only exception to this rale is, that some of the aspirate letters are occasionally used in the spelling of Hindustani and English words, and in a few Telugu colloquialisms; as S500, ¥r, The letter ¥ also is often incorrectly used in the place of %. ——€<—_SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES, CHAPTER Iv. SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. As the primary object of this book is to teach the student to speak Telugu fluently and correctly with as little delay as possible, it is advisable that he should be provided at the very commencement with the means of practising himself in talking the language, and that he should not be hindered from doing so by being required first to learn all the grammatical details of even the colloquial dialect. After careful consideration of the manner in which children and illiterate persons acquire a foreign language without the aid of agrammar, there can be little doubt that imitation and constant repetition have much to do with its acquisition, and that at first memory, rather than intellect, is called into action. For this reason it is highly important that the student, before proceeding to study the details of grammar, should be provided with the means of ezercising his memory, and of gradually acquiring the habit of speaking Telugu. To provide these means is the object of the present chapter. ‘This chapter consists of two parts, In the first part 9 SKELETON RAMAR of the colloquial dialect is given, shewing the most important inflections of the language. In the second part a series of SENTENCES are provided, illustrating many of the common forms of expression, and providing the student with models upon which to form other sentences. SKELETON GRAMMAR. . Article. In ‘Telugu there is no article. Nouns, sincutar. The genitive case is generally the same as the nominative case, or changes its last syllable into 2 or &, ‘The dative case adds § or & to the genitive, and the objective case adds © or %.SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. 38 PLURAL, The nominative generally adds ©> to the nominative singular, or changes its last syllable into eo. The genitive changes final ©» of the nominative plural into ©. The dative adds & to the genitive plural, and the objective adds *, Subjoined is an Exar, Sin, N. R86. G. AAS. iD, RAE. 0, RNC, Pl ON, Rte, G. R80, D. Aso. 0, AMiors, C. Postpositions. Postpositions, which answer to English prepositions, are affixed to the GENITIVE case of nouns; as A*2®s-~t. Upon the wall. D, Adjectives. Telugu adjectives are indeclinable ; as S02 guod. E, Pronouns. (1) The pensowat, pronouns are as follows :— NOMINATIVE, GENITIVE. DATIVE. OBJECTIVE. SIN. 1st Person. Wm I. a Ofme, w% Tome, xm Me. Qnd Person. 6 Thou, 6 Ofthee. % ‘Tothee, iy Thee. ara (Hae. a He. =P Of him, sr8 Tohim. mA Him. Fem. dNew. o& She, it. ard Of her, it. ert To her, it, ay Her, it. PL. lst-person, tore We. S& Ofus, 7% Tous, susp Us. Qnd person, rvs You. Br Of you, 978% To you. soit You. (Mas. & Fem, 5-08 They (w.F). =~ Of them. s-08 To them. sop Them. (Newer. . eb They(wev.). a Of them. 88 To them. Ti em, (a) The feminine pronoun 3rd person has in the singular the same form as the neuter, and in the plural the same as the mas- eutine, (b) The singular 5¥ is only used to a low person. The plural D8 is used to a person of respectability. (©) 37% and 8 are only used in reference to low persons. In re- ference to persons of respectability the words @diS and 3s are used. (Gen. S385. Dat. SASH Obj, SALSA.) (2) For possessive pronouns the genitive cases of the various personal pronouns are used; as J* My. a2 His, (3) The inTRRROGATIVE pronoun St who? is seldom used in the singular. Plural. N. St. G. 88, D. J588. O. JS8D. 534 SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. (4) The apsgcrive pronouns — © That, those, 4 This, theses S Which? Smo What ’—are indeclinable. F. Composite Nouns. These nouns are formed by affixing 27th, 8, & (for ©), and 9 (for WD) to adjectives; as Sof) good, Soares @ good man, 3008 a good Woman or thing. G. Verbs. In Tolugu the negative is always expressed in the verb. Hence every verb has two forms (1) a postrtve and (2) a NEGATIVE. (1) Positive Form. First Conjugation. Second Conjugation. Infinitive. SB To strike. oH To do, ete. Past verbal participle. 873 Having struck. Be. Past relative participle S¢$5 Who (or which) struck. Rs, Conditional form. 88 — If strike, or if struck. G¥. Past tense. S7earao — Istruck, or have struck. WRIA. Future tense. SgBra I shall or will strike. ays. Imperative. Sing. 2nd.§"$p (or 8430500) Strike thou. Boosor Basi. Pl. 2nd. 8308 Strike you. dtoa, Past Tense in full, SIN. 1st Person. 873° I struck, or have struck. SRwrx Idid, ete. Qnd SBI Thon struckest, orhaststruck. WRI). an fuas. S°g3r~w> He struck, or has truck. Bares. (F.&N.S78S8 — She or it struck, or hasstruck. WRB. PL. lst SBaraio We struck, or have struck. Braraoo, Qnd S°Yar You struck, or have struck, “BRATS. ater, S¢30°89 They (M&v.)struck, orhavestruck. SRT", 8rd ” |wev. 872389 They (wev.)struck,orhavestruck. URSD,SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. 35 Future Tense in full. SIN. 1. Sepera I shall or will strike. Bays. ’ 8496S Thou shalt or wilt strike. thy. Stes He shall or will strike. Bags. S7bs8008 She or it shall or will strike. — WaZ08. SEB. We shall or will strike. tam, 2 S74 Bs You shall or will strike. yw. Shp wre They (a. & ¥.) shall or will strike, Ga3t. 874989 They (sxv.) shall or will strike. gO, (2) Negative Form. Ist Conjuyation. Ind Conjugation. Past verbal participle. S7Be Not having struck. Bas, Indefiniterelative participle 8"$39 Who strikes not, ete. HcoO, Conditional form. S7Eva°S Ido or did notstrike, ete. Baoys*s. Past tense. S"ySm I did not strike, ete. Baodas, Fature tense. 873A I will not strike, etc. WAXD. Imperative. Sin. & Pl. S282 Do not strike. Bassey. The past tense is indeclinable, e. g. x 8S I did not strike, © bave not struck. ¥, 87482 Thou didst not strike, or hast not struck, etc., etc. Future Tense in full. SIN. 1. $7433 I shall o will not strike. Bosne, 2. 8788) Thou shalt not strike, ete. Sado¥y 87430 He shall not strike. Basses, 872% She or it shall not strike. Bane, S438 We shalll not strike. Basis, 2 874380 You shall not strike. aww, (u.&¥. 86389 They (af.¥.) shall not strike. Taso. 87238) They (NEU.) shall nct strike. Bang.36 SKELETON GRAMMAK AND MODEL SENTENCES. H, General remarks, (1) The usual order of wordy in a ‘Telugu sentence is subject, object, verb, N. B.—Nouns denoting inanimate things commonly use the form of the nominative for the objective case. @) In Telugu, when expressing various actions performed by the same subject, all of them except the last are expressed by Past verbal participles. Thus instead of saying—He came to my house, and saw the letter, and tore it up—We must say in Telugu—Having come to my Aquse, having seen the letter, he tore it up. (8) To denote « question the final vowel is changed into, Thus Sgr He beat. S7Ygwra? Did he deat? (4) To denote emphasis the final vowel is changed into ~. Thus wrt He. ae He (and no one else). (5) To denote doubt the final vowel is changed into “*, Thus 88 Who, D565 Some one or other (I don't know who). (6) Where in English the Infiultive mood is used, in Telugu » form is generally used, which is like the infinitive with a8 attached to its as Ucourss. (2) The English auxiliaries must and ought are expressed by adding SRSA or SSA to the infinitive. Must not and ought not are expressed by adding 8o~22%. The relative participles are SRS and S~O, (8) Arrelative participle is equivalent in English to the verb and rela- tive pronoun in a relative sentence. What is in English the antecedent always immediately follows the relative participle in Telugu. (®) In Telugu a subordinate ventence always precedes the sentence on which it depends. The verb in a subordinate sentence is frequently a relative participle with some affix attached to it; as S*ESetoarw, BRS STH, SWE pes, (10) The word © is generally placed at the end of every »ubordl- ‘uate ventence which either (1) occupies the place of an object to a verbSKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. 37 signifying to speak, to tell, ete—or (2) is in the corresponding English sentence introduced by the conjunction that. (11) When in an English sentence the verb to be is the copula, in Telugu the verb is generally omitted in the positive. In the negutive the form “3° is used in its various persons. (12) When in an English sentence the verb to be is not the copula, in Telugu the tense G79 is used in the positive, and the tense OA in the negative. The tenses Gry, Bx, and Tr are declined as follows:— SIN. 1. Gays Lam. SH. Wes. I am not, ete. 2. GS Thou art. BY. TY. 3.0 Gm % He is. Sm, Tres. (R&S GB She or it is, Sa. TUS. PL. 1. Gary We are. Bii02, Bris. 2. Gay Ye are. BH, FH, 5 {eer GAAS — They (a. & ¥.) are. 8, “TN, “(s. G%yD —-They(x.) are, BY. TH. (13) Motion towards an object that cannot be entered (e. g. a man) is expressed by the postposition S88 as a-DSAE BV. Go to (near) him. (14) Infinitives of the second conjugation always end in d%. The prevent verbal participles of S43 and WaS gy, Spd and ky. By Prefixing them to the tense 7% (I am) a progrevslve present tenve is formed. Thus 820% striking. G&A) % I am, contracted Sho Bory AS Tam striking. Bir Lam doing, ete. —— dcSKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. SENTENCES, ‘The subjoined sentences are arranged in THREE STS, each of which concludes with a long sentence embodying the most important words and expressions used in the preceding shorter sentences. ach sentence must be thoroughly mastered, and indelibly impressed upon the memory by being repeated several times daily. Each sentence (especially the last one of each set) must be so thoroughly mastered that the student can bring it into use at a moment's notice, without having to think about it first. When learning To sP#Ax a language, the all-important point is quality not quantity. One sentence thoroughly mastered is a better day's work, and of infinitely more value that twenty sentences which require an effort to recall them to memory. First set of Sentences. ‘VocapuLary of words used in the first set of sentences, (Those words which occur in the skeleton grammar are not here repeated.) GBB A letter. Bs To say, tell. S8yx00 Anendeavour. BY To go. sa Work. wes To write. oH, There. BOseHas — To inform of. The affix 88a, when attached to a past relative participle, means after, the affix %y638 although, and the affix %;3°8s9 according as. (See para. #. 9.) Bw BLT A. (See para. G. 1.) I will go. WH OFA8 Bw. They will go there. (Lit. To there.) DoH OY,48 BPT-o? (See para. x. 1. (b), and u. 3.) Did you go there? Dy G MO Wears? (See para. B. 4, and H. 1. note.) Have you done that work ? Dy) BRS SO gor? (See para. H. 8 and 11.) Is this the work which you have done?SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. 39 Bw Das Sd ga. This is the work which I have done. DH TYAOSORS BHU GB. (See pat ‘This is the letter which you must write. H. 7 and 4.) BSD Broward BOw~. (See para. z. 4, and H. 9.) After he had done that work, he went. SOLS BSS Wrsioo Tasso. (See para. c. 2, and B. 1. c.) I will not do as he told me. Or TRS Tvs Bays. (See para. H. 9.) We will do as you have written. Dor TAWALsE, Saw WyAoes. (See para. H. 9.) Although you write, he will not write. SAGs BOWL, Bro BYE. (Seo para. w. 9, and o. 2) Although he went, I did not go. Bi GHAR BYSSHT, Or GY SA. After I have gone there, I will write you a letter. BH SYST WH Gay woo Rw. (Gee para. 1. 6.) I made an endeavour to write to you. ; Dork G SD Taowso Gooify soo Dagor? Will you make an endeavour to do that work ? 8 5D How. GAYiso Sy S04, (See pars, z. I. b.) Do that work. Write a letter. © GEEi9 TYING. (Bee para. ¢. 2) Do not write that letter. © GBSxo Trash (Sy aoso OD) BAyTa? (Geopara, x. 10.) Did he say—write that letter? 8 SD Waos4o (So GD) Gyr. (Gee para. H. 10.) He said—don’t do that work. SAS TY HLS (So OD) BSyssye38, GAs. (See para. x, 9and10, Although he says, do not write, they will write.40 SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES, 1 a 3 ‘ 6 CONCLUDING SENTENCE. 57% OY,A8 SPSS, TH GYVs9 6 7 8 ® 10 n 2 Sr, Se Boesors seo Bdawedh, se Baesxo 2 “ 15 16 " 6 RHA, Orv WS Woy Aawwrssy Sarsyso Bays. 8 1 3 8 2 2 6 6 8 Literal translation, After you have gone to there, having written a 5 4 4 10 oo 9 8 7 8 2B letter to me, if (you) inform (me) of the works which I must do, won 1 2 mB although they say, don’t do, (I) will make an endeavour to do according wu 8 as you have written. Free translation, After you have gone there, if you will write me a letter, and tell me what I ought to do, I will endeavour to do as you write, although they tell me not to do so. N. B.—The small numbers shew the order of the words in Telugu, and enable the student to translate word for word. After all the above sentences have been thoroughly mastered, the following English sentences must be translated into Telugu, and after correction by the teacher, must be learnt by heart. ‘Translate into Telugu. Go there. He will not go there. Will he go there? After he has gone there, will he write to you? After I went there, I did not write to him. If you write to him, he will write to you. If he goes there, he will not write tome. If you will inform me, I will do as you say. (Tel. as you have said.) After you had informed him, did he not do as you said? Although you go, he will not’ go. Although he writes, I shall not write. Although he does what he ought to do, I will not write a letter to him. Although they told him not to do that work, he did (it), ‘Altbough I say, “don’t go,” he will go. Although I say—go, he will not go. I will endeavour to do as he told me. I will endeavour to go there, He did not endeavour to do the work. He endeavoured to do as I told him, If you go, I will endeavour to write to you. If you write, I will endeavour to do what I ought to do. Although he tells (you) not to go (Tel, says ‘‘don't go"), if you go there, I will write a letter to you to inform you what you ought to do. If I go there, and do as you told me (Tel. I having gone if do), will you write to me? If you do what you oughtto do, I will write to you, after I have gone there.Ge (g. 088) A house. B30 A day. Dey Yesterday. Kobs Anhour. ‘To-morrow. ze A box. Sorwh | Three. Bs8 Shooting. S00 Good. SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. 41 Second set of Sentences, ‘Vocasutary of new words used in the second set of sentences, Sor —Agentleman, ayy Bad. S@arvs A carpenter. wie. Very, much, Soars Afterwards. Xw¥ Therefore, Sor Quickly. 38% (Postposition)Near. Sos To send. The word S*87°% affixed to a person’s name has the force of Mr. ‘Thus—Mr. Martin would be SBS S787, Dre gosss BPI (Para, x. 2) ‘They went to your house, i BOTS OH Ose Goes BYSar? Did not Mr, Martin go to your house? SASS Goes Soinr BL Go to his house quickly. Sorrth Nobo © WR sows He will send that box at three o'clock. 8 DR BH sow, Send that box to-morrow. Bt WR Oy Soka? Did he send this box yesterday? Sar © WE Sosse (Para. x.) ‘The carpenter did not send that box. SZarOSB8 BL (Para. v.13.) Go to (neat) the carpenter. 8 SD Sore BRywy wr? (Para. Hw. 14.) Are you doing that work quickly?42 SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTRNCES. Diy FOE BOTH He went (out) shooting yesterday. (Lit. for shooting.) Bx Bros BLS (Para. «. 2.) I did not go (out) shooting. wre BH BYESORWSY BSy (Para. w. Tand 10,) Say that he must go to-morrow. © DWH SZarO gols8 Sows BSy (Para. w. 10.) ‘Tell (them) to send that box to the carpenter's house. BO gos8s BY, © SD Seve Pavsobisso Bsp (Para. w.2) Go to their house, and say that they must do that work quickly. DR SH Sonsorwwy syarod* Bp ‘Para, w. 7.) Tell (with) the carpenter that he must send my box to-morrow. S¥rOIBE BL, T WR SoHIH Bey. (Geo Parm. w. 2 and 13) Go to the carpenter, and tell him to send my box. (Lit. Having gone to near the carpenter, say, send my box.) SILS Hodes, Te sodarto wt (Pare. F, and H. 11) He is a good man. They are not good people. Sas OH, Ses (Para. w. 12.) He is not there. 8 WR MoO. Ke Wy SOS wees (Para. v, and w. 11.) That box is a good one. ‘This box is not a good one. ©8 wis~o ony WB (Para, a. 11.) ‘That is a very bad box. 8 DR vs ays That box is a very bad one. 8 T 89 WH ‘That is not my work. O85 DR Se (Para. H. 12) ‘There is not a box there. wr 52 Ga (Para x. 12.) have no work. (Lit. There is not work to me.) dor gap Gyr? TNH so Ge GxH Have you a house? T have a good house.SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. B 1 as 8 8 6 CONCLUDING SENTENCE. S~OS STSMO gost BOK ASxo » 0 u n u ro a “0 BS XGY srw Kobo ares BLVD Bsp. 16 7 18 1 mo a SHS Soro SBE Fh Sok WE aod wets, aio % oT ao at BoB, BO mod BR Sosisonssen BSy. 4.88 8 22 1 Literal Translation. Having gone to the house of Mr. Martin, say uo5 6 8 9977 + BH 1 MoM 1B that this day work is not to me, therefore at three hours (I) shall go to 18 16 9°18 oT te shooting. Afterwards having gone to near the carpenter, say that the box m1 a1 9k Bw % 9 35 1G which (he) sent yesterday is not a good one, (but is) 4 very bad one, 2 90:99 28 oT (and that he) must send a good box to-morrow. Free Translation. Go to Mr. Martin's house and say that I have no work to day, and so shall go out shooting at three o'clock. Afterwards go to the carpenter, and tell him that the box which he sent yesterday is not a good one, that it is a very bad one, and that he must send a good box to-morrow. ‘Translate into Teluga. He will not send that box quickly. He did not go quickly. Did you go to my house yesterday? Mr. Martin will not go there. Will you go to them at threeo’clock? He did not send that box yesterday. Go to him, and say that he must do that work to-day. Tell him that he must write to-morrow: That is not your box. This is my house. He isa bad man. He has no box. Have you not a house? I have no work, so I shall go to Mr. Martin. This house is a very good one. Tell him that this is not a good box, and that he must send three good boxes to-morrow. Third set of Sentences. -Vocasunary of new words used in the Third set of sentences. OX An elder brother. dSptio ‘When. wee A king, a Rajah. mA But. ‘SoxB A thing, matter. EK To ask. SYssr~weoo A message, news. “BO —‘To be known.44 SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. The affix 778 implies respect, and is followed by a verb in the plural. ‘The affix 7° added to an infinitive means—as soon as. ‘The affix Spe added to a relative participle means—when. gO Or VATS VE wes, (Para. w. 11.) ‘This is not your elder brother's box. SASS BSy5 GO Waywry Ao. ' (Para, w. 14.) I am doing the work which he told me. 6 SOXB der wHy7ON VAT. (Pata. H. 1 & 1. Note.) asked your elder brother that matter. Eda VARS, BiyBr. (Para. x. 1. c.) If you ask him, he will tell you. GALS TOD GAAS piso, TSS Bdassaod, (Para. u. 9.) When he asked them, they did not inform (bim). SEALS BYSSyt, TH 6 SoXB Bdeosavdn, ‘When he went, he did not inform me of that matter, WH BETS, Orr OS TOE SYSrrWSiho SoMOAV, As soon as they go, I will send a message to your elder brother. SOILS CEXTHS, BRT. As soon as he asked, I told him. © SoXB TrermB BOAT, I will inform the Rajah of the matter. (Lit. I will make known that thing to the Rajah.) © KoXB wasis BORA. He knows it. (Lit. That affair is known to him.) BIS BRS SoXB TH BOs. (Para, uw. 8.) I do not know what he said. SdHS Jip BSS, rH Baws, (Para. u, 5 I do not know when he will go. Bx JSpto BRTS*, ar BOs. (Para. u. 5.) You do not know when I shall go.SKELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCKS. 45 TH Mipth BLT Vs, syxorwawo Sora, I will send word at what time they go. DG. SAGWS SFA Ty AwYrze. (Para. H. 7.) ‘You must not write a letter to him. a6 BIS SO UaosoRa Wd GAS BRS SN Vosrorwsie, You must do the work that Ihave told you, but you must not do the work that he hes told you. 103 a 4 8 6 CONCLUDING SENTENCE, B% Dr GHATOD G SONKB GASH yt, — 1 8 ° 10 4” a. 18 “ THT Jdpth Bde ww BOs mw sswows BEA, 15 16 w 1b 19 20 a DH SYSTSto SomHErs; 5028, are Ise BOs 2 23 Bawyrssy BRywes, 6 16 2 8 8 4 58 Literal Translation. When I asked your elder brother that thing, e und m 100 8 7 7 9 OM (he) said—It is not known to me when the Rajah will go, but as soon Mos ou wo 6 61 6 BO 19 as he goes, (I) will send to you a message; if (I) send (it), you mo 8 2 % 9 2% must not make (it) known to any one. Free Translation. When I asked your elder brother, he said that he did not know when the Rajah would go, but that as soon as he (i.e., the Rajah) went, he would send me word, and that if he did so, I must not mention it to any one. Trauslate into Telugu. Is he your elder brother? Ask him that matter. If you ask him, he will not tell (you). When he asked me, I did not tell (him). As soon as he asked you, did you tell (him)? When did you ask him that matter? Do you not know when your elder brother will go? ‘When they went, your elder brother sent me a message. Your elder brother did not say when they would go. The Rajah told me that matter,46 SRELETON GRAMMAR AND MODEL SENTENCES. but he did not tell my elder brother. .I do not know what the Rajah said. I will not tell you what he said. I will tell the Rajah what you said. If you go to the Rajah, he will tell you what I said. As soon as he informed me of that matter, I went to your elder brother, and told him. By using the words already learnt in the exercise given in Chapter IIL, the student should now proceed to construct for himself series of fresh sentences on the model of those given in this chapter. After practising himself in this manner for some weeks, he should pro- vide himself with a pocket-book, and enter into it daily a few sentences, such as he is likely to require for constant use; and after having learnt them thoroughly, he should bring them into practical use on every possible occasion. At the other end of pocket-book it is advisable to enter any new words that may occur in the sentences thus written down, 0 that there may be sentences at one end, and corresponding vocabulary at the other. It is a most important rule not ¢o enter a fresh sentence, until all that have been entered have: been thoroughly mastered. If this rule be neglected, the pocket-book will soon become a collection of unlearnt instead of mastered sentences, Whilst pursuing the above course, the student should proceed to study the grammar of the colloquial dialect, as explained in the following pages.PART II.48 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. CHAPTER V. ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. I. NOUNS. On the Translation of the English Article. 95. The English indefinite article a, and the definite article the may be considered as inherent in Telugu nouns. But 2.8 one is sometimes used, where in English the indefinite article is used ; and the force of the English definite article is sometimes expressed in Telugu by using the demonstra tive adjective pronouns « that or those, and ¥ this or these. On the Formation of Nouns. Nouns, when not elementary may be formed from Verbs, Adjectives or other Nouns. 96, A class of abstract nouns are formed by affixing Sis to Telugu adjectives, and SG to Sansorit adjectives ; as S80 good, SoDSsio goodness, Ry great, R7SySsH00 greatness, BAS excellent, BSG excellence, Sy hard, Sys hardness. 97. Nouns denoting the agent are sometimes formed from 88% nouns ending in v &%», by changing this termination into 9; as WSs ein, SPB a sinner, Ss covetoueness, S*) a miser. 98, A class of masculine and feminine nouns are formed from neuter nouns, by adding the terminations 5° and 87 respectively ; as Séo"e*es a hunteman, 8983 a workwoman. 99. The affix a*%o is sometimes added to a neuter noun; as BoAd*eo a glutton, 100. Many nouns are derived from the roots of verbs. (1) In the case of roots of the first conjugation, the noun has generally exactly the same form as the root. (2) In the case of roots of the third conjugation, final *% is generally changed in %. (3) In the case of some roots, the termination undergoes certain other changes. Thus—ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 49 (1) Root, %i60% — to leap... Bt to abuse... (2) Ssot% to weep...... Soe to see... @) Bye to write Dads to be tight. Noun, S308 a leap. os Bp abuse, .. St weeping. sight, SS writing. DxH tightness, 38 to trast trust. sows to burn... @ blaze. On the Declension of Nouns. 101. ‘Telugu nouns have three genders, namely— (1) ‘The mascatine, which is applied to such nouns as can be used in reference to a man (or a god) only, e.g., Truth Rama, Sse a younger brother, SY%es a merchant, $8, a husband. (2) The feminine, which is applied to such nouns as can be used in reference to a woman (or a goddess) only, ¢.g., of Lakshmi, SBeo @ younger sister, FOS a wife, @) ater, which is applied to all such nouns as are neither masculine nor feminine. Hence it is applied to all nouns which denote animals, male or female (except the human species), and all inanimate things; eg., SiS a male buffalo, KB a female buffalo, X.B,39 a horse, S838 a book, “WE a bor. Distinctions of gender are shown in three ways. (a) By the use of different words as “®®8ot3 a husband, “Wog*s% a wife. (®) By changes in the terminations of words as SOWess a wicked man, Soyer a wicked woman. 750 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. (By the use of prefixes as SD a male child, SDH a fem child. Some nouns such as Jeo milk (no sing.) and D8 water (sing. 26) are habitually used in the plural. Thus MODAL ND choo SH. ‘There is good water but there is no milk. 102, Telugu nouns have two wambers—the Singular, and the Plural; and in each number there are five cases, namely—(1) the nominative—(2) the genitive—(3) the dative—(4) the objective—(5) the vocative. On Number, 103, The names of grains are generally used in the plural number only, except when used as adjectives, or when spoken of as a crop. ‘Thus— BB 7S, Booth. ‘This is a cholam shoot. Sy Wr Sodsar? Has there been a good crop of cholam ? Dar Fy Oo Gy? Is there any cholam in the Bazaar? 104. When two nouns closely connected to each other come together, the two are joined together, and the latter takes the plural termination. Thus} 6D 0 mother and S08, a father become SOx ese parents, Oy SaHyoo brothers, S¥OSSyvo hunger and thirst, Sr SsHSoo east and west. 105. When the nominative and genitive singular and the nominative plural of any noun are known, it can invariably be declined by applying the following rules. Some nouns, however, have in addition irregularly formed cases. Genera! Rules for the Formation of Cases. (1) Rules for the Singular Number. 106. (1) The dative ease is formed by adding § to genitive ending in ©, 5, or 2.» and by adding & to a genitive ending in any other vowel; as—gen. 0, dat. HO8; gen. DY, dat. D4.ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. b1 107. (2) The objective case (except in the first declension, in which it is the same as the genitive) is formed by adding 9 to a genitive ending in 9,5, or 2, and by adding * to a genitive ending in any other vowel; as—gen. %D, obj. HOA; gen. DY, obj. DH. 108. (3) The voeative case is the same as the nominative with the final vowel lengthened, except in the case of nominatives ending in the vowel ‘> which form their vocative by changing \ into. Thus—nom. QD, v0c. DD; nom. DY, voc. DE; nom, S332, voc, SayTr. (2) Rules for the Plural Number. 109. The womiuative plural always ends in © —as—Dgjos, Bhp. The genitive changes 0 of the nom. into® .., Do, BR. +... Dow, Byw6. Dzom, Bex, ‘The dative adds to the gen... The objective adds to the gen. The vocative changes the © of the nom. intoer*O ... Dyerro™, Bro. The use of various Cases. 110.. ‘The dative case is sometimes used in Telugu, where in English we use some other case. Thus— BH G SoXB TH TOT, ‘They hid that matter from me. WH asaAVarev. He was afraid of me. SOBiso ASE SAA. I will come in a little time. DSH 64553 BPsiooae, At the end he went away in a passion, Aas SRI. He cut it in the middle. © GR GHA GRU SOB SYS. (mw GxyS.) It is rather less thun eight miles from here to that village.52 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 111. The Jocative case of an irreguler noun (pars. 141) is sometimes used as an instrumental case, Thus— AT SORT. He cut it with an axe, 112, When several nouns are joined together, it is usual to put all in the nominative ease, and add the demonstrative pronoun 37% or 8D, 0 or g® with the required casal termination. Thus— Ruareev, TOs, Boer, So¥eosw, Hsy YOR sxe Jase Bayo ? ‘Who can tell the damage that arises from thunderbolts, storms, pestilence, and disease ? 113. Telugu nouns are divided into two classes, namely—resular and irregular. The regular nouns are divided into three declensious. First Declension of Regular Nouns, 114. This declension includes all masculine nouns, of which the nominative singular ends in 2%. All these nouns are of more than two syllables. The genitive singular is formed by changing &% into 2. ‘The nominative plural is formed by changing & into ©. Exanpse. Singular. Plurat. N. S86y26 A younger brother, 3Syoo Younger brothers, G, 85:0. Of do, BHYO ..... OF — do. D. BSB rae TO do, BSLYORH...... To do. 0, 838030 or Ssoyry- do. SBYOR .. . do. 0 do. SssyorT? ... Odo. Vv. Sy wsON NOUNS, PUSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 53 115. ‘The form of the objective case in rly, ¢.g., Seyr4y, is common in the Northern Circars. Final 9 of the genitive case is sometimes changed into &, and retained throughout ; as, Sega Sayd8, ete. 116. The words S63Sr~t6es a son and 92% a son-in-law may take as their plurals either 8035-8 and went, or Loxrrow and Vow, Exerelse, Decline the following nouns—B¥js God, soAdsoges a wan, y2retou a inale friend, Trai Kame, SYte a merchant, Mortoges the sun, 10,2 the moon. Second Declension of Regular, Nouns. 117. This declension includes all nouns of more than two syllables ending in “0, —vio, or “as, All are neuter except RoHS» a wife. The genitive singular is the same as the nominative. ‘The nom. plural is formed by adding ©» to the nom. singular. Singular. Exar. Plural. N. MGR. MH Saws. G. So. KE S00. D. Ko ww¥G, or MT A08, KSSw0H. 0. Ko o0%, KS Swows, Ve Ros. ROS Swrwr, U8. The form %,8 308 is common in the Northern Circars. 119. ‘Nouns of this declension may use contracted forms in the dative and objective case singular, and throughout the plural. ‘These are formed by changing sv of the nominative singular into 28 (or 8), Qy» and ©, respectively, and lengthening the preceding vowel, if it be short. Thus—54 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. Singular, D. %T%A8 (or XT7,58). 0. KATA. Plural. N. MOOB/O% G. Mop. D. Moyes. oO. MOTO. 120. ‘The contracted form of the dative in 8 (ae %07,8%) is not often used, except by verbal nouns, which will be explained hereafter. 121. In this declension final a% is usually pronounced, and often written 0, a8 MBO. 122, —_Exerelie. Decline the following nouns—v-ags%» a kingdom, Bio acar, ¥so a country, B20» the trunk of the body. Third ‘Declension of Regular Nouns. 123. This declension includes all nouns (except those which belong to the second declension) which have the genitive singular the same as the nominative singular. 124. The nominative plural is generally formed by adding e to the nominative singular. BxampLes, Singular. Plural. Singular. 15. ON, OR. Ages. n. 3 G 28. axe, a D. Ag%. AZos. D. 0. ADxw, Dow. Oo. V. Oe. Dyoro. Vv, foro, 126. Nouns denoting inanimate things, especially those belonging to the third declension, sometimes use the objective case in the sense of a LOCATIVE OF ABLATIVE case ; a8 BHD in the ear. 127. Nouns borrowed from foreign languages, cg., 3°80, are usually declined like nouns of the third declension.ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 55 128. Many nouns of the THIRD DECLENSION, and also IRREGULAR nouns, use peculiar forms in the plural nominative (and consequently throughout the plural, para. 109), which will now be explained. Most of these forms are contractions of an original plural, formed by merely adding ©9 to the nominative singular, In the common dialect, however, the contracted forms only are ueed. PECULIAR FORMS OF THE PLURAL, USED BY NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION, AND BY IRREGULAR NOUNS. (a) Nouns ending in 8, &», 83, §», 8, or &, form the plural by changing these letters into é9 and % respectively. Thus—Sing. &*a%83, PL S39, Sing. Sen, Pl. -S*kyp, Sing. Dp, Pl. Bey, Sing. rox, Pl. Koto. (b) Nouns ending in &, %, &, or ©, and nouns of more than two syllables ending in © or 8, form the plural by changing these letters into %. Thus— Sing. 3°, Pl. THQ. Sing. Tw, Pl. BW. Sing, $8, Pl. SB. Sing, Tos, Pl. TW. Sing. TAO, Pl. TAB. Sing. SoBe, Pl. S088. (©) Nouns ending in & sometimes form the plural in %. Thus— Sing. S%, Pl. BB. (@) A few nounsending in &, 2, &, or é9, sometimes form the plural by changing these letters into ot, and of, respectively. Thus— Sing. 38, Pl. Bow or WP. Sing. Se, Pl. Sox or 5%. When © precedes final & or t% of the singular nominative, the two may be changed in the plural into 0% or %. Thus—Sing, sot, Pl, Xo or MOM. Bing. Sor, Pl. S2% or SH. (e) Nouns ending in g and % form the plural by changing the letters into o% or &%. Thus—Sing. Sogo. Pl. Sood or sof, Sing. 8%, Pl. Yow or 8B.56 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. ( Nouns ending in ox or omg (except Tro» which makes the plural 0>{$) form the plural by changing these letters into Soo». The vowel preceding S00» is always long. Thus—Sing. Sxvow or Mong, Pl. Sow. () The nouns W% a field, and S&S a louse, make their plorals Boo and Seo. (b) All nouns, which do not come under these rules, form the plural by adding ©9 to the singular nominative. (i) The vowel © in the jirst syllable of » word is never changed, but in the last, or Inst two syllables of a word, is changed into © in the plural. Thus—Sing. 8, Pl. Soo. Sing. HO, Pl. ov. Sing. 8°ODo, Pl. Sexo. (&) In words of more than two syllables ending in & ® or 8, the vowel © preceding these letters, remains unaltered in the plural. Thus— Sing. SRO, Pl. TAB. Sing. SoBe, Pl. SoBW. Sing. WDA, Pl. POH. On Irregular Nouns. 199, ‘There are a large class of Telugu nouns which are irregular in the Singular, i.e., they form their GENITIVE SINGULAR (and consequently all derived from it, paras. 106, 107) in a peculiar and irregular manner. ‘The following rules explain the formation of these irregular genitives. ‘When these are known, any irregular noun can be easily declined in the singular by applying the rules given in paras. 106, 108. The plural of any irregular noun can be easily ascertained by applying the rules given in para, 128, All irregalar nouns are pure Telugu words. The irregular genitive always ends in D. N.B.—It is specially important that the student should remember, that in the common dialect these nouns, instead of using the irregular genitive, constantly use the nominative for the genitive, and conse- quently are declined like nouns of the third declension. After learning the irregular genitives, the student can easily adapt his conversation to the peculiar usages of the locality in which he is placed.ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 81 130. Rule I. If a noun of more than two syllables, ending in 8, denotes something that has animal or vegetable life, the GENITIVE SINGULAR is the same as the nominative ; otherwise, it changes ® into &%. Thus— Sing. nom, Sing, gen. Pl, nom, BHD a peacock. BHD yao. Para. 128. b. ‘7AO an embrace. TAS WAG. Para, 128. k. 181, Rule 11. With few exceptions, all newter nouns ending in 2% are irregular, All these, and all irregular nouns ending in & (except $8, Ge, 68%,) form the GENITIVE SINGULAR by changing these letters into 8, Thus— Sing. nom. Sin, gen, Pl. nom. WBS a yard. es BSH. Para, 128. b. wes a day. wes we. svt a nest. Xow 4. 8% a river. $8 SB, S29. Para. 128. b. ce. Se water. D8 Re, SUG the forehead. SB HHH. 132, Some irregular nouns ending in &, also form the genitive singular in 8; as Nom. 3°. Gen, S*8 or S*A, Nom. A*S. Gen, A*S or AB, 13, ‘The singular genitives of St, Se and 6 are S883 or $8, Bo, and 68, 134, Rule IT. Some irregular nouns ending in © form the GENITIVE SIN- GuLAR by changing this letter into , others change it into ¢, Thus— 858 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. Sing. nom. Sing. gen, Pl. nom, Feo a leg. we) wef. Para, 128. b. Xe daylight. SKB KH. BBeo a younger sister. BBO BSW. Szge0 adaughter-inlaw. sO S25, The two last nouns also form their plurals in 0% and o2%, eg., BHow, BHoes,, Sx0%, Seo. The form in og, is the more grammatical. The noun seo a share makes the genitive singular +O or FO. 185. Rule 1Y. Irregular nouns ending in ©9 and *% form the GRNITIVE SINGULAR by changing these letters into 088, Thus— Sing. nom, Sing. gen. Pl. nom. gy a house. 3088 goes. Para. 128. e. Soop a thorn. 0083 00K or Suh, Bay an eye. S088 Sows or BE. 186. Role ¥. Irregular nouns ending in om or om, change this termina- tion into 8 to form the GENITIVE SINGULAR. The vowel preceding 8 is always long. ‘Thus— Sing. nom, Sing. gen. Pl. nom. Heron or Mog awell, SB —Ar#foew, Para, 128. f. doo a hand de Béfoen, Bow ghee. rs)‘ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 59 137. The following nouns are irregular :— ‘Sing. nom. DS a yoke. 53°DS a porch. “Sen 0 place. 280. the body. GP morning. So~H evening. Hw a field. Sing. gen. OS was 3s 2088 Ces Sree Ho Pl. nom, wow. Para. 128. b. weny, Do. “Sti, Para. 198. a. - 2fGeo, Para. 198. h. seen. Do. SrrHeo, Do. Heo Para. 128. g. 188. The following nouns ending in ®% are declined as follows— Sing, nom. Sing. gen. Soa a tank. sod Xs-% a humped back. XD Sx°m wood. ca) Soi the body. So Hi a field. to Bs a louse. BaD Dera a fish, Dra Pl. nom. Some, Kron, Semen. Abasen, Ben. Boo. aren, 189. ‘The following nouns ending in &, (gram. ¢39) form the genitive Y~ ° ge by changing &, into § and the plural nominative by changing 6 into 3 orby adding ©, namely—8, the neck, 88) « ploughshare, 87 Sy a spike, RS, a sowing implement, 99%, elevated ground, Thus— Sin. N. OG Ge OE. Pl. N. OB or OB. ‘The terminations 3%, and 3%, which often occur in the names of places, follow the above rule, e.g., “os, Pulaparru (a certain village), Sroxs§, and shai, Pamarru, TaHG.60 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 140. Ina few instances different nouns have the same form in the plural. Thus—S® is the plural of both 8% @ root, and Seo a finger, Sos or S— is the plural of both Sot fruit, and Seo a tooth, etc. As an example of the declension of an irregular noun, S% a river is thus declined :— Sing. N. S&. . G. S83. Dz $838. 0. S889. PLN, Sf. G. 58, D. SBS. 0, Sa. 141. Most of the irregular nouns, denoting inanimate things, form a locative case by changing D of their irregular genitive into ~; and adding % at pleasure. Thus—go’ (genitive of 929 a house), locative case goes or GodsA in the house. 142. Nouns using the objective case as a locative or ablative case (Para. 126) occasionally drop final & or 2. Nouns of the second declen- sion use the plural objective case in this manner, and drop the final *%. ‘Thus— Fo sarw, He fell on the ground. as, Some, He arose from sleep. Sa, Se. In some places. RDF or Drv. In alll ways, IL. POSTPOSITIONS. 143. In Telugu there are certain words, called postpositions, which are affixed to nouns and pronouns, just as in English prepositions are pre- fixed to nouns and pronouns, Postpositions are usually affixed to the genitive case; as—w°Ss by me, but the postposition %802 or As~8y about or concerning is always affixed to the objective case; as—e SoX®O XBox) concerning that matter. A few postpositions such as Be, Bx, ov, SAV, BOT are sometimes affixed to a dative case.ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 61 A few of the principal postpositions are as follows :— Boh, of. 6 in, on, with. 8 or BS dy. od from. 5 or 6% in, on, among. Se, or SBS by. PS or BFS upon. God in, on, among. S* or 8% with. Bots under. 8788 or 3_ for. SAS or SRE- near. sB like. RBs for. 3% (gram.@o% near. 144. The postposition Gn, is often added to the genitive without altering its meaning ; as—8D, 3 or SOBnwy_ po a mother's love; but whenever a word intervenes between the genitive and the word which governs the genitive, then Gin. is generally affixed: as—OQ Gin¥,_ SENT PS (Sah the boundless love of a mother. 145. ‘The postposition 5 is only affixed to genitives endirig in © of nouns denoting inanimate things (compare para. 126) ; as—2f> a bank, 2.265 on the bank. When ® is‘sftixed to a noun of the second declension, the final letter 9 is often dropped, and the preceding vowel, if short, is lengthened ; as—S°ASi5 or TRB on paper, MIrYs98 or Sor, ete 146. When the postposition 02% is affixed to a genitive, it is commonly’ changed into di%ot% ; but when affixed to a singular noun of the second declension, final *%> and Wot% are contracted into s0%; as—Sid chow, DQKTawoaroos, HAVawod. According to grammar when- ever So% is affixed to a genitive ending in 9, it may be changed into S02 ; as—Bipwow, DAY Awwows, 147. The irregular nouns instead of using the locative case mentioned above (para. 141) may also use the ordinary form made by adding the postposition &* to the genitive; as—goe or Goe3 in the house ; butwhen 6 is used, contraction often takes place; as—goé3e* contracted gots; 5635 contracted S*5*,62 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 148. Subjoined is a list of the principal Telugu postpositions, as used in common conversation. ‘They are derived from various sources ; many of them (¢g., BOS, Mois) are merely cases of nouns. In the following list the most common meanings only are given; other idiomatic meanings can be easily learnt from observation. ‘The post- positions already given are not here repeated. 83 on account of, because of—YoW than—8*Sa% (gram. 8S, Bio) for OZ for—serosio through—Mom, Te through— Dah about—Sk about—S,Tvs according to—S*SpS at the rate of, according to—é&e in reference to—8"8 (or 8"w8) in propor- tion to—SarS after—SH¥ (or BSE) behind—w-s~, spy (gram, 3438550) until, as long a6, as far as—So¥ towatde—soorsstews, Be (oulg. T°) TOS, SOS (or SISH,) Wess (Bos) near—Skws at, close to—s00%S8, 242 in front of, before—SHw, S¥,.%, on the side—gsSo (or 30) on this side—CSSe (or wae) on the other side—S*S0 inside—Bb, Bose outside—sox, HF (gram. Hes, So) So’ between—BowS, Bots with. 149. ‘The genitive case of a postposition is often used as an adjective. (Compare pares. 210 and 153.) Thus—s 808 v-ow. That under stone—or—The stone which is underneath. 870% 808 Be. The land below the hill. 8 Xo%K5*D Veo. The stories in that book. Tso 2D WX srs600, Their favour towards me. Compare the English expressions—Ihe above passage—An after thought— The under cut, ete. il, ADJECTIVES. 150. Telugu adjectives are indeclinudle, i.e., they do not vary in gender, number, or case; as—OE |g a great house, WS GoSs* in great houses. 151, ‘Telugu adjectives have no comparative and superlative forms. The force of them is either expressed by such adverbs as 25 very, NoGON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 63 much, etc., or by the use of the ordinary forms preceded by certain post- positions. Thus the comparative is expressed by using the affix ¥0% ; WOW we Bare he is older than Iam, 6 QWwwow & HS ¥s&:9 S008 this book is better than that one. The superlative may be expressed by using the affix &* with a word signifying all; T*BosbS* saws SoNares he is the best of them all. 152, ‘The force of the suPERLATIVE degree is sometimes expressed by repeating the adjective. A distributive meaning is also implied. Thus Bi ASsao OND KrGeo SBA. To-day they cooked several very excellent curries. 153. In Telugu, as in English, a noun is often used as an adjective. But when a noun is thus used in Telugu, it is always, except it be a noun of the second declension, put in the genitive case. Thus— BOF) a tank. . BH | tank water. 588 gio river sand. .g%8 Bo sandy soil. Soo ariver... gxo¥ sand... 154. Nouns of the second declension, when used as adjectives, affix wou or change %» into %. The form with Bows is always used in common conversation, except in the case of such words as denote something material (e.g., Ss lead), which always change %» into %. Thus— 5X ro 8 horse-stable. BSH Mos leaden bullets. .DeHowS srr a true word. Bs a horse... Sai lead. Dessoo truth... wows beauty. WowssHonws ge beautiful women. Such an expression as & X8,800 S*Y might occur; bat Xo would then be used, not as an adjective, but as a genitive case; hence the64 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. expression would not mean that horsetail (which would in Telagu be ©& 5% SE), but that horse's tail. Bo in the plural 6 %B,So.e S* ye those horses’ tails, 8 X55; S*¥es those horsetails. Many adjectives not ending in sw affix Wows at pleasure without altering the meaning; as—a°X% or XPS 843 a pretty bird. The word Soww is the past relative participle of @¥) to become; when used as an affix, it means who (or which) is, was, are, or were. Depo sxe a true word is literally a word which is true. On ApsEcTIVEs. 155. Some Telugu adjectives may at pleasure add 6é3 or 2-3; as reson or STreserve3, Sdy or Stars, Some adjectives ending in ~, and denoting qualities in reference to sight, taste, and smell, when prefixed to a noun or pronoun, sometimes insert 9; as Bg wp or BY wg white cloth. Instead of O, the letter 23 is sometimes inserted; as See8 23 a man of dark complerion, SAS HOR a man of fair complexion. 157. | When an adjective (or a noun used as an adjective) ending in ‘© is prefixed to a noun commencing with a vowel, the consonant in inserted; as Dev; standing, OHx9 a mirror, NesseXso a pier glass. “Bo a tile, 9 a house, WOK a tiled house. 158. Sanscrit adjectives are used as adjectives in Telugu, after being "first transformed into Nouns, by taking the Telugu noun terminations, and then having @o2% affixed to them. ‘Thus from the crude Sanscrit adjective B excellent is formed the Telugu noun Bee an excellent man, the feminine noun (¥,Se0~e» an excellent woman, and the neuter noun 3,09 an excellent thing. To these words the affix @os is added, and they are then used as apszctives. Thus—ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 65 CE So%ons amd. An excellent Rishi, Lit. A Rishi, who is an excellent man. GPrroows SKB. The excellent Sarasvati. Lit. Sarasvati, who is an excellent woman, GSmons wy. An excellent cow. Lit. A cow, which is an excellent thing. GB Sovonis Ay Srouws, To excellent friends. Lit, To friends, who are excellent persons, Ger gows 3 ©. (Gr, Boro, ows,) Excellent women. Lit. Women, who aré excellent women. 159. When these adjectives qualify feminine noun in the plural, they often take the masculine form; as (B,Sovonis _§ oo. So 160. When these adjectives qualify a neuter noun in the plural, they may take either the singular or the plural form. The singular form is most common. ‘Thus— Gswvons Gyo or TSmoms sHoo. Excellent cows. 161, In common talking, the singular neuter form in s%» is oftet used to qualify masculine and feminine nouns of either number. Thus— Acombows By Srsfoas, (For &,csrdiow’s By SrBors.) A dear friend. Ecomhons By trBook, (For Scimvows Fy Srfovws.) To dear friends, 162. _ Instead of adding #00 to the singular neuter of these words, final sso may be changed into ~ (para. 154.) Thus DOSAoows KF or OD OETA 9mt OO KOON, PONTPONTIONS, vepoeanten wed ot mean fhat horsctait (ace. 6) 8 hut that hore: ai, LTT ferme alae th % SK oT ! a raeH' fail, 8 Ko Many adjectiven nat ending in 0 affix altering the meaning: ax aX or Bx Want east ie the [wat velative partici —————" mad ae at ality, if meane whe (or whic Soe FANS ANNES a foe toon iA Literally @ wor — ON Apsectry TN Kame Tohym adjectives may at plensin aN ar SAVE, SQ or BRI, Tie Same adgeotives ending in, and dee xyht. tavte, and xmell, when prefixed to = invert Scns Re aay or BD 28 whitewwe 28 ie sometimes inserted: ne Bye SO! NA ANAS 6 maw of fair complexion. ia is Whon an adjective (Or & NOUN Digi fixed to ® nonn commencing wi dS ineostag a Dew etending, ————— SRR Fi SRN hone. ~ Saneorit adieotives are need as dt —_ Bx: tametvemed inte Sars, by takin? affixed to then. a avpasters BAL eveedion: is formed the T A bs Simm, naa Baers a ame thar having sve ey eraeiten: thing. 7 _ -_—_ thos an tner need as A ———NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 67 = vint possessed of the thing signified by the noun. Thus— = +: BSN MOK a rich man; SHED %y BrBors iend. inserit Adjectives preceding Sansorit Nouns. crit adjective preceding Sanscrit noun may drop its Telugu +, and be compounded with the noun according to the rules Grammar. This, however, is not very common in con- wen, ‘Thus from the Sanscrit 6% wicked is formed expe nat —But instead of saying 2Xpesows weit, we may ‘rset. In like manner, instead of (3S Bos wigs, ay Barigies.66 ON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 163. When one of the abovementioned words is used in the predicate, it may remain unaltered, or may take the affix 00% with the pronomi- nal affixes attached to it. In the masculine and feminine the former is most common, and in the neuter the latter is most common. Thus— Bd Foes, (GB oerionwaree not common.) He is an excellent man. oh Fivore. She is an excellent woman. wits Bape, ‘They are excellent persons. eB Tgaromsa, (Or Bao.) , That is an excellent thing. Lit, That is athing which isan excelient thing. . SB OPFsww FT Ssows0. These books are excellent. 164. ‘The word ous. is used in Telugu, where in English one noun is put in arposrTioy to another. Thus— Br WS worws Wessareg, . Your grandfather Ramayya. Lit. Ramayya, who is your grandfather. BHP Tog Vos oKs. Parvati, the wife of Siva. Lit. Parvati, who is the wife of Siva. 165, In common talking, however, 00% is sometimes omitted; as 5 Soyo Tes GDo instead of 3” Sogou TPS LD, My brother Ramasvami. 166. It may be here mentioned that the words Xo and G2 are often placed after a noun, and give it the force of an adjective signifyingON NOUNS, POSTPOSITIONS, AND ADJECTIVES. 7 possessed or not possessed of the thing signified by the noun. ‘Thus— ism riches; FSikwXo MOR a rick man; SEBO Fy Irvbors an unkind friend. On Sanscrit Adjectives preceding Sanscrit Nouns. 167. A Sanserit adjective preceding a Sanscrit noun may drop its Telugu terminations, and be compounded with the noun according to the rules of Sanscrit Grammar. This, however, is not very common in con- versation, Thus from the Sanscrit Si, wicked is formed &ox§ous @ wicked man.—But instead of saying Sifpzsons o~Sites, we may also say Ag T~UGxoes. In like manner, instead of (EMA Bos V¥Cs%», we may say Sarvewoo.68 ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. CHAPTER VI. ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ADVERBS, CONJUNCTIONS, INTERJECTIONS, AND NUMERALS. I. PRONOUNS, 168. Telugu pronouns are subdivided as follows:—(1) personal and demonstrative pronouns—(2) the reflexive pronoun—(3) interrogative pronouns—(4) indefinite pronouns—(5) demonstrative adjective and interrogative adjective pronouns—(6) possessive adjective pronouns— (1) pronouns referring to number—(8) distributive pronouns. ‘The manner in which relative pronouns are expressed in Telugu will be explained in a future chapter. ‘The Telugu pronouns are declined upori the same general principles as the nouns, and may like them affix postpositions. (1) Personal and Demonstrative Pronouns. 169, $85 I, the pronoun of the first person, has two forms in the plural, namely—ss%2, which excludes, and Ws, which includes the persons addressed. Thus—some Europeans speaking to some Hindoos would say—We (Asis) are Kuropeans ; but—We (six) are men. Hence in prayer Ss%s9 only can be used. Bx is declined as follows :— Singular. Ist Plural. 2nd Plural, N. 3% OL Asso SOTO We. Gm ofme, Se a5 of us. D. 7% tome, srk SOx, to us. 0. iy me. SOSy oF SONIA SONIA oF SSOAH us, 170, Instead of 855) and the forms sa%yus and Aossyoss are sometimes used. (Paras. 169, 171.)ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUXS, BTO. 69 171. S% Thou, the pronoun of the second person, is declined as follows:— Singular. Plural. N. AY — Thou. art Ye, or you, Gd of thee. ore of ye, or you. D. d% to thee. ar to ye, or you. O, Ax thee. Doihy, or Doiheya ye, or you. It must be observed that Sx) and Ort take 8 and *% in the dative and the objective case, which is contrary to the general rule. (Paras, 106, 107). 172. When addressing a person of low rank, or a child, the singular Sx, is used. When addressing » person of some respectability (¢., a Munshi) the plaral 27% (like you in English) is always used, followed by @ verb in the plural. When addressing God in prayer, D% is always used. 173, The pronouns of the third person are the demonstrative pronouns "wrth that man, he; @B that woman, she, it, and Des this nian, he; GB this woman, she, it. 174. ‘These pronouns have the following peculiarity :—In the singular the word used in the masculine (namely 7%, or D2) is distinct from the word used in the feminine and neuter, which are both represented by the same word (namely ©8, or §8). In the plural the masculine and feminine are both represented by the same word (namely 3%, or 5%), and the nenter uses a distinct word (namely ©, or @®). ‘This peculi- arity must be specially noticed, as it also pervades the verbs. wre and D2 are declined as follows:— Siveunan. Masculine. Feminine and Neuter. N, sve That man,orhe. ©&8 That woman, she; or that thing, it. a) of him, oA of her, or it, D, was to him, wns to her, or it, 0. SO, or Shim. | GA, or BD her, or it.70 ON. PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. Porat. Masculine and Feminine. ” Neuter. N. ws, or 0% Those men, or women, they. ©&® Those things, they. G. a8, — wrod of them, a of them, D, wO8 — sos tothem. a¥38 to them. 0, 3782, — wrosa them. =D them. SiNcuraR. Masculine. Feminine and Neuter. N, 2% This man, or he, g8 This woman, she; or this thing, it. @. &9 of him. &9 of her, or it. D, 598 to him. 828 to her, or it. 0. 59, or Bey him. 9, or AQ, her, or it, PLURAL. Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. N, 0, or Sox These men or women, they. g® These things, they. G. 58, — Sox of them, = 8 of them. D. 988, — Dogs to them. 5e38 to them, 0. 589,— dogs them, dao them. ‘When the postposition 5 is affixed to G*P and 89, the words aN and 405 are sometimes in the colloquial pronounced to8S* and Aoés*, In the plural so% and Doz are often pronounced a> and 536, 175. In addition to we and Das the following masculine pronouns of the third person are also used, @8Széo (ur SA), GAS that man, he,ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. we g&es (or GUS), Baa this man, he. These words which have no plural, are declined as follows :-— N. 8% (or WSS.) eos He. G, vdp eos of him. D. edD8 east to him. 0. BBD, or Cty Cron him. 176, In addition to 8 and g& (in their feminine signification) the words GD%, GBs, that woman, she, and 2%, Bo, this woman, she, are frequently used, SO and OE are commonly pronounced @D% and 02%. These words have no plural, and are declined as follows :— N. GOB (or 6D.) eB She. G. sda ir) of her. D, sda Bot to her. 0, sdaxs OB her, 177, The words =, Dz, 88, GB are used of a person of very low rank; OS, GS, GHZ, WG are used of persons of respectability; and SASS, Yacdois, Bo, BiSo are used to mark respect, sasw is sometimes followed by a verb in the plural. ‘When speaking of a respectable child, 82 is used in the masculine, and & &9, (that child) in the feminine. 178. In the plural arog and Dox are used in reference to persons of low rank only, and #7% and 528 in reference to respectable persons. As a mark of great respect 37% and £8, followed by a verb in the plural, are sometimes used in reference to a single individual.12 ‘ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. 179, When speaking of an English gentleman and lady, the words SPO and SAN are affixed to their respective names, ¢.g., QS SO Mr. Martin, SBS SPD Mrs, Martin. When speaking of a respectable native, the word 77% is added to the name; as—T*Sasg7TYS Mr. Ramayya. The word 7% is also attached as a mark of respect to such words as 5D, Sod, ssOK, ote. The affixes S*87rt, S7SI-O and 77% are always followed by a verb in the plural. (2) The Reflexive Pronoun. 180, The reflexive pronoun @**% self is thus declined:— Singular. Plural. N. Br S36, or Wate, G. 5s 5H, or SwHv, D, 38% SHH, or Saoos, 0, S52, oF Si Sey, TwYWG, or SHED, 181. The plural 8% is often used instead of st as a term of great respect. Thus—8a% Woy,S/wrOsoo in accordance with your honor’s permission. When thus used the forms 8368, 5:08 and 83600" are generally employed instead of 83%, #408 and Sp, 182. The reflexive pronoun “87 (except when used in the plural num- ber instead of Ss+8) can only be used in reference to the subject of a principal verb in the third person; and whenever such a reference is required to be made, 8° should always be used. On Emphatic Pronouns. 188. The force of the emphatic expressions—I myself, you yourself, ete., may be expressed in Telugu by emphatic “; as 88, I myself. SuchON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. B English éxpressions as—Of myself, etc., implying spontaneous action, are expressed in Telugu by prefixing the dative case, or the genitive with oie, to the emphatic form of the pronoun; as Sx% BS SO) Weh—or—GSoSto BS SHywes He came of himself. © wy TAS OB SHA or TRH WS SQA or roi VF SO) 8. That cow came of itself. The same meaning is also sometimes expressed by the use of Wow, as BS Wo SQyorw He camie of himself. Such an expression as—As for myself-—is expressed in Telugu by adding Yond; as BNowS As for myself. (3) Interrogative Pronouns. 184. The Interrogative pronoun 2) who? which man? and S8 which woman? or which thing? is thus declined :— SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine and Neuter, N. se Which man? or who? 58 Which woman? or which thing? G. dS of whom? =O of which? D. dSO8 towhom? Bas to which? 0. 389 or DSc whom? BO or Bd which? PLURAL. Masculine and Feminine. Neuter. N. 88 Which men? or women? who? | 49 Which things? G. ds of whom? = 83 of which? D. S88 towhom? a8 to which? | 0, 2389 whom? = “88D which?. » 104 ON’ PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. 185. In the singular the forms J (or ISB), dat. ISBS, obj. SBA are sometimes used in reference to a female ot low rank; and the plural 2st, followed by a verb in the plural, is often ‘used in reference to single individual, male or female. Instead of S& the form 8 is sometimes used in the Cuddapah District. 186. All pronouns ending in 2% sometimes take & in the genitive instead of 2; as— wah, TAB, IAL, ete. The form of the objective in +3, (¢.g., 374) is most common in the Northern Cirears. 187. The pronoun Si» that? uses a genitive Smoe3, and a dative ‘Sn0t38. This word (like what in English) may stand in the place of @NOUN ; as—What (Sa) do you want? Or in the place of an ADJECTIVE; aa—What books (S89 58°) do you want? (4) Indefinite Pronouns. 188, Indefinite pronouns are formed by adding Won to the various interrogative pronouns, The addition of the conjunction aS» or &% gives the same force when the verb is in the negative. Ge SoHS* SBarbwost ‘Take any of these fruits. CHS ISBT GAT Is there any one there? ASH Be There is no one. The forms in @ox% may also be used as adjectives as— SBS a QSVioo BHSo> Bring any book. ~ (6) Demonstrative Adjective and interrogative Adjective Pronouns. 189, There are two demonstrative adjective pronouns, namely— that, or those, and 8 this, or these. There is one interrogative adjectiveON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE.NOUNS, ETC. 15 pronoun, namely—S which? All these adjective pronouns are inde- clinable. Thus—S a3. which man? S goss in which house? & GoHS™ in those houses. F wYN2rB upon this table. (6) Possessive Adjective Pronouns. 190. There are no distinct possessive adjective pronouns in Telugu, but their place is supplied by the genitive cases of the preceding pronouns, e.g, TF of me, ie., my; © thy; Sr our; Qe» your; TD, or OSD; or Ba his; TD, or Go her; etc. Thus—v* Sxye my brother; Ose Sox your pen; SdLS DSF his books. (7) Pronouns referring to Number. 191. ‘The following pronouns, which refer to number, have no singular: + Masculine and Feminine. Neuter, doze How many (persona)? JQ) How many (things) ? Jo’ How much. goxst> So many (persons). Gy So many (things). go’ So much. 0% All (persons). Ry All (things). 08 Somuch, all. S70sst Few (persona). SD Few (things). So Allittle. All these pronouns are declined alike. ©0006 is declined as an example— . Masoulino and Feminine, Neuter, N. G0s% Ory G. worse ORS D. woxes Od 888 0. worsen © 89 192. Instead of the above masculine and feminine forms the words dod SOB, Gos S08, Wods S08, Sos S08 may be used. The word 308 means persons.16 ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. (8) Distributive Pronouns. ON THE TRANSLATION OF each, every. 193. . The word 26°|8,., the reduplication of 28 one, is equivalent to the word each, when used as an adjective; and the words 287)¥,t, 287, 5,-B, 28,8123 (pura. 231) are equivalent to each man, each woman, each thing. The Sanskrit word %,2 is also used in the sense of cach. The meaning of each or every is algo often expressed by the reduplicstion of the noun. ‘Thus— 20S BooXard8 (or 287,898 or SParO08 or BoXare 2880838) (para, 238) BS SS ps GEE Sty, Or—Be Bes. ‘You may give to each man at the rate of two annas. Or—per man. 2878, SSMORE (or 2878S or SBarDl or sswHod 2B EOl38) Tesferr SSyS GT. Or—shsere Teaser. I gave at the xate of four annas to each woman. Or—per woman. _ BAS SoS SK HO TMT. Or aS Ps, ‘He drinks water at every mouthful. GSM BAT. Or SAE. ‘He wandered over every village. Or—village after village. den Borda. Or— SB Gy». I saw every house. © Dear golloir BWI, Or—S,8 goss* (para. 141), They sought for the boy in every house. TOTBE Bw HT. Or—H BoB. ‘He worshipped every stone. Or—stone after stone. 194. | Norg.—When reduplication is used, and the first noun is put in the nominative with 8 or 8 attached to it, it denotes exchange. Thus— Tronk Tra» Gays. I will give stone for stone. ggyt gp Gay. ‘He gave house for house.ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. 7 195. | Norge.—When reduplication takes place, and the last noun takes adverbial 7, it denotes continuity of action ; a8 SS Abisosr by degrees; why wz drop by drop. 196. Each followed by his own, her own, its own, or their own, is expressed by 28% or 5, followed by ses or @, Thus— ASE SO wr sSrosoPtsoRa. Each must attend to his own work. 5 Be dix © Be GQyTs, I paid each month’s wages in its own month. 197. Such sentences as—Each of the two has a different colour—Each of the four must do different work—axe expressed by the reduplication of the numeral. ‘Thos— Bot8E Tord Tore yD, Sore Treor Aven Wo Sowa, ON THE TRANSLATION OF apiece. 198. The word apiece, which refers to two people only, is expressed in Telugu by 0. ‘Thus— THOK BAPE Usrsrowos gong. Give them four rupees apiece. ON THE TRANSLATION OF several, respective, various, etc. 199. The words several, reapective, various, etc., are rendered in Telugu by the reduplication of pronouns. Thus— S Go GiFor* BATH? In what various villages did he wander? dire GIF St BEART. He wandered about in various villages. (Or—sundry). THO TO God VAYEMIT yw. ‘They sold their respective houses, (Or—several).8 ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. ON. THE TRANSLATION OF another. 200. "*- 'Phe word one, followed by another, is expressed im Telugu by using a8, 28th, 28, or 288 in each member of the sentence. This form is often used in Telugu where in English the word different or distinct is used. Thue— BB 2s 3S, O8 ay FF, ‘This is one story, and that is another, i.c., this is quite a different story from that. BN BN, Ariss Labo, . They are one, and we are another, i,c., they are quite distinct from us. 2Sehy 208, aes Saye. ILI call one man, another comes. 28 WSR Gob, a8 Sazy. If I want one thing, you bring another. BBD Basso MSpeherdy sored, ‘We have never seen one another. BE eipth Dotrrth, BYSpiho Dweh, One time he listens, and another time he does not. 201. The word another, in the sense of an additional one, is expressed in Telugu by the words go8"S, goS"Seh, goOES, goS"¥3, Thus— Morreh Urerones Woy. gos¥S Sastiasod, ‘Three rupees are not enough. Please give another one. IL COMPOSITE NOUNS. 202. By afixing Se, wt, wos, A (or WA), and D (for #D) to adjectives, and the genitive cases of nouns (and—as will be hereafter shown—to some other parts of speech) a class of words are formed, to which we shall give the distinctive name composite nouns. ‘Thus for instance, when «a is attached as an affix to the adjective OS little, the composite noun OX) ava is formed, which is masculine,ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. 79 and means a boy. When soz or 370 is affixed to'Diy, the compo- site noun Diy wows (or Dafy wt) is formed, which is masculine and feminine, and means children. When & (for @8) is affixed to the adjective Oy, the composite noun 538 is formed, which, if feminine, means « girl, and, if neuter, a little one (eg., a little bor). When 9 (for ©) is affixed'to the adjective Oy, the composite noun Ox) 9 is formed, which is neuter, and means Little ones (e.g., little boxes). In the same manner from the word Soé> (the genitive singular of ‘Sots cooking) is formed the composite noun Sods a cook; fro1 S87 Yo (the genitive plural of 87% bread) is formed 8” Roars a baker ; from 59 work is formed SPa~ox work-people. ‘When the words th, Sow, a8, 8 (for 28) and 9 (for ©D) are thus used, they are called pronominal affixes. 203, Nouns ofthe 2nd declension, all of which end in *», change a0 into % or add e00%, before taking the pronominal afizes. The latter is the more common form, except in the case of such words as express something material (e.g., Swxc lead) which always change so into Thas—%O8srow grooms, ASB a leaden one, od Showisar beautiful people, DeHowSB a true one. (See para, 154.) 204, Tthas already been stated (see para. 166) that the words Xe and 89 are often plaped after a noun, and give it the force of.an adjective ; as— BNO By SrBorw « loving friend, After Xe or “dD we may add the Pronominal affixes; as—wAXears a wise man, mgsous @ fool, FUsNOD things hot to the taste. 205. Composite nouns ending in & form the vocatine by changing & into TrT; as—ATOA. voe. ATyera, In the plural wt is changed into ‘SET? to form the vocative ; xe—A7 OI, vos. AT UST VOTO.80 ON PRONOUKS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. ‘The subjoined noun is declined as an example— Stnovzan. Masculine. ‘eminine. N. Reg ares A man of the Rve8 A woman of the {herdsman's caste. (herdsman’s caste. G. A gard Romp D, Ary aras Rrgmns 0. Rgarh, or Kp arr8y Regard, or TOTP, V. Myo oma Prorat. Masculine and Feminine. N. ty art or R7 grog People of the [herdeman’s enste. G, A"yar8 — Keak D. owes — yas 0, Rtg ar8d — Rysroi V. Rysrtero> — Memo In the singular masculine 9 is sometimes changed into &; ns— Regard, R°yardb, ete. 206. Instead of a7 and ©A (fem.) the words Gd%% and UB are sometimes affixed to show more respect. ‘Thus Pariahs constantly say— AT gras (contracted from AY GOSS) instead of AT WAT. 207. Instead of the pronominal affixes the word 38. is also sometimes used ; but this is most commonly used in reference to females, Thus instead of ATO the form A7esD4% is often used. Constant reference will be made throughout the remainder of this ‘book to composite nonus and pronominal affixes, It is therefore necessary that the student should carefully temember the exact meaning of these particular terms, as here explained.a ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE XOUNS, BIC. 222. The word 3-8 sometimes also signifies except, where Sy is more commonly used. Thue— WH Boor WV, (Gs) MOG Ws Baws. I do not know any other language, except Telugu. On the word TD. 223. The word B79 (or 7*9) is the negative relative participle of UB, and hence in its primary signification it means—uwho (or which) is not or was not. Thus— Bikgeo TP MOLL wi SAXx BOGUS. ‘This disease cannot be understood by any man who is not a physician. 224, In many instances; however, the word S*9 (or 7) “nay be trans- lated into English by the word but. Thue— WOH OW GAH WO VINE Quoms. I will give leave to you, but I will not give it to him. 295. In Telugu the first verb in the affirmative is generally omitted. It is understood, but not expressed. In English the second verbin the negative is generally omitted. Thus— dr E TO CID! DOF GACe. I will give leave to you, but not to him. Lit. To you, but to him leave I will not give. GELS SANSA Book TO Class. Tre. What he studied was Telugu, but not Tamil. GO SILSSOS TD MHOAVVOSy Tes. This can be done by him, but by no one elee.ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC CaRvinats. 281. ‘The Telugu figure for Lis 0. One man, one woman, one thing are expressed respectively by the words 286, 2G, 2883. When the word one is used as an ApsEcTIvE, it is expressed in all genders by the word &¥ (commonly written S¥); as 28 Ue one king, 28 Sve one book. The word &¥ is also often used, where in English we use the indefinite article; as 2¥O* a king. (See para. 95). The words 2, 25, and 28¢3 are declined as follows :— N. G. D. 0. Beh, . BSD. QB. . BED, or BE. awe. awe. BBs. Bt Bm. 2888, 2888, 28038, 288, 232, The following table shows some of the neater cardinal numbers with their corresyonding figures in Telugu and in English— FIGURES. 2 bd » NAMES, Bots. 3. Sores, wrenr,- Post, 3. Se. ANDA. . SB. SAT 02k. . STB 0c8. = Se sSoorwes. Seo. FIGURES. 16. 11. 18. 19. 20. 21. 30. 40. 50. 60. 10. 80. 90. on oz. or. oF. 20. 20. 30. vo. 29. e0. 20. To. Fo. 100. a00. NAMES. SSSH, SBS, SBonB. = Sod™ OB. GOB, or GUE. BOR ews. 0D 5 BOB, or SoZ. SirB . GB, or OB. BB y or BB y By. S70B . ort, Sods.ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETO. 236. Masculineand feminine cardinals take a different form from the neuter cardinals; but in common conversation these forms are only used as far as the number nine. After the number mine the masculine and feminine cardinals are expressed by the neuter cardinal forms with the word 208 persons added to them. Thus— ~ Two (persons), G20. Seven (persons). Sts’. ‘Three (persons). S»7ovs. Eight (persons). JSaSo% Mx. Four (persons). Seo%oto. Nine (persons). 8: Five (persons). SomtoXowo. Ten (persons). SAs0B. (persons), SBA. Eleven (persons). S&S o%s08, eto. All the cardinals of whatever gender (with tne exception of 2, which is always an adjective) may be used as ADJECTIVES or as NOUNS. 287. The words 9% and So, when written after a noun, have the meaning of both. In this case they are generally strengthened by the addition of Sj; as—S AAG GA both those mien, G seo Bors both those cows. 238. All the neuter cardinals except 283, form the genitive by adding 4. Before @ the letter © may be inserted at pleasure, and this is the form commonly used in conversation. If the preceding vowel be © it is changed into 0. Thus—Nom. Son. Gen. Sow? or Bowoss, Dat, Soovt38 or Ba20438. Nom. Teor. Gen. TAB or TeoAcd3. Dat. T*OsAe38 or TOA. The words Tow, Sr~e, 58, may also form the genitive by changing the last letter into &8. ‘Thus—Nom. Bots. Gen. Bo! or Bod! or Bodo!¥. Dat. ol or BoRl8 or Bodot38. The forms 9%Sow0t38, SoiSyomvoeds, ete., are commonly written and pronounced 9% Bowl, Sao Ryono!88, etc. ‘The irregular form 2¥0#38 and 2¥ 480438 are often used for 2.8438. (Para, 231). 239. When several numbers stand together, all except the last are put inthe Genitive case, except the word 89%, which is put in the locative case, namely, 87%. The word Sows takes the affix Ry. Thus—Bomgo, Beeb GBT one thousand one hundred and twenty-four.ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. 89 240, ‘The numbers Took, Soot, 4B, SASSOB are sometimes used indefinitely like the word a dozen or a score in English. Thus—sesrow Btyswirrts IHS? Ought you not to believe a statement made by several persons! SBx%08 SQy0 a number of people came. SB Se 40 is also sometimes used to express a considerable number. For such expressions as two or three, five or six the corresponding numerals are simply joined in Telugu without any conjunction. Teves Bxoe* take four or five. Ordinals. 241. The ordinals have only one form for all genders, and are formed from the neuter cardinal numbers by changing final © or D into “*, andby adding Gs to any other final vowel ; as—Tod™, JOOS, GORA, second, eighth, twentieth. Instead of &8¢S* first the word “Bo%683 may be used; but whenever another number precedes, 2825 only can be used, gu Gros aes twenty-first, 242, ‘The ordinals may take the pronominal affixen; as—sSoxxS°B the third one (i.e., woman or thing), S~S*ares the third man. Fractions, 243, The following are examples of Telugu fractions:— | aquarter. PH. (Or BB.) 44 fouranda quarter. — >eorsomry, + 4 ohalf. ws. 4 84 four anda half. Wrooresy B. % uy three-fourths. sory. ae four and threefourths, TeoKsosswayg,90 ON PRONOUNS, COMPOSITE NOUNS, ETC. EXAMPLES. Neamt ATosro%. Four herdsmen. sevrts So, Four women. Treao%> A™ Bev. Four sheep, Teor Gore, Four letters. SAx008 stoaren, Ten beaters. SAx08 feo, Ten women, SB exes. Ten cows. SB Yostwen. Ten pens. 8Xotss 7 come in half an hour, Siv~isjy¥ Bord-oneo three and half rupees. Bong, Srovfose go P Sopot sosoihogeo, One thousand seven hundred and twenty-three people, “Soo Smsoso goS_ Sow R79. One thousand seven hundred and twenty-three sheep. g&Bs0B Soo. Twenty women. gb Sce- $. The twentieth woman. S060, The twelfth man, Sr GwoB Cows Tse, One hundred and twenty-two mats. o> Saget DHT. The one hundred and ninth book. Aor GBB asert Sawss, The one hundred and twenty-first verse.UN VERS. Oo CHAPTER VII. ON VERBS. On the Various Classes and Divisions of Telugu Verbs. 2Ad, Telugu verbs are divided into two classes, namely— (1) Transitive vorbs, i.c., verbs which require an object ; as Sp. (2) Intrausitive verbs, BR. verbs which do not require an object; as 245, ‘Telugu verbs are divided into threc conjugations according to the termination of their root. N.B.—The root is the crude form of verb, from which the various parts are derived. It has no distinct meaning, though it often hus the same form as an abstract noun. ‘The first conjugation includes all verbs of which the root does not end in dio or %; as Sp. ‘The second conjugation includes all verbs of which the root ends in di; as Basso, ‘The third conjugation includes all verbs of which the root ends in 1; as Se. ‘There are a few Telugu verbs which in some of their parts are imregularly formed. These Irregular verbs, together with passive, re- flexive, and causal verbs, will be explained in chapter IX. 246, Every Telugu verb has two distinct forms, namely—a positive form, and a negative form. For the present the positive form only will be considered. ‘The negative form will be explained in chapter X.92 ON VERBS. ON THE POSITIVE FORM OF VERBS. On the Positive Primary Verb. 247. As the positive primary verb is used in the formation of all other verbs, it will now be explained. It is derived from the root Gots (to be), and consists of two parts, namely—(1) a present relative participle, and (2) a present tense. On the Primary Present Relative Participle. 248, What is meant by a “relative participle” will be explained here- after. It is enough for the present merely to state, that the present relative participle of the positive primary verb is Gy. On the Primary Present Tense. 249. It will be remembered that the personal pronouns are as follows:— Singular. Plural. Ast person. ao L oxo We. 2nd person. 2% Thou Qs~% You. (Mas. awe He. Mus. Fem, 3% They. 3rd person. ; . [Fem Neu, 08 She or it. Neu. © They. By borrowing the terminations of the above pronouns the following tense, which is called the primary present tense, is formed. Singular. st person. BE GAH Tam. 2nd person. ky ere "hou urt. . (Mas. Br Tye He is, Brd person. [Fem & New @8 GiB She or it is.ON VERBS, 98 Plural, Ast person. Asso GIy oo We are. 2nd person. Drv Gays ‘You are. Mas. & Fem. 3% GA They are. 8rd person. New. @D Bd They (neu.) are. 250. It will be noticed’ that the above tense has the same peculiarity in the TH1Rp person as the pronouns of the third person have; namely— In the singular the masculine has a distinct form from the feminine and neuter, both of which have the same form. Jn the plural the masculine and feminine have both the same form, and the neuter hus a distinct form. (Para. 174.) As this peculiarity is common to almost all the tenses of all verbs, the following rale must be carefully observed, namely—In Telugu a verb in the third person must agree with ite eubject in gender, as well as in number and person. Thus— & XAS* SIO Diy rom Gar) w. In that room there are three boys. S KAS* sorvto wp GD. In that room there are three tables. ‘The following exercise illustrates the use of the primary tense. Whilst reading it, the student must refer to the rules respecting the use of the personal pronouns which are given in chapter VI. In ‘Telugu the principal verb in the sentence always stands last :— Exenewe. 8 ABST wp BA. There is a table in that room. (Lit. In that room a table is.) wT ABST Tors wpeo Bwyd, ‘There are two tables in my room. Dor Sips & KAS Gary a. Your younger brother is in that room.ON VERBS. © BY OFS Teor DAs Gwyd. There are four books on that table. Aer SYD DHWwe © Kast ay. Your younger brother's books are in that room. Tr SYD DHT H ayors Fay, My younger brother's books are on this table. Br SoS gost Gary v. Our father is in the house. Dr SoBWC NG, & whos GHB. Your father’s stick is under that table. dsr osm & XAI* GAA. Your father is in that room. BAGS GOUT* NENG GBH Gard, There are four girls in his house. SALITI,. Diy Gost rersoB Boo GA, 0. ‘There are many children in his small house. © WRS* wont Foxwo Gyo. In that box there are five pens. Bi Sorsoorws Oso GH. ‘There is an ant on this pen. © VLD Serreh SOD Vero Gisyd. There are three good pens on that table. 8 XBS* Hod VR sd. In that room there are good boxes. © MhyOrw Byp WE ass. ‘There is a white box on that chair. SDR n08,-b BA Bow oho Gsyd. In that box there are very excellent cloths. 6 aphots Fess Gy. There is u pen under that table.ON VERBS, 95, BO Golst ww DOG Bow Whe aiy9. There are very curious boxes in their house. Br GHMH woswoot Gard. Onur elder brother is in Masulipatam. 6 § 6 xs axa. 8 That woman is in that room. 5 & Seo & XBS* GAAS, ‘Those women are in that room. On the Various Parts of the Positive Form of a Telugu Verb. 251. The positive form of a Telugu verb consists of the following parts:— (1) The root. ) The infinitive mood. (8) The verbal noun, which has t2c0 forms. (4) The verbal participles, of which there are tv0, namely—(1) the present, and (2) the past. (5) The relative participles, of which there are three, namely —(1) the progressive present, (2) the past, and (8) the indefinite. (©) The indicative mood, which has the four following tenses— (1) The progressive present tense. (2) The habitnal present and future tense. (8) The past tense, which has two forms. (4) The indefinite tense. (7) The imperative mood. Each tense has two NUMnEns, singular and plural; and each number has three PERSONS. On the Formation of the Various Parts of the Positive Form. 252, The first conjugation is in reality the only regular form of conjuga- tion, and the second and third conjugations are merely variations and contractions, which occur in the case of those verbs of which the root ends96 ON VERBS. in So or +. This being the case, the rules for the formation of verbs of the first conjugation will be given first, and afterwards the variations from those rules, which occur in the case of verbs of the second and third con- jugations. N.B.—In the sueceeding pages the common forms only of the verbs are given. The grammatical forms will be given in a future chapter. The two following rules apply to verbs of every conjugation :— 253. Rule, 1. Every root of more than two syllables, which has the vowel \ in the last syllable but one, changes this © into 5, whenever the suoceeding vowel becomes D, > , or ~*, Thus— or &%) is always changed into © when followed by ©, and into when followed by ~.ON VERBS, Thus, for instance, the pres. ver. 106 partic. of w&dSb> becomes 260%). In strictly GRAMMATICAL LANGUAGE these verbs form the infinitive in @%, and the imperative in dSwiio; as ach, a&aswio. In the COLLOQUIAL DraLECT these verbs form the infinitive by changing final dS of the root into S, and the imperative by changing final S of the infinitive into %; as wis, wtb0%. Conjugation of cs, Root, Infinitive, Ist form. Verb, noun, { a nd form. Present, Verb. partic, { (Past. [ree pres. Rel. partic. / Past. (Indef. (Prog. pres. Habit. pres. & fut. Tenses. Past. let form, Do. 2nd form. Indefinite. Bing. 2nd per. Imperative, {Pl. Ist per. Do. 2nd per. ‘The tenses of #&c% are dec! 283. In this conjugation final & parts derived from it is, often, ws, u w&d%e, (Imag, root 20%.) 258, (Cram. was.) wEcSob», or wehoxobo, Btisthie (wBastis), athe, 228, web. abs, aah, Re RyA ethane, 2abos, BARD. hoi, wey. Rhee Sy, ato (Bas08), (WeoHiss.) (Gram, B&oiss.) lined like those of Gos», in the past verbal participle and in the incorrectly pronounced 2; as G8, UW?106 oN VERRS. THIRD CONJUGATION, Variations In the formation of verbs of the third Conjugation. 984. ‘The roots of all verbs of this conjugation end in %; as Sto. ‘The rules for the formation of verbs of this conjugation are the same as for verbs of the first conjugation, except in the following particulars:— 285, All verbs of this conjugation (except afew mentioned below) use the same contracted forms as verbs of the 2nd conjugation in the pres. ver. partie. and in the parte derived from it, and in the second form of the past tense. They also form the Indef, tense and the imper. pl. st per. like verbs of that conjugation. ‘Verbs of this conjugation may be conveniently arranged under two heads, as follows:— (1) Roots of more than Two Syllables. 286. Roots of more than two syllables, in which final *% is preceded by 0, @rop this o when using the contracted forms. Thus root S&ows, pres. ver. partic, 6%: (not 680%). These verbs usually form their infinitive regularly in +S, but they may also form it in 3, eg., 3&ows or 6805. In the indefinite tense these verbs may take 9% instead of Som, eg., Sov or SEK. 287. Roots of more than two syllables in which final + is not preceded by © (except verbs compounded with S¥tbto, e.g., ONS, Doss bo, ete., which always form the infinitive in +) form the infinitive in S, and consequently the imperative in %. 'Thus— Roor. Ineinrnive, IMPERATIVE. ++ WO, Some of these verbs have an infinitive in +, but it is not common.ON VERBS, 107 Conjugation of sdows and stot. 288. Roor, Shows, too, Infinitive. Shows (or Show). ‘8058, (Para, 254.) [st form. — shossts, tose, Verb. noun. (and form, Showsesiso. ‘Stes, Panes Present. 5x. 8t50%3, Co 8 tou shoo, 8&0, (Para, 253.) (Prog. pres. shige. eee. Rel. partic. | Past. tdoos, S808, |tnaet. shot, 88s. Prog. pres. ehxyanys. HK. Hab. pres. & fut, Chars, SeoaT Am, ‘Tenses. Past. Ist form. Shodwis. 580mm. Do. nd form, ¥&R9. SAR. Indefinite. Shots (CE xym). Schotbow, Sing. 2nd per. — Sdhow (Choris). sehos (SeoHSw). Imperative. Pl. let per. chores, Show se, Do. 2nd per, howto. stis08. Tenses of the Verb 380%, Prog. pres. tense, Habit, pres. and fut. tense. Sing. 1, Shywys, chaz. 2, vhgwys. Chas. dbxgany %. Ao . Sd Kaa 8. dbxgo8, Pl. Thm se, dbase. 2 SExgary es. BERT. BKyan 5, Shapes. dhmsyo. vhgo.108. ON VERBS. Past tonse. Indefinite tense First form. Second form, Sing 1. vhedws. — ChSD. Shows, 2. shodwry. ehgo. hobs. vbcdario, Those, show, tx, Chods8. SkoBm. thom, phoma. rbda, Shows, Shoda, DRS. SSowers, p. PLodards, rhodt, ddowoes, dhoosn, BhcBw, chow, (2) Roots.of only Two, Syllables. 289. Roots of only two syllables generally form the infinitive regularly in %5 as T*% (to boil), infin. Ts, Buta few verbs form it in 3; as Bx (to arise), infin. 8S, imper. S. * 290. Roots of two syllables, in which final +% is preceded by 0 (as “Wotss), or which end in %y (as Bot) are generally conjugated like verbs of the first conjugation; as “Zotéonr %, Bory Horry 6, etc. 201. ‘There are some roots of only two syllables, which end in some other letter than %, and © is subscribed; as Sty, ‘To form the present verbal participle and the parts derived from it, these verbs resolve the root into a three-syllabled word, and then use the ordinary contractions, eng, rovt SI*tQy, resolved into MoV, pres. ver. partic. Sor, The second form of the past tense also is sometimes contracted, e.g, S839, The indefinite tense takes subscribed 8, 0.9... SFY. The infinitive may be formed in % asa two-syllabled word, or in S us a three-sylla- bled word, ¢.9., S*8y or SBS,ON VERBS, 109 Conjugation of “Zo and SorN. Rows. Srdiy. (Resolved Kressots.) Bos. Sd), OF SPOS, Tost, ——_Sebiyts Dosti, Sntiyise, (Srv. Dow, HSH. Boo Soy, (Prog. pres. Woweyy, SPOKE. Rel. partic. { Past. Bods, EBS. Indef. Does, s&h. (Prog. pres. Dowiany is, Sry, Hab. pres. & fut, BosTs, sresdys, Tenses. fe Rows, Sroyarss. [natin ODP. SEYOD. or SmBRD. Indefinite. Rowwwsas, Krag, (Sing. 2nd per “boi. Sth), (Seog) so.) Imperative. + Pl. 1st per. DoH, SBT, (Srey. oe. Qnd per. Bosso&. rod. N.B.—The tenses of Se and Set) are declined exactly like those of SBo%. The tenses of Do are declined exactly like those of ——>pee—_.110 ON TELUGU SYNTAX, ETC. CHAPTER VIII. ON TELUGU SYNTAX, AND ON THE MEANINGS OF THE SEVERAL TENSES. I, ON TELUGU SYNTAX. 293. Before giving any ezereises upon Telugu verbs, it will be necessary to make a few general remarks upon Telugu sxwax. In doing so, it will be sufficient for the present to mention any peculiarities of syntax, which may occur in connexion with the various tenses, and with the imperative mood. Any peculiarities in reference to the other parts of a Telugu verb will be explained when those parts come specially under consideration. 294, Rule I. The usual order of words in a Telugu sentence is subject, object, verb, If there are any words or phrases in the sentence which modify the verb, they are usually inserted immediately before it. Thus— 8 SDarrtse T WY. Tre Sorgasoisoooo HT, That cooly-man beat my dog several times. 295. ‘Rule 11. In Telugu a finite verb agrees with its subject in number and person. If it be in the THIRD person, the gender also is in most tenses marked by a distinct form. (See para. 250.) OSH BITrH. He has gone. BY, BLSA. The dog has gone. 296. Rule III. When the subject to the verb is a personal pronoun, it is frequently omitted in Telugu. Thus— BYp.d S Bare. He beat the dog. 297, Rule 1. When a verb has several subjects joined by a copulative conjunction, expressed or understood, it is put in the plural number.ON TELUGU SYNTAX, ETC. 1 If any of those subjects are of the first person, the verb is put in the JArst person ; if none of them are of the first person, but any of them are of the second person, the verb is put in the second person ; other- wise, the verb is put in the third person. Thus— Bis Bory dsoreg, BMWs. (or BQBHo). (Para. 217, end.) Dower ory) Korg BLA (or B88). Weeding Mey corg BY (or BPS). 298, RaleY. In Telugu every transitive verb requires an object ; but when inanimate things are spoken of, the form of the nominative case is generally used instead of the form of the objective case. Thus— Fras fen. Call the cowherd. 8 QKFiio Sos, Send that book. (Inst#hd of , the letter dis added, Thus— © OKlese WS TBreo—goyrto? Where did you put that book—in the house ? Jy HSVsove HORT, GS Btn? ‘How many books did you send—twenty or thirty ? (3) In common conversation the sign of a question is sometimes entirely omitted, and the question shown by the tone of the voice. 300. Rale VII, (1) In order to denote emphasis the last letter of a word is changed into“. Thus— DB, BOOT. Tealled you.112 ON TRLUGU SYNTAX, RTC. @) When a word ends in “ or ov, the letter % is added; and when it ends in > , the letter Gb is added. Thus— goes*. In the house (and nowhere else). WH KS, (Emphatic for WSS.) gtoPob. (Emphatic for gtB .) 301. Rule VIII. When it is necessary to express both emphasis and a question, emphasis is expressed first, and then 0° is added. Thus— Dadar? Is it true? (From esas truth.) g&w? This very one? ic. Is it this very one? (From 98 this.) Se gops* Savy In this very house ? 302, Rule IX. (1) The last letter of a word is often changed into ** to denote doubt, and sometimes also to denote reference. ‘Thus— Ques, 8 DSi ASE Somers? ‘To whom will he send that book ? Ans, ao°84, 84, (He will send it) perhaps to you, perhaps to me. (2) The affix ~* is often added to InTERROGATIVES and gives them an indefinite signification. Such forms are generally used, where the word some occurs in English. (Compare para. 219.) ‘Thus— SHS TY,_AS* BYvrwH, He has gone somewhere or other. N.B.—The various uses of the affix “* will be more fally explained in a future chapter. 303, Rule X._ The word Sas- is affixed to words to express the English word perhaps. ‘Thus— SAO BOWES, or BLAS. Perhaps he will go.ON TELUGU SYNTAX, ETC. 113 304. Bale XI. The word 804 is added to words to show respect, and equals sir, or please. Thus— © BPD Tor OT disy Sod. ‘There are two books on that table, sir. Il. ON THE MEANINGS OF THE SEVERAL TENSES. On the Progressive Present Tense. 305. This tense is always used in reference to something regarded as actually taking place at the present time. Thus— wgeo Hagar 0. They are weaving cloths. BYjoo Hast Sartorwéhosy O, ‘Dogs are barking in the road. It may be used of a future action, if regarded as actually taking place— Bq Asim BiSwoeA ys. We go to-morrow or are going to-morrow. On the Habitual Present and Future Tense. 306. This tense is used in Two ways, as follows :— First. Tt is used as an habitual present tense to express habit or custom. Thus— Bt yo MS Bayvo? ‘Where do they weave these cloths ? Serre? Bayt, They weave them in Ellore. GY,_O9 Booto7IO, Dogs bark, 154 ON TELUGU SYNTAX, ETC. Notz.—When the habit is a temporary one, and merely adopted at the present time, the progressive present tense is sometimes used, asin English. Thus— 8 DSW So SPAIN sroHsorry s. Tam reading that book daily. Seoondly. It is used in common conversation to express future time. Thus— BH nosHoxwy BLBr~, I shall go to Bunder to-morrow. sro GSO Aspe Hyd? ‘When will they do that work ? Nors.—In English also the habitual present tense is not unfrequently used as a future, ¢.g., I go to Bunder to-morrow, instead of—I shall go to Bunder to-morrow. In grammatical Telugu another form is used for the future tense, which will be mentioned hereafter. On the Past Tense. 307, ‘This tense supplies the place not only of the English past tense, but also very often of the English perfect and pluperfect tenses, Some- times, however, the latter tenses are expressed in Telugu by compound tenses, which will be explained hereafter. The Telugu past tense has two forms, both of which have exactly the same meaning. The second form (¢.g., 9738) is the more grammatical form, and in the Northern Circars is seldom used in common conversation. On the Indefinite Tense. 308. This tense is not often used in conversation, except in complex sentences. It generally occupies the place of the consequent in a conditional sentence and may be rendered in English by the verb with the auxiliaries will, would, or tould have. Various examples of its use will occur in subsequent chapters.ON TELUGU SYNTAX, ETC. 15 EXERCISES. On the progressive present tense. S DWT QSyes WeoyFowry a. (Para. 202.) ‘That boy is now reading. SIGS BOD SOK Bayarye. (Para. 177.) He is examining them. S HOjtiey GU SH RSH A. ‘That horse is galloping quickly. Ai SOK Nokia wager 09. Iam reading for examination. BG TEM Bor SrByary ws. T am smearing paint on a stick. AY Boo TrenBowry sr? (Paras. 172, & 208.) Are you planting shoots? DB Strife a. (Para. 206.) She is drawing water. Soiy Goo TST Aw. We are writing letters. Dr Ay sso Dayo? Are you taking a bath? weet SS dM, Soy 8. (Para. 179.) ‘The Rajah is getting on the boat. Trt IS Bpsoawry wo. He is plaiting a mat. 6 SoKBAKBOD GIF OAT %, ‘They are deliberating about that mutter.116 ON TELUGU SYNTAX, ETC. Bo whyw LKppsoxyS. (Para. 177.) She is sewing cloths. Wows SHyeso Axpifowry&. (Para. 178.) ‘They are feeding cattle. Soar worrtises YORBowry w. ‘The goldsmith is melting gold. wbsaares AAS Sisto em, ‘The bricklayer is building a wall. DRS Ge Bootorr changed into ~. Thus Sijo8, SHB. 311. The first form of the past tense is sometimes contracted in common conversation by dropping 7°, the laat letter but one, and changing the preceding 9 into —. This —, however, is generally pronounced, not with its usual broad sound, but like the letter @ in caste. In the singular, third person feminine and neuter, %, the last letter but one, is changed into 0, Except in the case of the verb weit, the above forms should never be written although they are in some parts of the Telugu country commonly pronounced in the manner mentioned above. Thus— Sing. 1. Sara. Vulgar S74y~a. 2. SIS. sary. alt Sree, Serr eh. iF. N. a SHO.120 ON TELUGU SYNTAX; ETC. Plo, Se aTriS, Soy aso, 2. SBT. SEP, 3 fu. FL STRAINS, Sgt. N. 87859. Seon. 312, ‘The verbs mentioned in para. 290, often use the contracted forms of the indefinite tense, and of the imperative first person plural. Where final *% is doubled in the root, and G are doubled in the contracted forms. Thus Gow, Goto, GoBso ; Bi, BS, BH. 313, In the second and third conjugations the vowel — in the last letter but one of the imperative first person plural (e.g., sts Bx») is occa- tionally shortened ; as Se#s6o, This is the more correct form. B14, Instead of the tense Xe to express ABILITY, the following tense (a corruption of the tense Xeoxoe%s) is occasionally used. Sing. 1. Kestm, or Xgorss instead of Xow. 2. Xestihy or Xp — — Koy, Xom — — — — Kom, Kos, — — — — Kom, Plo. Kesttio, or Keio — — — Ketan 2 Kes%w, or Kes — — — Kod, Keot®, or Xt — — Kev, xo, —- — — — xox, 815, Inthe third person singular (w. F. & N.) and plural (x,) of the indefinite tense of S*¥jo, the word S*x is sometimes used, instead of MY, which is the same in form as the first person singular of the negative indefinite tense,ON TELUGU SYNTAX, BTC. 121 316. Instead of the imperative 3, the word Se is sometimes used. Instead of the imperative T°, the word <7 is sometimes used as a fond term to a little child. 317. "A tense is sometimes used in conversation, which is formed by changing final © of the root (and in the recond conjugation of the root in %) into 3. Snbjoined is an example— Sing. 1. saw, 2. say. BOMPLN, S@O, or S80. (Nor. Cir, SHS.) Pl. i. Stishs, a. sti, MF, STG, ft Sed, or SAD. (Nor. Cir, St.) This tense has been generally regarded as a corruption of a grammatical form of the indefinite tense, ¢.g., SBS. It usually implies doubt. Thus— . KORG, say. Do not ran, you may fall. 8 BQYTOSAE BE ws, wre NIH. (Nor. Oir. 8 HH.) Do not go near that mad man, he may beat you. 16122 ON. INREGULAR, PASSIVE, BTC. CHAPTER 1X. ON IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, REFLEXIVE, AND CAUSAL VERBS. 318. I, IRREGULAR VERBS. namely— 319. Roo. vs. Infinitive. r. lat ye, Verb. noun, (2/7 “s and form. Pst, . (Present. yt, Verb, partic. f “s (Past. 900, Prog. pres. SHwQ. Rel. partic. 4 Past. vous. Indef. ahs, (Prog. pres. SSKYS. Habit. pres. & fut. wgarm, Tenses. {Past Ist form. bowarw, Do. 2nd form. vom. Indefinite. RSG ‘Sing. Qnd per, = (65y). ‘Imperative, + Pl. 1st per. verse. Do. 2nd per. ¥od. ‘The following verbs are in some of their parts irregularly formed, ©% (or Z) to become, B¥ to G0, .St%y to come, gry to give, TH) to die, Sort to see, Bry to bring. Conjugation of #3, 3%), and Sty, Stm¥y, Sows. arog. Bom. aes, Hows. ota. seo. 3 (ers). Stars. rod, sy, Sihybo, 3m. SQ. SQyS. oy Sig. ss, Syms. 80, BE. o> By). STS. Sod,ON IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, ETC. 138 In the Northern Circars the verb ©) sometimes uses ©% in the infinitive and 22% as the 2nd form of the verbal noun. On the Tenses of the above Verbs. 320. ‘The several tenses of these verbs are declined exactly like those of any other verb of the same conjugation, except in the case of the second form of the past tense, and in the indefinite tense. These two tenses are declined as follows :— Second form of the past tense. Sing. 1. vonen, a9, ago. women. aon. age. aft eae. saws, says. * [pee eas, BtBtox, aBys. Pl. 1. won, stom, aga. ones, at0s, age wows. Stowe. aay. ves. saws, aay. Indefinite tense. Sing. 1. Ste, Be, 2 Hoy, ateHy, a ft vss. BHD», Saayo, BGS. vB. athe. BiSye, PLA estos. Pessw, Bayo, 2. wees. srtet5, Baie0.. wBeow. atese6, Sto. Hm. aH. SY.14 UN IRBEGULAR, PASSIVE, ETC. Remarks upon the above Verbs, Various parts of these verbs are used idiomatically in a variety of ways which will be explained in subsequent chapters. 321, ‘The verb @¥t» in addition to the meaning of fo become bas also the meaning of to finish. ‘Thus— 8 SD Yomnar? 1s thut work finished? ‘The word ©%% (the third person singular of the indefinite tense) is sometimes used in the sense of yes. Thus— Ques, SQyrar? Ans, OSS. SQW. Ques, Has he come? Ans, Yes, He has come. 322, ‘The verb 39}, us will be hereafter seen, enters largely into the formation of the negative form of verbs. ‘The tense S*Bomy% (as also the words ‘S80, ASoxy, and robeg), when affixed to the infinitive of another verb, gives it (like the verb to go in English) a future signification. When thus affixed, initial ¥ is by the laws of euphony changed into o*. Thus— Aso WasetSorr x, Tam going to read. srt GSD BosoartBomry or? Are you going to do that work? 323. A class of compouND vsnbs ure formed by prefixing the past verbal participle of certain verbs to the verb Sg). ‘Thus, by prefixing G& (the past verbal participle of 2) to the verb 33) the compound verb BAd'y is formed, which means—to go lv ruin, So in like manner BAOD*Y tu gu to pieces, ote., ete.ON IBBEGULAR, PasSIVE, Ec. 125 In connection with the verbs St and 2°) the following rules in reference to place are here inserted :— Rules in reference to Place. 324. ‘To express morion 70, the object towards which motion is made is put in the dative case. But when the object is of such a nature as not to admit of entrance (as a tree, a man), the dative case is never used, but the compound postposition SQ8 or %A88 is always affixed. 325. To express Mor1oN ¥RoM, the postposition S00 is used; but if the object cannot be entered, the compound postposition X00 or SAS 0D is always used. Thus— Sao G GIOE BLT. (Or G Gis.) ” He went to that village. 8 TApwALs BYP. I went to that tree, (Lit. To near that tree.) © S*OMOSAE BY. I went to that gentleman. MAHON SHA Ho? Where are you coming from? (Or Whence are you coming ?) Bi BIOs ISVSATMHOD SAS? From whom did this letter come? 326, When speaking about THE DISTANCE OF ONE PLACE FROM ANOTHER, the place nearest to the speaker is put in the dative case, and the more remote place is put in the nominative case. ‘Thue— © GS GAB Jod Arvo? What distance is that village frum here? (Lit. To here.) Bash FrssW GOB vomara. Verb. noun. (eee veo, or wasps os fe ae. Past. ag). Pres. RSQ. Rel. partic. + Past, ays. Indef. ay). Habit, pres. & fut. say16, Past. 1st form. gdyarw. Do, 2nd form. aa. ane BRN. ‘Tenses. (Sing. Qnd per. Rog, (Kp). Imperative. {Pl. Ist per. aE. (Do. and per. REGO, oF QaxeRods, Conjugation of ot and By. Boor. srw, Infinitive. rts, (et form, ‘rob, Verb, noun. (2nd form, Srtithise. _ {Present soy Verb. partic, | (Past. sino. (Pree: pres. Sorrigay « Rel. partic. - Past. Sras. linet ws, Sey, Syd. sm. HQ). Si. SQYS. SK, Sap. SQ. 380, SRG. WH (HH). STs. aed. Boy, Bay. Bass, Bx, Bay, BH. Bays. BY.ON IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, RTC. 127 Prog. pres. Habit. pres. & fut. Tenses. Past Let form. Do. @nd form. Indefinite. Sing. 2nd per. Imperative, { Pl. 1st per. Do. 2nd per. trims. + Bigrye. Sige. Baw. roms. _ Bays, Sr§D. BRo. rhs, BRS. Sitio (Sirvthosso), 8 x). rT, BEx. Srthod, Bod. The second form of the past tense and the indefinite tense of these verbs are declined exactly like those of Si), (See para. 320.) Il. PASSIVE VERBS. 328. ° In Telugn every active verb may be changed into a passive verb by affixing to its infinitive mood the verb Se, and conjugating % through all its moods and tenses. (When St is thus used, initial < is always changed by the laws of euphony into w.) Thus the active verb Sots to save becomes in the passive voice S&otserth to be saved. Conjugation of Bhowsene, Infinitive. Ist form. Verb. noun, 2nd form. Verb, partic. hone (Prog. pres. Rel. partic. | Past. Indef, BEhossnds, Shosnes. Sdowneets, Shows wthesise, Shosnths. Shownd, Bhowswehotbosy. Shosnds, Shosne,128 QN IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, ETC. (Prog. pres. Chovathieanys. Habit. pres. & fat. Sdoswtoorm, Tenses. Past Ist form. Shovvdmrm. Do 2nd form, ShowswdBa, Indefinite, Thowntheeow, f Sing. Qnd per. — Shrossweho. Imperative. / Pl. Ist per. Shotatorrs Do. 2nd per. Showntio’. Remarks upon Passive Verbs. 329, In Telugu passive verbs are very seldom used in common conver- sation; and when they are used in English, they must generally be translated into Telugu actively. Thus in translating the English sentence—That work was done by him—instead of saying 6 SD Sass Bes Baon&sB—it would be more colloquial to say edos 8 SO GB Wm. (Lit, He did that work.) Ill. REFLEXIVE VERBS, 330. ‘Reflexive verbs are formed by affixing the verb §"%% to the root of any verb, and conjugating §7%% through all its moods and tenses. Verbs of the second conjugation always use the root in %. Thus, from &*3% to rob comes the verh S*:%8A to rob for oneself, and from Wass to do comes the verb x09" to do for oneself. The verb 8729 is conjugated exactly like the verb 87 to buy (see para. 273), except that the infinitive 8% and the imperative $736 are usually changed into §*, as SAS or CB6E AD; EFM, eTrX 87 or 8,8. ‘The reflexive forms of the YeON",_A ond SL, A. verbs ¥& to sce and 8% to buy are Reflexive verbs resemble to some extent the middle voice in Greek. ‘They express that the action performed by the subject is also performed in reference to that subject. Hence these verbs frequently denote that the action is performed for the benefit of the subject, or that it is performed by the free will and WwW choice of the subject.130 ON IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, RTC. The following examples are added to illustrate the use of reflexive verbs:— Examenes, WPS GR. TEpFotwary 6, They are building a house for themselves. Dy Xotr% Sob Wes otrreso? At what hour does he cook his food? Lit. At what hour does he do cooking for himself ? BAS Fossey GH, Solway tho, He is mending a pen for himself. 228 WhyS AT oh. He tied on his cloth. (Lit, He tied a cloth on himself.) Bes poo SHIM ofwy ch. (Para. 331.) He is putting on his shoes, TrrcSoH TAHT oo, He wounded himself. Bx Wore Babs otwry A. Tam shaving mysels. © Diyareh IN aU Doss olwwry to. ‘That boy is tearing his cloths. 332. —_ In some instances the difference in meaning between the simple and the reflexive form is so great that they must be expressed in English by different words. Thus—O% to say, 87% to think; WHF to read, SSS" to learn; Sto to walk, SehotS to behave. In some instances the use of the reflexive form is so idiomatic and peculiar that practice alone can teach the student ite exact force and meaning. IV. CAUSAL VERBS. 333. In ‘Telugu there are certain verbs, called causal verbs, which are formed from the simple vere. ‘The formation is generally as follows:— () In the First and sxconp conjugation by changing final ‘sof the root into Dow ; as—S%p to beat, S"Bows tu cause to be beaten ; Beso todo oxo ty cuuse to be done.ON IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, ETC. 131 @) In the THIRD conjugation by changing final % of the root into Row; as ROS to call, BBO to cause to be called. (See para. 253.) Conjugation of Hono, and SOkots. Boor. Bowox, BOLO, Infinitive. Powers, BDLos. { ‘Ist form. Pomosots, BOBosbe, ‘Verb. noun. 2nd form. Homosstise, ROLES, Present. . . Verb, partic, resent. Hooors BORK. (Past. Homod. BOLD. ‘Prog. pres. Bomrgyy . Robey. Rel. partic. / Past. omoas, BOBoDS. ( Indef. Bonod. BOLO. Prog. pres. Pontyany 6, RORK aH. Habit. pres, & fut. Sowadrss, BORAT. Tenses. Past Ist form. toncomm. RDLOOaS. Do. 2nd form. Zoo, * BERD. Indefinite. Powottors, (Booxas.) BORCU A, (RELK.) ( Bing. Qnd per. Bomor, (Gososhsss,) LOLow. (BOBowoitie,) Imperative. + Pl. 1st per. Howot ss, BOLT Sw, |. Qnd per. Howoxso8, BOBO, Remarks upon Causal Verbs. 334. A causal verb formed from a transitive verb is equivalent in English to the verb to cause followed by a PASSIVE infinitive. Thus from Ud%» to do is formed Moxo0w% to cause to be done (not to cause to do). Hence the causal form of a transitive verb is often followed by an agent in the INSTRUMENTAL casE, Thus— DY. KPOsrIGS soboda es. He caused the dog to be killed by a cooly-man, i.e., He got (or had the dog killed by » cooly-man,132 ON IRBEGULAR, PASSIVE, BTC. A causal verb formed from an intransitive verb becomes an ACTIVE verb. Thus from the intransitive verb S*oX> to bubble is formed the causal verb SoRow% to cause to bubble, i.e., to make to boil. Thus— wren Poko. Make the milk (to) boil, i.e., Boil the milk. 335. Inthe case of some verbs, especially of intransitive verbs, the causal verb is very irregularly formed, ¢.9., Sy Yow; BK, Bow; BH, Bri, etc., etc. It will be found easier to treat such causal forms as distinct verbs. On the Combination of Causal and Reflexive Verbs. 336. The causal form and the reflexive form are sometimes combined. Thus—osors8"~% to cause to be done for oneself. ‘The following examples will make the several forms of the verbs clear, and illustrate the changes of meaning. BW Gey Nar, They built house. BS Ge Feary ss, They built a house for themselves. BW Ge Foes, They caused a house to be built. Br GED KosoOrary &, They caused a house to be built for themselves. ” Three Remarks, 837, (1) A class of verbs are formed by affixing the verb Se to NOUNS; as—8FSex to desire, WeSss2s to be in trouble, Nouns ending in so @rop this letter before se; ae—topses to be happy; Pasowseo to be afraid; 8*SSe to be angry.ON IRREGULAR, PASSIVE, ETC. 138 338. In the same manner, verbs are sometimes formed by prefixing nouns to “Dé3si*g and SY. Thus— GSP to trouble (Trans). FSs% to be troubléd, to suffer (Intrans.). : ISB» to inspire with fear (Trans.). PAHS to be terrified. (Intrans.)« BrSSM to cheat (Trans.). Br~SsI*% to be cheated (Intrans.). DSH) to put to sleep (Trans.'. RSA to go to sleep (Intrans). PoXSG% to disappoint (Trans). YorSes to be disappointed (Intrans.). 339. The verb Scio is often added to the past verbal participle of another verb to express COMPLETENESS ; as SWSdS» to throw away, Dot Bas to tear up, QA to take away, F*R Bas to cut of 340. (2) A few verbs although ending in §"%% are not reflexive forms as—GHBOO7A to be quiet, Soe" to be awake, 341, (3) Many verbs although ending in Dow are not causal forms; as— 820% to bless, SSO to examine. a184 ON THR NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS, CHAPTER xX. ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS. On the Negative Primary Verb. 342, ‘The negative primary TENsE, which may be used in reference to either present or past time, is as follows— Sing. 1. ts Je, ‘Tam not, or was not, 2 £5 8S. ‘Thou art not, or wast not. ' (u. arabe Ses. He is not, or was not. “|p. 8 Bes, She or it is not, or was not. PL. Basso Sits, We are not, or were not. 2, arts 805, ‘You are not, or were not. fer me Bs. They are not, or were not. Ts oD BS. They (new.) are not, or were not. 343, There are orn pants of the negative primary verb connected with the tense Sx; but as these are not required in the formation of the negative form of verbs, they will not be mentioned until the next chapter. EXERCISE ON THE NEGATIVE PRIMARY TENSE. Bass gost Bx. He is not in the house. Dr Aniiy OFS Sor? ‘Were you not there the day before yesterday? 6 goig* bye Sy. ‘There are not chairs in that house (i.e, There are no chairs), 6 LOM Qs Se. ‘There is not a book on that table (i,e., There is no book).ON THE NEGATIVE FORM O¥ VERBS. 135 dre DRS Yoswos dar? Are there no pens in your box? Ay Sw Os Sw, I was not there yesterday. BALI AS, Gosst Bm. IAs BYsra? He was not at home yesterday. Where did he go? On the Various Parts of the Negative Form. The negative form of a Telugu verb consists of the following parts :— (1) The past verbal participle. (2) The verbal noun. (8) The indefinite relative participle. (4) The indicative mood, which has the four following tenses :— (1) The progressive present tense. (2) The habitual present and future tense. (8) The past tense. (4) ‘The indefinite tense. (8) The imperative mood. Rules for the Formation of the Various Parts of the Negative Form. 345. ‘The rules for the formation of the various parts of the negative form are the same for all verbs, regular or irregular, of whatever class and of whatever conjugation. ‘The various parts of the negative form of verbs are formed from the ingiurTtve of the positive form, eg., 873, SoS, Sas, 346, ‘The past verbal participle is formed by adding¥ to tlie positive infinitive; as S728, not having struck, Busy, sas, BAT. The verbal noun is formed by prefixing the negative past verbal participle to SI*ss2iso or “I*yyéo the positive verbal noun of 3*¥) to go.136 ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS. Thus 88 S*seia%o, the hotstriking ; Base Vaiss, SSSY Maser, In highly grammatical language the verbal noun is formed by adding . to the positive infinitive, eg., 97s, Bano, but this form is rarely used in conversation. 348, The Indeftuite relative paritelple is formed by adding © to the positive infinitive; as 870, WoHd, Sz. 349. The progressive present tense is formed by prefixing the positive verbal noun to the word && for all numbers and persons; as Sa §7%326800 G&S, Lamnot striking ; BS, 8432s BS, ete. Sometimes a form is used to express the present progressive, which is got by prefixing the positive progressive present tense to the tense “Bra, the neg. hab. press. und fut. tense of O% as SE pBomry Ta, Tam not striking. 350. ‘The habitual present and future tense is formed by adding the termin- ations of the personal pronouns to the positive infinitive; as 8%, T atrike not, do not strike, or shall or will not strike, Boi, SSA, Nore.—Habit or custom is also sometimes expressed by the tense which is formed by prefixing the positive verbal noun to 8%, e.g., 8783 2%s608e%, ‘This is apecially the case, when the habit is not a perma- nent one, but merely adopted at the present time. (Compare para. 306, first note.) 351, The past tense is formed by prefixing the positive infinitive to the word Be for all numbers and persons; as BA Sty Sa%, I did not strike. DE; SBS, ete., ete. B52, ‘The Iindeflulte tense is formed by prefixing the negative past verbal participle to the tense 2a (para. 320); as SEY Sasa, F would not strike, or would not have struck, ete, BALE Doi, SESS Bow, 353. ‘The Imperative second person siNGUraR is formed by adding 8 to the positive infinitive, and the second person PLURAL by adding oA; as sing. 57438, pl. Sg808, strike not, or do not strike.ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS. 137 ‘The first person PLURAL is formed by prefixing the negative verbal participle in ¥ to Sars» (See para. 319); as Spe Darrxoo, let us not strike. The Negative Conjugation of 874», 954. Posrrive ivprrrive. rR Past verb. partic rye. Verbal noun, SRV tts, (Gram. St.) Indel. rel. partio. , Rp. ‘Prog. pres. SYR 8, (Oud, Myptmy% 7s.) Tenses. Habit. pres. & fut. rye. Past. wp 20, Indef. PHY tos, ‘Sing. Qnd per. ys. Imper, { Pl. Ist per. yy Stow, Do. 2nd per. Kod. The Negative Tenses of §* 355. Prog. present tense. I am not striking. Sing. 1. Mie Opti Bs, | PLL Bois Fp Bes, a bS Erp Seo, | a, BPG Eps Seo, a, wrth A gtisis Seo, | g [RS BH Bee, len, 08 Spies Ses, | N. WD Ete Bem, Habit. pres. & fat. tense. I strike not, do not strike, or shall or will not strike, Sing 1. “8s Sy, } Pha he Myw., 2. bY EBS. | a. Drs FHS, ' fr srt BT p3Uho, | {e FR, TNS ETP, FN, @8 EES. | wd BS. 18138 ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS: Past tense. I did not strike, or have not struck, etc. Sing. 1. te 1 des. a. BS HR Ses, (u. wrth 8743 Ses, Stn. 00 sry Bes. | PLL Bim Op Ses, i a Dre Op Ses. afer mo ry ts. “|e yb eg Ses. ‘Indefinite tense. I would not strike, or would not have struck. Sing. 1. “Bi OT HY Sts, a. bS EY Stems, A fu. Sarthe FEN THs, [Po 88 RY ata. Pl Bese EY Stes, a. Dds ETRE Stes, rf { MAF, 37S ERY SteGes, (SOR BY otGs, Examples of the Conjugation of Negative Verbs. 356, 428. (Pos. infin.) Sosv. Posy Stax, Sasa. Asstise Seo, or Sym w Ts. Basis, Bas deo, Saoy Stew, Bass, Soov Stora. Sasvod, 357. Gxoe"*, (Pos. infin.) Swety, Droste Satan, Womoss. (Pos, infin.) } Ponos. Bomosy Sesto. Ponossa, Pomossise Ses, or Bomtany% TH. Aonossis, Sonos Bee. Pomosy dtess, Somos, Ponosy stars, Sosonvod. Showuts. (Pos. infin.) Shosney. Showasy axeisn,ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS. 189 dre, Showsutsn, Awoertstiss eo, Uxotroiwmy& Shosuneise Se, Khosmehioary s Tw, [rs Sorts, dhosatis, Bert Ses, shosats se, awrty teow, Showy sxe, Sioets, Bhosutss. Swrty Sos, Sosasy Stari. Srortyod. Shoswsyod. 358. 3», (Pos. infin. of w§.) &4, (Pos. infin. of 3%.) 0% (Pos. infin. of Sey.) re. ot, we. . Te SS, Oty Stim, we Si, rp, ata, me. Tate Bh, sw mys Sitios bi, May TS BH, srw [rs [s ra, rs, rs, ots, wm. rte, at de, oe Sts, TY dts, Sy Stow, re sms, rs, ate, os, TN Stow. Sty tors, we stoi, Pod. Bd. wos. On the Negative Tenses and Imperative. 359. In conversation 82% is sometimes pronounced ©. Observations on the Negative Verb. 360, Tt has been stated (para. 349) that the negative prog. pres. tense is formed by prefixing the positive verbal noun to the word 82%, This is440 ON THE NEGATIVE FORM of VERBS. not strictly speaking a tense, though used as such, for the verbal noun is in reality the subject of 6%. Thus §742s S2 literally means— There is not striking. The use and syntax of verbal nouns will be explained in a future chapter. 361, It must be remembered that whenever in the negative form the second form of the positive verbal noun is used (e.g., @*3t6%%») the first form (¢.g., 3*%s) may be used instead ; but the second form is the one most commonly used. (See para. 258,) 362 The indefinite relative participle with the affix 8, is sometimes used instead of the verbal noun, to form a negative present tense; as 89 srs de, 363, Relative participles are sometimes formed by prefixing the neg. past ver. partic, to Mossy, Bows, and rohks, eg. Baoy Iowy, Baoy Hows, Baws arog. A negative infinitive also may be formed by prefixing the neg past ver. partic. to 3, the positive infinitive of HHw, 09. er 2*. The use of a negative infinitive is rare. 364. A prog. pres. tense, an hab. pres.and fut. tence, anda past tense are sometimes formed by prefixing the neg. past ver. partic. to the tenses SBomry%, Tora, Howsrao (or BBD), eg., Bawexs ona, He did not do. Of these forms that for the past tense is most common. 865. A past tense is sometimes formed by affixing the tense B>* to the past tense of a positive verb; as GR" SrA. I did not do. 366. Sometimes a negative habitual present and future tense, followed by the positive past tense of ©) is used asa negative past tense. This form is not very common. Thus— Dr WSs SO Ax Ispes WatoisonB ? When did I not do what you told me?ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS. 141 TP BxSrreoah FAosoorr Idpts TET, Bajos. Please tell me when my son did not come regularly. SM VBASTAE BYSpthor SO WSySoo¥O, You have never replied'properly to my question. 367. An imperative is sometimes formed by adding #8 (i.¢., 3*8, the negative imperative of 2*%}) to the infinitive of any verb; as Wa% &*%, Do not do. Lit. Do not go to do. This is sometimes changed into By, and in the Cuddapah District into WS, but these are vulgariems to be avoided. 368. In the case of some verbs the negative habitual present and future tense, preceded by a negative past verbal participle, is used to give the force of a strong affirmative. Thus— BIS VARG, Bw BHP Sree. If he asks, I shall not fail to tell him. Det BH SA Xobom TY Ivy%. (Or Sve.) You must not fail to come at ten o'clock to-morrow. AS Bi Sere GAOSS* BHY O98. (Or STS.) I must mention this to him, N.B.— In the last two sentences the final verb is impersonal. On the Translation of English Negative Sentences. 369. Sanscrit words admitted into Telugu use certain prefixes (like in, un, etc», in English) which have a negative force, ¢.g., G7>MG2, a worthy man, OBrKG 2, an unworthy man. With this exception, the negative ina Telugu negative sentence is always conveyed in the VERB. In an English negative sentence, however, the negative may be conveyed in a pronoun, adjective, adverb, or verb. Hence in translating from English into Telugu, we must always first put the sentence in such a form that ‘the negative may be contained in the verb. Thas—There is nobody in142 ON THE NEGATIVE ORM OF VERBS. that room—equale—There is not anybody in that room. & XBS* Js Bay Ge, There is no book on the table—equals—There is not a book on the table, woPsw DSTesoo Be, He went nowhere—equale—He did not go anywhere, Sai J%,A8 BBS. He ie not here, wes Bhs Be, EXERCISES ON THE NEGATIVE TENSES. On the progressive present tense. Drv Ary dio Uiyryo? Gave Be, Are you taking a bath? I am not taking one. 8 Dar Tradst cesses da. ‘That boy is not reading in my school. MOrA8 di Li ptomry a? Ysa Bas, Is he eaddling the horse? He is not saddling it. On habit or custom. BIW SP SossyVisoo Ksy. Cows do not calve every year. KSSoe Daegaeo OS. Horses do not eat rice. DrssroSh Vig Soo “WEyWs, They do not give rice to poor people. St SEH Tt winsosS nhyeo Faves, ‘They do not weave such cloths in this town. WIDE aQBiboo SQYSA NAW Vw So Osea Ga, (Temporary habit.) He has got fever, and therefore he is not eating any rice. DoSASS*, SS Ht Sor FxAoosiss Be, (Temporary habit, see para, 350, note.) For some reason or other, for the present he is not taking any pains.ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS. 143 On future time. BH dsl v sn Fao. I shall never do that work. wrth @ Morixes Base, He will not make that couch. BH TH WOH GAG? GEG. Will you give me leave to-morrow? I will not. OSH GUOr=eo See Goes Ore. Henceforth he will not come to our house. BH Hedy Pas’ Loss, 1 will not invite him to dinner to-morrow. On the past tense. A GAS Jepsrdy woswor BESM. (See para 216.) I have never yet gone to Bunder. BH FASE BASS Is, eh orasda, I have never yet seen him. DS Bi BSN SATO? SISA, Did you walk this morning ? No. (Lit. I did not walk.) Dey Or EAH? MrPATO? KrUTS, Did you speak to him yesterday? I did not, Teh Book B BW ageoo Ha. (OHY Tomar.) He did not buy cloths the day before yesterday. SAS TIS B BH; goT QSSSe, (GAyTes Tres.) ‘He has not yet given me that money.144 ON THE NEGATIVE FORM OF VERBS. On the imperative. Bsr SB ANOEHEY TIAL THOS. Do not come to me for ten days. DS, WIPWOS* Sirarwioy Base. Do not associate with evil men, DS Stoo Asp OsErBOEss. Do not plunder the riches of others. GALS Goss JSpios BY. Never go to his house. Korr-aw, Gowgihe Booger, Do not talk. Do not delay. BPH GD GONgsarr Wasa t¥o8. Do not do that work slowly.ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETO. 145 CHAPTER Xl. ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE viRe to be, AND ON VARIOUS USES OF PRONOMINAL AFFIXES WHERE IN ENGLISH THE COPULA IS USED. I. ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB to be. On the Telugu Primary Verb. 370. ‘The PRIMARY veRB, of which mention has slready been made in previous chapters (paras. 247 & 342), consists of the following parts:— PosIrive FORM. Pres. rel. partic. a. ho Present tense. Gaye. Naoarive Form. Past. ver. partic. “88. Verbal noun. SE ssseéaeo (or SF Seo. Gram. Ss.) Indef. rel. partic. 82. Present tense. 8m, Past tense. Bx, On the full Verb Goes. 371. In addition to the primary verb there is the full verb éotS fo be, which is conjugated throughout just in the same manner as any other verb. The formiation however is somewhat irregular.146 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. Positive FORM. 873. Roor. Infinitive. Verb. noun, 474 form. [2nd form. Verh, pantio, {?*00e2* rerb, Lao Past. Prog. pres. Rel. partic, Past. Indet. Prog. pres. Bab. pres. & fut. Tenses, Past 181 form. Do. 2nd form. Indefinite. ‘Sing, 2nd per. Imper. Pl. 1st per. Do. and par. 873, declined as follows— Past TENSE, Sing. 1. Gob, 2 Grotto. MOB, Sa. aor. Pld. GoB8s, a, 0888, 1, Gols. GOB, Grotto, Gots, Grotob, rotstsiio, Gots, 08, Grotooxty. 4085, (In Northern Circars shortened 0%, [into @ay..) Sowa %. Gorm. Gro8arm, (In Northern Cirears short. Gola, [ened into é=3%.) Groth. Grothe, Goma, roto’. The second form of the past tense, and the indefinite tense are INDEF, TENGE. Groth, Gots. Goths, roto. Goths, otes, Grothe, trotios,ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT To THE VERB To bi, kro. 147 NEGATIVE FORM. 374, Posimive Invuwrmive. ot, Past ver, partic. cot, Verbal noun. Got BS. (Gram, Gots.) Indef. rel. partic. drotia. Prog. pres. Geotitisie Bes, Tons, | 82: Ps fat ot. eneeY Paot. Gots Be9, Indef. Gott Ses, Sing. 2nd per. otis, Imper. {PI. Ist per. Grote ertariso. Do. 2nd per. eroito8. On the Meanings of the Primary Verb, and of Goz, 375, The prtwany vens has only the meaning of fo be, but the FULL VERB Got in addition to the meaning of to be has also the meaning of to dwell, to stay, to stop. Thus— TOG NG BOBYT A, OF. Gots. ‘The gentleman is calling you, Stay there. GotnAry Hod, (See para. 304.) I am staying, sir. Ba BSD Weiss? wor Gotwsry so, In this hot season we are living (or dwelling) in the upper story. On the Various Forms of the Positive Past Tense of Gots, 376. In the positive form it will be noticed that @%, and Gay %, the shortened forms used in the Northern Circars for 04s (the past relative participle) and G08" (the past tense), are spelt exactly in the same manner as the primary present relative participle Gi, and the primary resent tense GA148 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BR, ETC. In the Cupparax Disraicr 40289 is the form of the past tense which is most commonly used. The form é0470*% is also sometimes used, but its shortened form G6 is never used. Hence whenever the ténse Gay. % is used in the Cuddapah District, it always is the primary present tense, and consequently always has a present signification. In the NorruEnn Crncans the second form of the past tense, namely, 0880, is only rarely used, The form Go&7"% is never used; but the form commonly used is 7%), the shortened form of Go&srAs. ‘Hence in the Northern Circars, whenever the tense Ga) % is used, it may be the primary present tense, and consequently may possess 8 present signification, or it may be the shortened form of the past tense (shortened for Go&7**), and consequently may possess a past signifi- cation. The context will always make the meaning clear, The following are examples of the tense 7+), when it is the shortened form of @o&7-AS, and consequently has a past signification:— Dr Sy IY,-S Gary WH? (Cud. God, or Goe38.) ‘Where were you yesterday ? DS Thee OA GAYA. (Cud. GOAT AS, or GO!D.) ‘Yesterday I was there. Rorily BATE 6 SYA GAT th. (Cud. GAA, GOB.) ‘The day before yesterday he was in that town. N.B.—Examples of the use of the primary tense G3 5, which always has a present signification, will be found in para. 250, ezercise, On the Verb Got, when used to express the English Verb to have, 877. The verb Got or the primary verb preceded by a dative case is used (like the verb sum in Latin) to express the meaning of the English verb to have gt to possess. Thus— Ww Sor Says. Thave a gun. (Lit. A gun is to me.) dr BF Sar? Have you not a cow?ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE; ETC. 149 BAHN Poisow Sy. He has no fields. WH sss Gi, B. T have remembrance, i.e., I remember. SALIH Jove Boo Gary to? How many children has he? Norg.—In sentences of this kind the verb'is sometimes understood, and not expressed; but this is only the case where the verb, if expressed, would be positive. Thus— SARS Er Goo Jor? How many daughters has he? 378. Just as in English the prepositions by and’ with are sometimes used after the verb to-have, so in Telugu the postpositions SA¥ and S% are sometimes used with the verb 02% ; but this can only be done, when the noun denotes a moveable object. When used in this way Possession at the time is always meant, whereas the verb Got with a ” “dative implies ownership or possession generally. ‘Thus— GRAY KAcrdiho GHA. She has a watch with her. (Lit. Near her.) Wh KAcorWisoisy J have a watch. WS Wee $2, _ T have no money with me. TH Wis Be, Thave no money. On the Translation into Telugu Of the English Verb to be, 879. . In English the verb to be is used in two ways, namely—(1) As the copula, in which case it stands between the subject and A NOUN or AN ADJECTIVE (or their equivalents) merely to connect the two together, and to state that one is, or is not the other ; as—That is a cow. That is150 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, £TO. not a cow. He is good. He is sick. (2) Not as the copula, in which case it is itself the predicate, and the words which follow it stand in an adverbial relation to it ; as—God exists. There is no bread. He is here. They are in Bunder. First. On the Translation of the Verb to be, when it is not the Copula. 380. When in English the verb fo be is not the copula, it generally either (1) expresses exisTENcE, in which case it is usually introduced idiomati- cally by the word there ; (as—God is, ise., exists—There is no bread)— or (2) is followed by an ADVERB or ADVERBIAL PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE, as—He is here—They are in Bunder. 381, N.B.—By an adverbial prepositional phrase is meant a preposition and its case, standing in the same relation to the verb as an adverb. 382. When in an English sentence the verb to be is not the copula, it must be translated into Telugu, both in the positive and negative, simply by using the verb @oz% or the primary verb, as in the following examples:— EXAMPLES. BHwH GAH. God is, i.e., exists. SR dm, ‘There is no bread. Lit. Bread is not. Q. 8 DHE sorrone Gia? A. BH, Q. Are there any rupees in that box? A. No. (Lit. There are not.) Q. 0998 AT MYyS Avr? A. QU,% Bx, Q. Whore were you yesterday ? A, I was not here, Q. US SdOrws ad yar? A. Bem, or 82% (for Gorse Q. Is he at work? A. No. Lit. He is not. [82%). Q. 8 Dy w0s SHOrS GIT? A, BANS, Q. Are those boys at play? A. Yes. Lit. They are,ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. 151 Q. Ort BH gh Gotrror? Q. Shall you be here to-morrow ? Q. rH Tre espe amryo? Q. Are they in great poverty ? Q. Kot Ponds Gihy or? Q. Is the pot on the fire ? Q. VBth M2 BAe? Q. Where is he? Q. V8 gh. Sa? Q. Is he not here? Q. O° TP GIT? Q. Are you well? Q. BS. OT By Tr? Q. Is the account correct, A. Bota, A. No, Lit. I shall not, A. Gary, A. Yes, Lit. They are. A, 8%, A. No, Lit. Tt is not. A. gt. Sem, A. He is not here. A. Sah, or Be% (for GorSehihoo A. No. Lit. He is not. [&%), A. WT ATYS, A. Tam well. « A. SB" Gaya, A. It is correct. Secondly. On the Translation of the Verb to be, when It Is the Copula. When in an English sentence the verb to be is the copula, i., when it stands between the subject and a noun or an adjective (or their equivalents) merely to connect the two together, and to express that one is or is not the other,—the two following rales must be observed:— 383. Ror I. Where in English the verb to be is placed between the subject and @ noun (or its equivalent), é. of the verb fo be and s noun (ae—That is a cow. where the predicate consists That is not a cow). In colloquial Telugu in the rosrrive no verb is used; as—U8 8%, In the NEGATIVE the tense T° is added ; as—OB BY Te, EXAMPies. UB 7 8D. She is my mother. BH T HD TH, She is not my mother,152 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. 8 Bev. ge od. ‘That is a scorpion. This is a lizard, ©B KOS, Oa? Is that a horse, or a cow ? OB HOo FMS, SH. ‘That is not @ horse, it is a cow. ar Sxspi gdaa? Is your younger brother this very man? OSH Orr Shar? Is he your younger brother? OBS TY? Is that a dog? WS, SH. (Short for OB KH, TS, GA SH. It is not. It is a jackal. ast geo gaia? Is this your house? 384. Rune II. When in English the verb fo be is placed between the subject and an adjective (or its equivalent), i.c., when the predicate consists of the verb to be and an adjective, in Telugu there are two forms of expression as follows:— 385, (A) First. If the sentence has reference to the innate quality or natural condition of the subject, the predicate in Telugu is expressed by a coMPosiTz NoUN; and hence since what is an adjective in English becomes a noun (composite) in Telugu, the sentence follows the same “rales as those given above for’a noun in the predicate. (Para, 383. Thue— waKN sodsres, OB WHA. NE DOT sows8. (Para. 203.) BILS HONEA Teh. SR WIA We. Si BH DOG owsa wes, He is good. She is pretty. This story is interesting. He is not good. She is not pretty. ‘This story is not interesting, It would be.wrong to say SASS aoD or Baws So Aye,ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB to BE, BTC. 153 386. This use of the composite nouns, (or rather of the PRONOMINAL avrixes) in Telugu closely resembles the use in English of the words man, woman, people, one, thing, things, etc, which are frequently added to adjectives expressing innate quality or natural condition. The chief difference is that whereas in sentences of this kind these words may often be omitted in English, the pronominal affixes can never be omitted in Telugu. Thus— SAS SHoDares, He is a good man. OB WDA. She is a pretty woman, Si 8H DOSmowsH. This story is an interesting one. EXaMpLes. Dre SQyares. He is mad. (Or—He is a mad man.) . rt rere Sako Noard, (Para, 204.) ‘They are very passionate. (Or—passionate men.) 8 MBSw ways. That horse is a bad one. DOS Td Ter Ws KOA. A chilly is very hot. (Or—a very hot thing.) sro weer Axarog. They are very poor. (Or—poor people.) 6 Wy view TEA. That snake is a very bad one, 8 Te Moder, That Rajah is a good man. OSD BH rer Sw5OB. His mother is very old. (Or—a very old woman.) & tod Says. That palanquin is green. (Or—a green one.) 20154 oN THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, BIC. © BH wer BAB. ‘That dog is very large. (Or—a very large one.) BBD Ter Od. This cat is very small. (Or—a very small one.) BIOS Weer SosOares, He is very old. (Or—a very old man.) 387. (B) Secondly. If the sentence has reference to the particular state of the subject at a particular time, the predicate in Telugu is expressed both in the positive and negative by the verb dos or the primary verb, preceded by an adverb, i., by an adjective (or a noun used as an adjective) with the ADVERBIAL AFFIX 7 attached to it. In sentences of this kind in English the adjective is genetally used slone, without the addition of any of the words man, woman, people, ete. (Para. 386.) 388, Nore.—The adverbial affix 77 is derived from the infinitive of ©%, namely, ‘5°, and often expresses the meaning of the English words like or as, or the English adverbial termination ly; as—2iexy) bad, esaxy7 badly. Exaupnus. © KSjsoo wey SHB. That horse is sick. OR Wer volnsiswr Bid. She is very weak. SAS Dy TANS S*Ssw7r GOTAS. ‘He was angry with me yesterday. Q. VF OH DOG Sore GS or? A. 8%, Q. Is this story interesting to you? A. No. (Lit, It is not.) Q, TRS Peraio% Ter SAMS T? A. GIT. Q. Are they very kind to you? A. Yes. (Lit, They are.) Q. 8 8H say By or? A. 8%, ive, Baym Bes, Q. Is that cow sick? A. No. (Lit, It is not.)ON THE TLUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BR, BTC. 155 Oe Dy Ter Sips GOB, He was very sorrowful yesterday. Q, BOOS ¥ BS Tone GIT? Q. Ishe sick to-day? A. Bt. (ie., Wromerm Ges.) or St. (i.e, Troon Gos BS.) . A. No, (Lit, He is not sick.) 389. Although the above distinction has been drawn between the use in the ptedicate of (A) a composite noun and (B) the verb to be with adverbial 7, yet in some instances (especially when the subject is neuter) the distinction is very slight, as for instance between the sentences— SUF QOGMowwB—and % FF OOo G8. Practice will soon teach the student which form to use, Few words use both forms; and when they do, the above distinction will be a guide to the student which form to select. Thus—acos Sd%Xeares means—He is a kind man—and expresses natural disposition or innate quality. Sd0*s WAS Sar Sry meams—He is kind to me—and expresses 8 particular condition of mind at a particular time in reference to # parti- cular person, In the same way € X08,s09 1ay)8 means—That horse is a bad cne—but & Mo, tay GayB means—That horse is sick. On Gots preceded by 7 used Impersonally. 390. When animate objects are spoken about,.the verb 60% or the primary verb preceded by an adjective or noun with the affix 77 is often used impersonally, and what would otherwise have been the subject in the nominative is put in the dative case. Thus—instead of saying SIGS Tre Eira SA o—He is very wary—it is also common to say—SROSS Were SASS Gey B— Hit. It is very weary ta him. ‘156 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, BTC. 891. Such impersonal sentences also as the following are very common in Telugu — WH OST 45,8. Ihave a headache. Lit, It is headachy to me. WH DOH? wer WA Gs, A. Iam very feverish. Lit. It is very feverish in my body. 25D BOLT* ANBVxowr BX. He is not better. Lit, It is not better in his body. Changes in the Predicate, when the Subject is in the First or Second Person. 392. The following rules must now be specially attended to, as they form one of the chief peculiarities of Telugu, In Telugu when the predicate consists of a NouN and the subject is @ pronoun of the First or Second person, the noun in the predicate undergoes the following changes:— 398. First. When the subject is 7%, the termination of the noun in the predicate— if it is a, changes t into cy. (Gram, 2%.) if itis D, 5, or “2, adds 2. if it is any other vowel, adds %. Thus— Bw ID Sey. Tam his younger brother. (Gram, sp2i.) Aw GORD. Tams man. Aw DY, Tam a child. 394, Secondly, When the subject is 5%, the termination of the noun in the predicate— if it is &, changes 2 into 3%. if itis D, 5, or “2, adds 9.ON THE TRLUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB 70 BE, ETC; 157 if it is any other vowel, adds %. ‘Thus— DY CSP Sxpay, ‘You are his younger brother, dy mDRO. “You are 8 man, DY O48. ‘You are a child. 395. ‘Thirdly, When the subject is So%to or swabs, the noun in the predicate changes final © of the plural nominative into “*». Thus— “Bosao Cywoms, ‘We are Brahmans. » Bote» SasaHegvssoo, ‘We are men. Sows DGosso, We are children. 396. Fourthly. When the subject is 22-8, the noun in the predicate usually undergoes no change. Thus— Devt Dy yewen, You are Brahmans. Or honorific—You are a Brahman, Qsr8 SAE F OD. You are men. Or honorifie—You are 8 man, Dr Ages. You are children, Or honorific—You are a child, (Para. 172). 397, In grammatical language and sometimes in conversation in the Ouddapah District, when the subject is ®1+8, final \o of the plurah noun in the predicate is changed into “ 05; as—Brwts Wy Srmets. Ye are Brahmans—or—You are a Brahman. 398. The composrrz nouns, when placed in the same position, undergo exactly the same changes as those mentioned above, except in the case of the first and second persons singular feminine, where & is changed respectively into T*My (Gram. TS) and TSS). Thus— Sing. mas, Ba Drsarcty. Tam a poor man. (Gram. Dawes.) by Mgwsy, You are a blind man,158 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, RTC, FEM. Bw Oey wey. Lama young woman, (Gram. Diy SS.) DY W,_Der-s%. You are a pretty woman. Pl. Mas, & FEM. Sotto esas» We are poor people. or Bxsaro¥ so, Beet soft. You are good people, or a good man. 399, In grammatical language and sometimes in conversation in the Cuddapah District, when the subject is 27%, final 38 of the com- posite noan is changed into s°8eo ; as HWS Soarvien. You are good men—or—You are a good man. 490, The Negative of all the above forms is expressed by adding the tense 3%, Thus— Bi Dyyewtsso was. Tam not a Brahman, DY WH, ArH Tey. You (fem.) are not pretty. oss Byosso Trak, We are not children. On the use of 0» before Gow. 401, It has been mentioned (paras. 383 & 385) that in a positive sentence, where in English the verb fo be is the copula, the predicate in Telugu often consists of a noun or composite noun without any verb being expressed. The verb éot% may, however, be expressed in all such sentences, although it is usually omitted (except in certain complex sentences, where its insertion is necessary). But if Goes be used, the noun or composite noun must always take the AFFIx 00 (the past verbal participle of %). It has been already stated (pars. 154) that when certain nouns are used as adjectives they take the affix @oow (the past relatine participle of ©%)); as WowSssowss 39%. Somewhat in the same manner, when in a sentence of the kind now under considerationON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETO. 159 the verb Goth is expressed, the noun or composite noun which precedes Goes must always take theafiz 0%. (Otherwise both Bo and Gots must be entirely omitted.) Thus it would be wrong to say—SdS Sodarth GIy —Gaos Cw Gar; —but we may say—SAOS aoDardion (i.e., HHoNare Won) GN %—GAHS Wy Syretiow Gwe, The usual form, however, would be—ScGs Sofarts, SAG Tyaiyaos, In the same manner we may say—art §SisoXoartow GA S— Bw Kr Widow GiryMH—HY STBKarSsow BIAS. ete. etc., etc. But such expressions are not common. 402. In the same manner when reference is made to past time, the tense GYM or Got3D may be used preceded by Sox (the past verbal participle of ©%) to become), but both are usually omitted. Thus— BB SoSTeovolosts sao Shove sows. He wasa Tahsildar ten years ago. But—S8 SoStydsswoborses saves orbs ‘3%—would be more common. 403. ‘When, however, reference is made to past time, the past tense of ©%) is often used, and when reference is made to future time, the future tense of ©% is always used. Thus— BB SosIVewoloses saews SHYSorvo vomarw. (Neg. -w°S&%.) Ten years ago he became a Tahsildar. (Neg. Had not become.) Bork SoSH Vos* Gasyis THT OPS. (Neg. Tres.) In two years he woill become a Tahsildar. (Neg. He will not become.) 404. In conversation, the simple verb ©% is frequently used in sentences of this kind, instead of the form Wow Gots. Thus— OSes HolarP Goh, Tard WHIM TSay Ao, (osIirES.) If he is lame, he may get a planquin, and come.160 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. Sas cree Si KoarE Giyho Faoserdoary &. (S*axooxoarZisty,) He appears to be a very passionate man. Sas WotR AN ots, © Osan, NAN VYares. (ToBoBsowHws.) As he is very gentle, he let the boy off. OILS PAGS E Gy SyFl, WOH ASS SSP wo. (XG SoHo B IGE.) Although he is very rich, he behaves like a poor man. Ws mBlrHE God, gSHow yr oA Beyvoes? (mgirog ) Being himself a fool, how can he instruct others? Peculiar use of the affix 77. 405. Sometimes a noun signifying a material object (asa king) and somne- times a composite noun takes the adverbial affix 7 before Gods in the predicate; as GAGS Uren Gaye. This form expresses either (1) rimilarity—or—2) doubt, Thus— BALS Trev7e BAN. He is as a Rajah. ic. (1) He is like a Rajah in appearance or in power, although he is not one really—or—(2) He is like a Rajah in appearance, but I do not know for certain if he is a Rajah or not. BEALS Sodarreh7 Gary ch He appears to be a good man. On the difference between Go&¥ and SY, 406. (a) The word eo’ generally has the sense of staying, stopping, dwelling, and is always used regularly, é.e., with the same subject as that of the principal verb.ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. 161 407, (3) The word @¥ always has the sense of being, and is always used absolutely, é.¢., with a different subject from that of the principal verb, Thus— (A) BAHS PFasTDE Gos, gol38 BLT. (Or Gossow.) He did not stay for meals, but went away. Bi Se Seo Bow Koowrsr Gow, Snr BPS ows, To-day the boats did not stay till two o'clock, but went away soon. (B) B Bost Beso Sy, BRsioo crowaras. ‘There being no sale this month, I suffered loss. (i, As I did not effect any sales this month, I suffered loss.) wes ashy SY, wrely wooo CAAT AS Money not being to me (i.e., not having money), I asked him for a loan. WH OF, aor Bow GSH. T have no means of subsistence there. (Lit, Subsistence is without being to me there.) ta Ser Soe Pow Gry so. ‘To-day we are without a punka. On the difference between Go%® and A, 408. The word Go2é0 is generally used in the sense of staying, stopping, dwelling ; but “69 is always used in the sense of being, ice., it always expresses a denial of present existence. Thus— Doth Koboare wast Goto wr80 Bh asa, I shall punish those who do not stop in school till two o'clock. BSBUrT Gos Srrowsio Jowwow SF ryH? Why have you bought meat which will not keep till to-morrow ? werBI? BO SHS err SLOW S008? How can we get an article which is not in the bazaar? 21162 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, BTC. 409. When reference is made to any other time than the present, @o%0 is generally used. ‘Thus— Bi BRST BH Gok gu Be, ‘There is not a house in this village, in which I have not lived. In some cases, however, 89 may be employd as a goss? BO SiAONS wre SFQyAr. He came at a time when I was not at home. 410. After adverbial 7 the word Go%% is always used. When possession is implied, the word 89 is always used. In this sense 89 may generally be translated by the English word without. Thus— DAawsrr GowsDaros Dxg Teh, Learning will not come to those, who are not obedient. DFAS Tdarbs OG ore. Learning will not come to those, who have not an obedient spirit. wh Boars ler SaSKO? How can lame people walk? Lit. People to whom there are not legs. Deductions from previous rules. 411. ‘The subjoined examples are given in illustration of various forms of expression, which are easily deducible from rules already given. By referring to the paragraphs mentioned after each example, the gram- matical construction can be easily understood. BQ VaooTS SUSS¥, vod IB SQyTwS, (Para. 370.) Not being able toroalk on account of fever, I got upon a bandy, and came. Bm Baodo 4d wife der Baorxes? (Para. 370.) How can he do what I cannot do? 8 50 Basdoarow BY Ses, Those who cannot do that work may go away. OSH GB SO Bassoshsow, SY SrGiso Mer Baroy? Or—Bavsrrs. If he cannot do that work, how can you do it?ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. 163 C8 @ So Dovyctounsysl, So Baoros, Although he cannot do that work, I ean do it. BS o 50 Dacdysfonwsoms, dds. GMom BEA Yares. Hasdys sassy. Because I could not do that work, he sent me off without giving me any wages. CH © SD Bad Dory, heard that he could not do that work. Ay 6 50 Daow-ossS, BO. Or—wrod SHavors, If you cannot do that work, go away. 412, BR WNSKY DATswen OAT BS or? Have you any books that I can read ? 8 5D Baoxosrs sv? ‘Who are the people wwho can do that work? Oth FSO BAHXDASSHaom, Boosey. Or— OAT. If he can do that work, he may. Bt BSD BSOxDAssyess, OI’ gAQw, Or—XDAT. Although he can do that work, I will not give it to him. Art Wavy TASNDASLY Oars. DoT? T heard thut you could read Tamil. Is it true?—Or—I hear that you can read Tamil. 413, N.B.—Sometimes the word Xe (as also the tense Xe) when affixed to an infinitive, merely gives it a future signification. Thus the following sentence is often used at the commencement of a letter— Bw Baoro ssd Saob— ‘The request that Iam about to make is as follows— 414. Faosorva Baer Soma y—Or—Waosorss sd, You have not done what you ought to have done.16$ ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. Bw OF,A8 BENo® Gob, Sassari Boras —Or—BIsoww SH Hows, If it be necessary for me to go there, I shall go by boat—Or—If I must go. 6 so BamsSorwsspes, Bay —Or—Waosod Gy Spits. When it is necessary to do it, I will do it. SALS Bs Paso Gio BESO® Siy He¥8, vod gowr Srrrrwseo— Or—BESod Gary. Although he must go this evening, he has not yet bespoken a cart. OSH BESOR Giyiy Oar yA. Or—BYSorayy. Theard that he must go. 415, Baw%orxns Gwomst Dray? Or—dasrwo Sd. Why have you done what you ought not to have done? Baers Baryj—Or—daown so. You have done what you ought not to have done. BH GH TVieo BaswrosKavom, SS Wrws Baosorwwa? Or BoowrwsS. If I must not do it in that manner, how must I do it? AG. Basoys%,_ 3G GR, Sao Srrasiseo? Or—Bavxe,sdna. What is the good of doing a thing, which one need not do. DY BH TSH, SENHsom, Favts SoBsyw. Or—wsy vey as. If you need not come to-morrow, I will send you word. AIT, M4 Otay BEwww Sows, Shoo BAS! ur—sown oh Sows, If it be impossible to go to-day, what shall I do!ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB To BE, ETC. 165 General rule on the use of the tenses S*A% and 8a. 418. The following rule in reference to the use in the negative of the tenses A and 8% will be found useful :— 419, Firat. Where in the positive the verb Goes must be omitted, or if used must be preceded by Wow, the tense S°SS must be used in the negative. Secondly. Where in the positive the verb 60% without wow can be used, the tense Gx must be used in the negative. Thus— ©8 Bo TS. DY Modaraiy wry. That is not a scorpion. ‘You are not a good man. & Ue Moareh Tres. Abii Box Bravo, ‘That Rajah is not a good man. —_ We are not children. Bi NoranwS WOOO Try. These ink-bottles are not good. Q SAH Bye GAT? A. 8%, (Pars. 377.) Q. Has he any children ? A. No, (Lit. There are not.) Q. O98 So esery? (BiyB.) A, Sarr Ba, Q. What is the matter with you? A. Nothing. Q. Sao Ho“y* GIT? A. Be, Q Is he in the house? A. No. (He is not.) Q. Oth tay GAN we? A. Se% or Bs. (Short for Q. Is he sick? A. No, — [Go2%ésseo as.) 8 G8 TPs S&H, ‘There is not a canal to that village. = Bois* goer DsVassore Si, (Para, 391.) aw not yet better. (Lit. It is not yet better in my body.)166 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. ON VARIOUS USES OF PRONOMINAL AFFIXES, WHERE IN ENGLISH THE COPULA IS USED. 420. In the remaining portion of this chapter, examples are given of some of the various ways in which PRONOMINAL AFFIXES (para, 202) are used in the predicate, where in the corresponding English sentence the verb to be is the coPULA. 421. The negative is expressed by adding the tense “S-A6, 422. In some instances the use of the pronominal affixes closely re- sembles the use of the apostrophe (‘s) in English. 423. First. These affixes are commonly used in the following manner :— be & Bigarw? These are people of what country ? Dw gG8,_Aarv Ts, ‘These are not people of this place. BS eovsfoeIarso? What sort of people are they ? 6 BE M,46? Where did that box come from? (Lit. That box is one of what place ? Bi DW § wrBo? This water is that of what well ? (i.e., From what well is this water?) wos |B giosoSST? (Para, 301.) Is the canal water that of this kind ? BOs AW giosol8D Ty. ‘The canal water is not (that) of this kind. Dor ge Densol3A? genxso’3S. Of what kind is your house? One of this kind.ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. 167 Bre sob S sorB? SY SoH, Your palanquin is one of what colour? —_A green one. a sho8 SPH’ wees. ISAS. ‘My patanquin is not a green ono. It is a red one. 424. Secondly. These affixes are frequently used in expressing the force the comparative and superlative degrees of adjectives. (See para. 151.) It has been already stated that Telugu adjectives have no comparative and superlative forms. The force of them is frequently expressed in the following manner :— : COMPARATIVES. DYYoW Tren SOD. ‘Than water milk is good. (i.e., Milk is better than water.) © $BYoW GA sods. ‘This knife is better than that. (Zit. Than that knife this is good.) TAYOR GB sos. This is better than that. TVOW HY soda, These people are better than those. SuPERLATIVES. wi Moeo* 38 soda. Among these horses this is good. (i.e., This is the best of these horses.) Bi Serv SrrwOS SA doh,O srw? (> GSH is understood.) Of these three words which is the most common? DOS GALS HoDdareH, He is the best man amongst them.168 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, ETC. N.B.—Comparatives and superlatives are also sometimes expressed as follows :— TesaS, Hoe ago Hoey) BOD Kowres. (Para, 204.) Of Ramayya and Subbayya Subbayya is clever. (i.e., Subbayyn is more clever than Ramayya.) wih Amos Hxsoas, He is the lowest of the low. 425, Thirdly. ‘These affixes are used to express possession, Thus— Bw rrardésss, or Brady. (Paras, 393 & 398.) Lam yours. (i.e., Your servant.) & Kadri JSR? Lit. That watch is one of whom? (i.e., Whose watch is that?) we. Base, ‘That of me. (i.e. Mine.) ‘Phat of him. (i.e. His.) St DQHYssoew ISO? Whose are these books? Dr Ty. wD. 6 Seed. Not yours. Theirs. ‘That gentleman's. Bi AHI WA BH. drr8. This umbrella is not mine. It is yours. IB w AyirBooo. This knife is my friend's. 426. Fourthly. These affixes are often affixed to posTrositions as follows: Ba Moiiroes JsB KAS Da? ‘This cot is one in whose room? (i.e., Whose room does this cot belong to?) 8 ay, 7 XASTDA Bes. ‘That table is not the one in my room. (i.e., Does not belong to my room.) i Borg T oy OBB, ‘This ink-bottle is the one on my table. (i.r,, Belongs to my table)QM THE TELUGD EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BE, BTC. 169 BP WRS*NO shod WASiinven. ‘Those in my box are good papers. B BY APBD Sdo OK¥aswoov? Those on that table are what books? (i.e., What are those books on that table? & Basta Snoed? ‘That in your hand is what? (i.c., What is that in your hand?) SB BWHFS*OD Fos Hygwr, Toy HyELor? Are those in that tank lilies or lotuses? Qsr GoystDS so dasa? Is that in your house good furniture? TW MbITOD Mesos Wy. These in my bundle ate not mungovs. EXxgucisis. 427. The two following exercises are in the form of conversations. The letter E. represents an Englishman, and the letter N. a native :— N.B.—An English translation is added after each conversation. Conversation I, E. & wre SModaraar? (Paras. 301 & 385.) N, Moda. E, B86 SS By SrBoocoom Saoxoardar? (Para. 204.) N. OG HO GAG ORV WAFSosors Wes. (Para. 321.) E, Sdows Kasref gX% sofaror? Byaror? (Para. 116.) N = GEO SODAS, Boos GW Ire’ SOR 7D wos Xo Wrth rth, SoS? Bass wrere veises Kors. (Para. 206) cE)110 ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT 70, THE VERB.10 BE, ETC. E, Sabot S76~ Boo ors? (Para. 377, note.) : N, eorvs, E, 68958 SBT Sol MSAwew Gyr? (Para. 219.) N, GAGS Ter KY sovev BED, TUS? Hy awoOD. E, 8085 Werrs soNBar? (Para. 385.) N. Grab HOS WP saooo Oya Tw, E, O° WK gSosoSa? N. PK g SoBozsa wos. (BA GOS.) (Paras. B04 & 393.) .) N, Ter BAB TN HRSA Wes. E, 297 geo dénSo'88? (Para. English Translation. E. 1s that Rajah a good man? N. Yes. (Lit. He is » good man.) &, Is he kind to his friends? N. Yes, but he is not » very wealthy man. XE. Are his two sons good men or bad men? N. Both are good. The first is tall, but not stron; a very strong man. (Pare. 237.) he second is 1. How many daughters hus he? N. Foun 15. Has he any good horses ? N. He has many horses. Some of them are good. &, Is his landed property good? N, ‘The soil is good, but the people are not numerous. HE. Are you a rich man? N. No, sit, (Lit. I am not a rich man.) . What kind of house is yours? N. A very lurge one, but not pretty one.ON THE TELUGU EQUIVALENT TO THE VERB TO BF, ETC. 171 Conversation II. E, O70 JSpHT worst SerrtorrD fordaror? (Para, 214.) N, Soraaras, FR, wod% sod) Sgdor (Paras. 301 & 383.) N. OFS, 008. (Para. 321.) E, Joe Be? N, Dxooo aww OF os Gy D. (Para. 387.) EB. Sesto )éoossotsa? N. O82, Ter HOF, (Para, 218.) BE, Beso Krvrraseo IW, sso SHO? N, Be Toth SyswsGod So. Fi, Bt Seow Sees Sor Wosar? N, Tose BID Xow Sores WeIO. (Paras. 980 & 382.) E, S2ivo Wy Kobo Bos Awaso? N, MSI Tor Nobso% TO Sarreés Koodo 7 Bos Asso, BE, Jot BS Tress Hoiixoo Ga? (Paras. 340 & 382.) N. © SSSe PSVTYD KY srt Td ELST aiOAdyWs, F, GOB 2eFol88 dos Haiy~osrss? [ (Para, 425.) N. OB Sra a8 BLS ws, (BDAT;L understood.) Fi. Od, SUSomro% worvews Hwy soso? BF wo¥ wows Ao I Spa? N, APs Govt VVernes Hiwysoler¥, MD avasyeso Soars err DMs ors,172 2p AB An Ze 2B Ze 2h 2m 25 2B zeown ON THE TRLUGU RQUIVALENT TO THR VERB TO BR, RTC. Sesser S srrvahoes* Bays? (Para, 306.) * a Srrssvd*S. (Pare. 300 (2).) gBs0m Baro? g's Bdyor? GASSES BRT, English translation. . Have you ever seen Masulipatam or Ellore? . Yes. (Lit. I have seen them.) . Is Masulipatam a nice town? Yes. It is a nice one. Why? The streets are very broad. ‘What sort of town is Ellore? (Lét. Ellore is one of what kind?) ‘That too is very nice. ‘Whence do vegetables come to Bezwadah? They come from these two towns, é.c., Masulipatam and Ellore. Do the goods from these towns arrive quickly? ‘There are oanals, and therefore they do arrive quickly. At what hour do the boats start ? . They atart about two or three o'clock ? Why is there no limit of time? ‘Those boats belong to bankers, and therefore they do as they like. How much (passage money) do they take per man? ‘That also they manage as they like. Do all the boatmen take one rate, or according as they like? Commonly all take one rate, but sometimes on rivalry they take an anna. In what month do they put on the boats? (i.e., on the canal.) . In this month. . Have they already put them on? or will they hereafter put them on? ‘They have already put them on. ——>>e«e—__ON DRFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. 173 CHAPTER XII. ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ON COMPOUND TENSES, AND ON CERTAIN AUXILIARIES. I, ON DEFECTIVE VERBS. 428. In Telugu, as in other languages, some verbs are defective, i.e, they are only used in certain parts. A few of these verbs will now be explained. (1) On the verb Yeor, 429. The verb Year to accrue is conjugated throughout all parts both in the positive and in the negative. But (except when used as an auxili- ary; see para, 460) it is generally used in the third person only. Firat. This verb is usually preceded by a dative case, expressed or understood; and may then be generally translated into English by the verb to get. Thas— SYP shore OQr~ Wier erates Yoorososy o>? Is much profit accruing to:you by trade? (i.e, Are you getting much profit by trade). Ques, BIN NE soo VOAST? Ans, Sox8&, Did misfortune accrue to him? It did not accrue. ie., Did he meet with misfortune? No. 431. Secondly. With a subject in the masculine or feminine gender the verb SeoX> has almost the same meaning as $f. Thus— Ques, DS_e3 AWS Gok LVONrrvorss YOAD AT? ‘Was a son born to her yesterday?174 ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, RTC. Ans, BES Wts LOXSS, GB VOASB. A con was not born, but a daughter. WSDE Jow SOB Mexirr¥h FOAM? How many sons have been born to him?—or—How many sons hes he got ? N.B.—In this sense ¥@oX is sometimes used in the first or arcond person. 482. Thirdly. In addition to the regular parts of this verb, from the root ¥e0% is also formed a positive irregular indefinite tense, which is occasionally used instead of the tenses A) % and Goé8D. It can never be used as the copuLA. (Para. 379.) Connected with this irregular tense, there is also an irregular rela- tive participle, namely Xe, which will be explained hereafter. ‘The parte of this tense in commion use (except when used as an auziliary), are as follows :-— (Mas. Yew, He is, or was. Sing. 8. ; [Fem & New. ¥Ye2%, or 8%. She or it is, or was. on (Mas. Fem, Yow. They are, or were. * [Neu. Sow, ‘They (neu,) are, or were. Exawrces. SrUGea BT Seyihves* VY Tear Fors, Formerly in a certain town there was a king. Ques, SASS HS Goo Foor? Ans, 8S. Has he any danghters ? No. Lit. Are daughters to him? There are not. ak ravB Vw, ‘There is a certain proverh,ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ECT. 175 Ques, TBE DIS Sonossis FE? Is there any relationship between you and them ? Ans, Sowo%ss S&. No. (Lit. There is no relationship.) 433. Fourthly. The word §&% is often used in connexion with a verbal noun, in which case the expression denotes a continuous habit. Thus— Ques, TH Dow SBowr gsssos SE? Are they in the habit of giving you anything? Lit. 1s there their giving anything to you? Ana, WSp AMipeiero GICs Gk TN GS pA spto KrjBor MBRT Gagan x. ‘They never give me any money; but they ure in the habit of sometimes giving me curry or buttermilk. 434. Fifthly. The past tense and the irregular indefinite tense are used (as will hereafter be explained) as auxiliaries to express ability. In this case they are always attached to the infinitive mood of some other verb, and initial § is changed into X. When used in this manner, these tenses ae declined throughout as follows :— Past tense. Indof. tense. Sing. 1. NOR. (or) KORBD. Kew, 2 KOR. ——-NORBD. Kew. XbA. Ket. XORs. News. Plo. XORwriie, ——- XORBD. News, a XORw, KORG. evs. (a. dev, XORarDS. KORE. Kens, (x XORSD. KOK. Koy.476 ON DEKECTIVE VEBBE, ETC. (2) On the verb. Ses. 435. ‘The verb Sess has only the following parts in common use— Past verb. partic. Son, Past rel. partic. Sons, Past tense sing. 3rd per. SBI, or SOWA. Indefinite tense. Seasons, Neg. indef, tense sing. 3rd per. xB. 436, First. ‘The most common use of this verb is as an auxiliary, to ex- press the English tense must. ‘This is explained hereafter. 437. Secondly. This verb preceded by “5° (the infinitive of W%) is used with a dative case to express the English verb to want dr to require. Thus— Wh Foss WSS. I want a pen. SAN GF TSS. He wants a cow. 438. The negative of this is expressed by ©8,S 82%, and in the Cuddapah District also by “T>n432%. The word 05,5 means need, and therefore #8).5 G% literally means—There is no need. 1t is used impersonally, and does not alter whatever the subject may be. Thus— WH Sos O85 BH, (Cud. or 509432.) 1 do not want a pen. SASS B OST 08,5 SH. ‘He does not want those books. 439. Sometimes also in familiar conversation the negative is expressed by 8% with a dative case. ‘Thus— 8 TAB ND TH Si. I do not want those papers. Dr Gy io TSG, Sw? (Cud. or rake.) Do you want any rive, ar not?ON’ DRFRCTIVE VERBS FTC. 197. (3) On the verb BOas. 440, The verb BOasw fo be known is conjugated throughout all parts, but is commonly used only with a neuter subject in the third person. It is nsnally preceded by a dative case, expressed or understood. ‘The following examples will explain its use : Q. BSD Quo Dr~% Boos? A. BOs, Do you know his house? No. Lit. Ishis house known to you? ~—_—It is not known, Q. TH Srroo0 VINE BORSar? A. BOaH se. Does he understand my words? No. Lit, Were my words known to ‘They were not known, him? dS SH BwBssorwa, Boawer? ‘You must start to-morrow. Do you understand? From the above examples it'will be seen that where in English we use a present tense and say—Do you understand? in Telugu they use the past tense and say—O8% BORSz>? In the same manner where in English we usually say—Do you ace ? (in the sense of—Do you under- stand ?) in Telugu they say—So~OD0°T~? Did you nee 7 N.B.—In Telugu when speaking of being acquainted with any person, the indefinite tense of the verb &% is generally used. Thus— SANA )owsoor? AHMAD. DOK. Do you know him? Yes, No. (4) On other Defective Verbs. 441. ‘The following examples illustrate the use of a few other defective verbs :— Ady XBOD D8 Sao S*Ky08? What do you think about it? (Lit. What is thought to you?) Fr Sawdy I*sde, T have not thought anything about it. 23178 ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. RYVHwiy, AMY BOs Jos rahy S7roAG Hoos? How much money do you obtain a month by trade? (Lit, Is obtained to you.) WIDE SOD airwxsrwite STOESA, He obtained a nice prize. GOSSH B Oe Os SYS Wer GSTS. ‘That hoy has not yet acquired a good hand. i BOT? GO Kobo Bywrwéhood, This month it dawns at six o'clock. Il. ON COMPOUND TENSES. 442. In addition to the varions tenses given in chapter VII there are also certain compound tenses, which will now be explained. (1) Strongly marked Positive Progressive Present Tense. 443, —_In order to mark progressive present time very strongly, the primary tense is sometimes separated from the present verbal participle, which in this case generally lengthens its final vowel. ‘Thus—instead of saying Se WH ST, we may say VSM WHHS Gym. The present participle, when thus written separately, sometimes takes emphatic 7 to express a continuous action. Thus— VKH Go WHHHS Grye. He is still reading on—or—He is still continuing to read. (2) Progressive Future Tense. 444. By prefixing the present verbal participle of any verb to the tense Gots, a positive progressive future tense is formed. Thus— Sth _iyt Tyo Ty Kote KY Moti ox BO Bod. He will be taking his bath now, so wait a little, and then go (to him).ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, uTC. 179 ‘The negative of this may be expressed by prefixing a present verbal participle to the negative tense Gouss, Thus— SAL GS pth Ty Nie Ti Gotu KAY BKod. He will not be bathing now, so go (to him) now. (3) Future Perfect Tense. 445, By prefixing the past verbal participle of any verb to the tense Gots-A a positive future perfect tense is formed. Thus— S Sd GASH BY dotre, By this time he will have done that work. ‘The negative of this tense may be expressed by prefixing a past verbal participle to the tense Gods. Thus— Si PS dm OHS BS Gorse, He will not have arrived there by this time, (4) Compound forms of the Indefinite Tense. 446. Two positive compound tenses are formed by prefixing the present and past verbal participles of any verb to the tense Got, These are sometimes used in the place of the two last-mentioned tenses. Emphatic is often affixed to the past verbal participle, when thus used. ‘Thus— Si TB Sass Bev isto sora, He would be starting by this time. (Or—will be starting.) SIGS St Ta wAB BY Gossas. He would have gone to school by this time. (Or—will have gone.) (5) Perfect or Pluperfect Tense. 447. Instead of the simple past tense, the tense GA%y.49 or Goe8D, pre- ceded by the past verbul purticiple of any verb, is yomctimes used as a180 QN DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. strongly marked perfect or pluperfect tense. When thus used, emphatic ~ is sometimes affixed to the past verbal participle. 'Thus— wrt SQ) EMH (or Godd)—or—awrts SH) aA (or 4088). "They bave come—or—They had come. (6) Imperfect Tense. 448. By prefixing the present verbal participle of uny verb to the tense Got32, an imperfect tense is formed. Thus— AWB ASST G DLFswo Wag eos3D. All yesterday I was reading that book. 449. In the Northern Circars instead of G08 the tense G70 (the contracted form of 0&7) is generally used to form the imperfect tense, so that the imperfect tense has exactly the same form as the strongly marked progressive present tener. Thus the above sentence would in the Northern Circars be as follows— RWB ASMOT GS DyVsio WeGHBo Gary s. All day yesterday I was reading that book. When the latter mentioned form of the imperfect tense is used, the context will always make the meaning clear. And when translating from English into ‘Telugu, the student to prevent confusion can use the form with 089. In Telugu the imperfect tense is only vsed when it is required to ex- press—that the action spoken of, although ultimately completed in: past time, yet was at the time referred to in the sentence in process uf per- formance, and not a completed action ‘Thus, in answer to the question—Ihen you saw him, what was he doing? We might reply—SdS% 2¥ 60887 xrvtrmaio GOB. (Northern Circars Sxeex~tio G3 Ho.) —He wus talking to some one. So again in the sentence—ds I was guiny along yesterday, some stranger was talking with you. Who was he? the latter part of the sentence would be expressed us follows—ar-8* a 87S sDi Nrrtqrehstho GOB. GAGE ISL? (Nor. Cir. Srrbrrehiho GT 2.)ON, DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. 181 450. The negative imperfect tense is expressed by prefixing the present participle to &ic&S2%. Thus in the sentence—When you came yester- day, I icas not taking a bath—the latter part would be expressed in ‘Telugu as follows—Sw% (Ay) Ary Ws Bike Gowda. 451. In the Northern Circars the tense formed by pretixing the positive verbal noun to S&% is also used to express the negative imperfect tense. ‘Thus, instead of the above we might say—SA (Oy) Any Silos Hes Bao. (See paras. 349, 350.) (7) Continuous Imperfect. ‘The English tense formed by prefixing the words—have been—to the present participle (e.g., Ihavé been making) expresses —that the action spoken of oas commenced in past time, and has been in continuance up to the present time. ‘To express the same meaning in Telugu the progres- sive present tense is used. ‘Thus— : Arte GAwIS™ Joy Pod Aysratw Pir 06? How long have you been enjoying a friondship with him? (Lit. From how many days are you making friendship with him?) BY WoSTVeooiwod GANS Ay shraoo Tahary <0, I have been enjoying a friendship with him for a year. (Lit. From a year I am enjoying.) BBE Ro Swerod SémrO Biya. ‘The hot wind has been blowing from a month to day. Ill. ON CERTAIN AUXILIARIES. On the Use of the Auxiliary Sty to express permission, rendered in English by the Auxiliary may. 453. ‘The ausiliary may, expressing Permission, is rendered in Telugu by aftixing the auxiliary S%%y*% (The third person singular neuter of the positive indefinite tense of Sty. See para. 320.) to the infinitive of182 ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. any verb, Sty% when thus used is impersonal, and never changes whatever the subject may be, ‘Thus— Byron \rBrraho BSS Sys. Brahmans may eat vegetables. Deserts STAD ST"? May a poor man steal? dt BH TSBE TMs. He may come to me to-morrow. Aw BH SD Wdostg)T? May I do that work to-morrow? 8 Oe 08 ST, SRST? May the tailor sew my coat to day? AY Wargo. You may go. - On the Use of the Auxiliary 58a and So%s8 to express necessity, rendered in English by the Auxiliary must or ought. 454. The auxiliary must or ought, expressing NEcEssITy, is rendered in ‘Telugu by afixing the auxiliaries SBa or SORE (From Sock, See para. 436.) to the infinitive of any verb. These words are imper- sonal, and do not alter whatever the subject may be. Thus— Sia SW TPSos,o' S*ad eowSoRss, We mutt be obedient to our parents. OTOL GPST OS Tasssro. ‘We must do a return-kindness for kindness—(i.c., We must do kindness in return for kindness). ast BH 5A Kobo WSS, You must come to-morrow at ten o'clock. Vt SH ve GHOE BPSodwA, He must go to that village to-morrow.ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. 183 On the use of the Auxillaries Krvzsz%, Tt, and SX to express prohibition, rendered In English by the Auxiliary must not or ought not. 455. The auxiliary must not, or ought not, expressing PROHIBITION, is rendered in Telugu by affixing the auxiliary So~25&% to the infinitive of any verb. (S9*22% is the negative indefinite tense singular third person neuter of Sows to agree.) It is used impersonally, and means— Te does not agree or fit, i.e., It is not suitable or fitting. 456, Instead of So~tét% the word D2 may not (the third person neuter singular of the negative indefinite tense of Sty) is occasionally used. ‘oe when thus used is impersonal. Thus— STAD Sor. (Or TS.) ‘We must not steal. * Bbc OH_A8 BE rz. (Or 7%.) ‘He must not go there. DY wer Baw Krewe. (Or Tre.) You must not do so. (Or You ought not to do so.) 457. Instead of Srv2ie% or TS the auxiliary S26 (the third person singular neuter of the negative indefinite tense of Sed, see para. 435) is often used, but it is only common when the subject is in the second person. When thus used, S%> gives to the infinitive to which it is attached the force of a negative imperative, and may be rendered in English by the words—do not, or don’t. This form is in fact more fre- quently used than the regular form of the negative imperative in 8 and No&. (See para. 353.) Thus— DS GAs Testy. Do not come here. Orr G TAS SOS Sy AoSKOS, Please do not write on that paper.184 ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. Wes Saas, Do not shout. S085 DWRSH. Do not bother. Bt SOKB GAENS™ BSH, Do not tell this matter to him. 458, Sometimes however S&H is used, when the subject is in the first or third person. This is most common in questions. Thus— Q. SASS & EVs SOS SEP? A. US SN. Ought he not to read that letter? No. Lit. He ought not to read. Q. Sass BESA? A. BESS. ‘Must he not go? No, Lit, He'muet not go. Q. Bae wre? A, THA, Must T not come? Yes, you may come. A beginner had better use 2% when the subject is in the second person only. ; On the use of the words ©8882 to express the English Auxiliary need not. 459. The auxiliary need not, expressing that the doing of something is UNNECESSARY, is rendered in Telugu by affixing to the infinitive of any verb the words ©8582. (See para. 438.) Since 8,882 begins with a vowel, the letter 5 is always attached to the preceding infinitive. Thus— DH TSYTSH, (i.e. DIS THT OVS.) You need not come. Sachs BYSY, SSM. He need not go.ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. 185 On the use of the Auxiliaries Xex and XOAT=A (or XOABD) to express ability, rendered in English by the Auxiliaries can and could. 460. To express aniuiy in present time, rendered in English by the tense I can, or Iam able the tense Xow (Para. 434) is affixed to the infinitive of any verb. Thus— Bw He Kos, I can sing—or—I am able to sing. dS 6 SO BasKom? Can you do that work? SoS Tr Sy ASKow, He can write well. Sou By IH_Kow. ‘Monkeys can climb trees. . 461. To express abrLtry in past time, expressed in English by the tense I could, or I was able, the tense XOAW**% or XOABA (See para. 434) is added to the infinitive of any verb. Thus— Riiy GSP VOB Ba XOAT? Could he do all that work yesterday? (or—Was he able to do.) Dot 6 Fo% Serr dY_NDAT? How were you able to get up that hill? . N.B.—The form with the past tense is not very often used in Telugu. On the use of the Auxiliaries 3x and Byaonaa (or SBA) to express inability, rendered in English by the Auxiliaries cannot and could not. 462. ‘To express 1Nantziry in present time, rendered in English by the tense I cannot, or Iam not able, the tense 8% (See para. 342) is affixed to the infinitive of any verb, Thus— Awe sisda. I cannot walk—or—I am not able to walk. py186 ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, RTC. by o so testa? Cannot you do that work? Sass IP ay coss, He cannot write well. SBy00 Ty Is_Sy,. Dogs cannot climb trees. N.B.—The learner must be careful not to confuse the use of the tense 83% expressing INABILITY with the ordinary negative past tense, formed by affixing S&% to the infinitive of any verb (See para. 351). The only case in which any ambiguity can’arise is, when the verb expressing 1NaBILtTy is put in the third person neuter or feminine. In this case there is nothing but the context to distinguish it from the negative past tense. Thus—es 88, 6 A 28, Se%—may mean—That dog cannot mount that wall—or—That dog did not mount that wall, To avoid this ambiguity, in the third person singular feminine and neuter the word Aves or Wee (See para. 465) is generally used to express INABILITY. Thus—s 6%, 6 ATE IYO, That dog cannot mount that wall, In all other cases there will be no ambiguity. Thus—sas ov da always means—He did not come—and saw 0*St% always means—He cannot come, Si weS% always means—I did not sing—and Bx weds always means—I cannot sing. 463. To express INABILITY in past time, expressed in English by the tense I could not, or I was not able, 88 is affixed to the infinitive of any verb, and the tense S®oow*s or 38D added. Thus— Diy 8 SA Bas Sowa. (Or IBD.) T could not do that work yesterday.ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. 187 TAB AFG, WSySY soso. (Or Ios.) He could not give an answer to it. © GASsio sesTd¥ sonar. (Or fond.) ‘They could not read that letter. On the use of the Auxiliaries Siw, Sia, wrest, and Tes, 464. Instead of the tense XA the tenses SOQ% and Wreodao (the positive indefinite tenses of “Sey and 70>) are occasionally used to express aBiLiTy, Thu VSH 8 50 Wire Basso? Can he do that work well? (., Is he able to do?) 465. Instead of the tense B% the tenses Bab and wow (the negative indefinite tenses of SQ) and wes) are frequently used to express inability. Thus— SH © OY SYAourVm, ‘He cannot write that petition. (i.¢., He is not able.) © SY KAS Decrees, That dog cannot climb the wall. ws 6 Kd Baodees, They cannot do that work. On the use of the words Sys, or Soda. 466. The word Sy, is » noun signifying means. Hence the expression SyTe or SyS% signifies—There is no means, i.e., It is not possible— or—It is impossible. This expression, therefore, does not imply inability on the part of the subject but some want of means, é., impossibility arising from external causes. When preceded by an infinitive, Sy¥-es or Sy Se is used as follows : 09,28 SSywres, Itis impossible to go there.188 ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC. Instead of the infinitive mood the dative case of the verbal noun ie generally used. (See next chapter.) Thus— 08,28 Bsa Sys. (Or SYS.) It is impossible to go there. SeSeoo ONy GBSTE BooBoso Kwy we ster rena SOT, All the boats have already started, and so it is impossible to go to-day. Instead of Ses" the words Sets are sometimes used. Thus— S OAPs TA We AHF Hr _aCwws Syste. (Or Sys). That book is not mine, and therefore it is impossible for me to give it to you. On the use of the Verb Ht to express ability and inability. 467. — The simple verb ©Sé is seated used to express ABILITY and INaBILity. Thus— © 9 HBS VFsoow? (Or SS.) Can you do that work? (Lit. Will that work become by you?) 6 Sd TUS WH, (Or TY.) I cannot do that work. (Lit. That work will not become by me.) 468. ‘The following remarks will be found useful :— In English can and cannot are sometimes used to express PER- ‘MISSION and PROHIBITION. Thus— ‘You can come into this room, but you cannot go into that room, In Telugu this must be rendered not by Xoad and 8, but by verbs meaning may and may not or must not, as— Devt Bi KASS Orstyys 7A & KATE BY eras SyTs,ON DEFECTIVE VERBS, ETC: 189 The following exercises illustrate the use of the auxiliaries :— Servant. Master. Servant. Master. Sercant, Master. Servant, Master. Cartmen. Master. Cartmen. Master. Cartmen. Master. Oartmen, Master. Oartmen, Cartmen. Master. Cartmen, Master. Cartmen. Master. Cartmen Master. Oartmen, Exercise I. wOdsrg, FEO BY, Ripe we ay SY Saws wyyo? SSaHae, FHoo ward6er® HSSOWS. Boi wows SST? Bors SSS. VES Tress. Sir, there are no sticks. May the waterman cut down this tree? ‘He must not cut (it) down. You must buy sticks in the Bazaar. May I buy two bandies? (ie., Bandy loads.) Do not buy two. One is enough. Exercise Il. Boro BH Von’ Novos WSBT? Bow Koso THYTSM, Sx Kook wesoWws, AQy wos T°SBIa? Both TSH. ONE, Dor TSIM Weer DH. Tosh oA Drres Why Sass, HONG. srw wosarw WHSsywr? RWESio, Tors WSS, SHOOK. Treo Tessyyss, Dao, SazRod. Must we come to-morrow at five o'clock? You need not come at five o'clock. You must come at seven o'clock. . How many carts must come, sir? ‘Two. Sir, your baggage is a great weight. We could not put it on two carts. Very well. Can you put it on three carts ? . We can't, sir, four are needed. Very well. Four may come. Your pleasure. We will come, sir.190 ON DEFKCTIVE VERBS, BTC. Exercise II. Munshi, 3x9 SH SPOE Xobok weassgyar? Master. JOSH? BERS WIN GH Kobow T°sorwss. Munshi. SH BS TB SoopgBos SO VV GB NAY Gd Master. Munshi. Master. Munshi. Master. Munshi. Master. Munshi. Master. Kobvot TST SUT, SHS Kobo we Ww Bas BaHogod. HONB. Voy GU;A TD STA Nobow TSH, Tos Kobo sod, Difsw. Bx VoP Disysotrras. MONA. WOH HiyP*soyys. May I come to-morrow at nine o'clock ? ‘Why? You must come as usual at six o'clock. ‘To-morrow morning I have a particular business, and so I can- not come at six o'clock, sir. Please give me leave till nine o'clock. c Very well. I will give you leave; but do not come at nine o'clock, come at two o'clock. Your pleasure. I will take leave (i.e., I will go). ‘Very well. You may tike leave (i.c., You may go). —d€<—__ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 191 CHAPTER XIill. ON VERBAL NOUNS, THE INFINITIVE MOOD, AND VERBAL PARTICIPLES, I. ON VERBAL NOUNS. On the Forms of Verbat Nouns. 469. ‘The positive verbal noun has two forms, one in , as—S*¥e> the going, and another in 2a, as—2*sseéaSo the going. Both have exactly the same meaning and use. The former is the GRAMMATICAL FoRM, and is declined like a noun of the third declension. ‘The latter is the common Form, and is declined like a noun of the second declension. Thus— N. SH. Sasebaso, G. THe. sesso, D. Sow. SAWS, or Awk, or WN, or TAS, 0. Sixjeoa. —- Dasesssonao, 470. The negative verbal noun is formed, as has been already stated (para. 347), by prefixing the negative past verbal participle to S*asdsss. (or S*yjts) s as—S7HN Saszssh00 the not striking. On the Translation into English of Telugu Verbal Nouns. 471. In English a verbal noun (or—as it is sometimes called—a Partici- pial noun) governs the same case or cases as the verb of which it forms a part; but the noun which would have been the subject in the nomina- tive case if the finite verb had been used, stands in the POSSESSIVE OR GENITIVE case when the verbal noun is used. Thus with the finite verb ‘we say—You wrote that letter—but with the verbal noun—rour writing that letter is not good.199 ON- VERBAL NOUNS, BTC, In Telugu a verbal noun not only governs the same case or cases as the verb of which it forms a part, but it also takes a subject in THE NOMINATIVE case, Thus— Dw & EUs Ty Aoiise SoNA Tes. Lit. You writing that letter is not good, i.e, (according to English idiom) your writing that letter is not good. Dr G OHYabo WSs SO wraH,’ ‘Your reading that book is no use. (Lit. You reading that book does not come to work.) Orr TH S: srsp GSA Sehthe0 wise OA Ysosorr GHA, Your not giving me that money is very unjust. (Lit, You not giving to me that money is very unjust.) On the Case of a Verba! Noun, 472. ‘The case in which the verbal noun iteelf is placed deperide upon the construction of the sentence in which it ocours. It may be used in any case, and take any of the postpositions as affixes. ‘Thus— Rr & Gore Wr dors voxser? Is your writing those letters finished ? i.e.; Have you, finished writing those letters? BAILS Daidiso sper Dao? (See para. 298.) Have you ever heard his singing? SIHS Hoos Wossiroos® arerr XQare. He is a great man at killing tigers. On a Succession of Verbal Nouns. 473. When in an English sentence two or more verbal nouns are con- nected by the conjunction and or but, in Telugu a similar construction is used; but if the verbal nouns have all the same subject, then all, except the last, may be expressed by past verbal participles. Thus— Your not giving that boy the book, but abusing and beating him is great injustice. Orr G DTDs G OLViwo gayya*sasmag, Gr Byes Hiody, SHBossy witw ATYAoss,ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. i93 But as all the verbal nouns in the above sentence have the same subject, it might also be expressed as follows— Bets G Dey TOs © DAS GAY, Tr Bi, STy;Vsahw wiiwe Argaoo, Lit. Your not having given that book to that boy, (and) moreover having abused him, beating (him) is great injustice. On the use of Verbal Nouns with the Postposition &*, 474. When the postposition &* followed by emphatic is added to a verbal noun, it has the force of the English expression—as soon as. Thus— Bas KOT Ses, B Oey 08) DEAT Ons, As soon as he sat down on it, that little chair broke. (Lit. Together with his sitting down upon it.) BH BY sd", vowros Basoma, As soon as I went, all went off. OB OSzssI7S, GB Osa, Boda, As soon as I heard it, I punished the boy. N.B.—The past verbal participle emphasized is sometimes prefixed to the verbal noun, when thus used, without altering the meaning. ‘Thus— SdH SATS, worrtos BPS ora ws, ‘As soon as he came, all went away. On the use of a Verbal Noun with the Postposition ap or $3. 475, When the postposition ©, (or 78) is added to a verbal noun, it generally expresses the cavise of the action described by the principal verb, Thus— 8 BLN SBS HO Saoesmosy VO War S-AWd, By watering those trees every day, they have bloomed well. 25194 476. ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC, Art BAIS BSywswwsiy TH © ATEN oosey By your speaking to him, I got that situation. DAs CORRS TSS osy © Oya Mods, I punished that boy on account of his eoming late to school. On the use of the Dative Case of a Verbal Noun. ‘The dative case of a Telugu verbal noun may as a general rule be regarded as equivalent to, and translatable by the English infinitive. ‘Hence it is the form most commonly used to express the purpore of the action described by the principal verb. ‘Thus— 477. BIOS 8 SD Baars Naxos, He is a man able to do that work. OR, AB BYNH wre gKaw 8m, Ihave no desire to go there. SH ASovs* & SO Dasma STs, It is not possible to do that work in six days. Sth G SD Waoarst saygBowdas. He did not consent fo do that work. Aw noxswr BEAN vod SrerAarar? Have you bespoken a bandy for me fo go to Bunder? (Purpose.) © WR BwEra oesarwst |G sordrom gaz, I will give you a rapee to bring that box. (Purpore.) Il. ON THE INFINITIVE MOOD. On the ordinary uses of the Infinitive in Telugu. The Telugu infinitive mood (e.g.. 8743, SOS, Se%,) is not 50 frequently used in common conversation as the English infinitive mood € to strike, to write, to walk), It is seldom used except in the follow- ing instances— First, To form a compound verb, og., S%8by to strike down, XS to strike in, SSBB to lift up, eterON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 195 Secondly. To form a compound tense with such word as—Si%y*%, SSH, SORA, orth, Tre, SA, 08, SS, Kas, av, ete, Thus— ar doseyy%, TSSH, BESORSA, etc., ete. Thirdly. As a gerund following certain verbs, ¢g., Svots, GX), Sdofows, &, ete. Thus— Sno Bao Soodsy? (Or Dasa.) ‘What have you thought to do? Bay TNO? Will you allow me to come? O8% BSP BasrvsoPodarm. (Or Waoarwes.) ‘He has begun to do that work. 478. | Nore—1. When the verb which follows the infinitive begins with a vowel, the letter S is added to the infinitive as in the last two examples. 479. Note—2. The verb DO) is considered as one word, and hence governs an objective case. Hence also we could not sayy O>SarwH gazor?—but Ba esas (3) Woy Garo? Will you give me ‘permission lo come! 480. Sometimes the infinitive with emphatic 7 is prefixed to a verb, to give empuasts. The tense 8% takes the prefix OS. Thus— ArH Sshob, TH Sze. If you tell him to come, he will certainly come. Bi Soria? sesso Pare SS dam, In this world a sinless man does not exist. 481. Occasionally the aftix 000 is attached to the infinitive, and the verb Gow added. This form expresses READINESS; as T° & SD: Son GH, He is ready to do that work, When thus used, S is added to the infinitive.196 ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 482, The word Sew why is often attached as an affix to the infinitive mood, Thus instead of saying Dx 6 SD Go Day? we may say AY © SA Wosde? When thus used, 5 is added to the infinitive. The following is a common expression—crow MOX8v, oo Sasso? Se when used in this way either states a suppositious case or asks a question as toa habit. It is not used of a single definite action. On the Translation into Telugu of the English Infinitive. 483. When in an English sentence the infinitive mood stands as the supsgct to the verb fo be, it must be translated into Telugu by the nominative case of the verbal noun. ‘Vhus— ‘To take that money is not just—or—It is not just to take that money. i 6 ray wy PA* sesso WHAoI9 Tes, (Lit, Taking that money is not justice.) : To lie is sin. nso sedis srsso, (Lit. Lying is sin.) ' 484. The English infinitive sometimes follows the verb fo tell, or some verb of a kindred meaning, e.g., He told me to go. In Telugu this sen- tence would be expressed as follows—He told me—“go.” Such sentences will be explained hereafter. 485. In many instances the English infinitive is used idiomatically, e.g., Iheard the dog (to) bark. Such sentences may generally be translated into Telugu by using the verbal noun, eg., S8,. Twos» DAS. I heard the dog barking. 496. In all other instances (except those mentioned above) the English infinitive may in common conversation be translated into Telugu by THE, DATIVE CASE OF THE VERBAL Noun. (See para, 476.) Thus— BOSON BETAS vod Sryrdwras, I have bespoken a cart to go to Bunder.ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 197 8 SD Hosmst Th Bovdde, Thave not leisure to do that work. III, ON VERBAL PARTICIPLES. On the forms of Verbal Participles. 487. There are three verbal participles as follows— Positive present, eg., Sp, By, g%. Verbal partic.) Do. past, eg, S783, Uy GQ Negative past, 6.9. S238, Boas¥, gage. 488, Tux Paesenr Versa Particirce is sometimes lengthened either by changing © into v~ or by adding Sy; as—Sbio, or Spar, or S"pp@oay. ‘The latter form must not be confused with §"b8osy , the progressive present relative participle, 489, The letter is sometimes added to the present verbal participle to express emphasis. Thus— BIS GOT SWHYHTS GI so. (See para. 443.) ‘He is still continuing to read. 490. When emphatic ® ie thus added to the present verbal participle, it sometimes has the force of the English expression—as soon as. ‘Thus— Premios Pips, Saws. (Or Boos.) He came, as soon as he had taken his food. OB Dobrw-S Dsyarch Moos, (Or OSt5*A.) As soon as I heard it, I punished the boy. Whoreas the verbal noun with &% (See pars, 474) can be used in any sentence to express as soon as, the present verbal participle can only be used, with the same subject as that of the principal verb. Hence it could not be used in the following sentence—Ar BESS *S, wots Hm Gos owe,198 ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 491. Tue Past Verba ParrictrLe sometimes takes the affix 2) (¢. Qy2), and then has the force of the English expression—although. Instead of affixing 2, the final D is sometimes lengthened, ¢g., 2). (The English expression although is, however, more commonly translated into Telugu by another form, which will be explained hereafter.) ‘Thus— GAGS Hi GIO SAP, Sir Goes wed&, (Or sy) Although he came to this village, he did not come to our house. (Lit. Even having come to this village, he did not come to our house.) 492. ‘The past verbal participle is sometimes emphasized, in which case it has the same form as the indefinite relative participle, from which it must be carefully distinguished. Thus— Si THE GIGS wAE BH cows. (See para. 446.) He would have gone to school by this time. On thé use of Verbal Participles. 493. In English participles are often used as adjectives, e.g., a rejoining mother—a deserted house, ete., etc. In Telugu, veRuau participles never can be used as adjectives ; but such English expressions as the above are rendered in Telugu by RELATIVE participles, which will be explained in the next chapter. 494, In Telugu, verbal participles are very largely used to prevent a succession of finite verbs. Hence, when translating from Telugu into English, a verbal participle must often be translated by a finite verb with some conjunction, e.g., and, but, ete. Thus— SAS PeSithos TALY, HKYawen bss, was ww, He did not eat his food, but took his books, and went to school. Lit. Not having eaten his food, having taken his books, he went to school.ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 199 BNarth SOSH SOaros VS Sroiso Soreom Psp, OF ti, t6' BstGen AKEY, Arco Fao goxs BPStomarv, spite ay 88 eas SQ) 6 Groh Drews AB, SHI, SHeo DH RAGSTMOb>, OSG, & Aden sD, OD Boss Bifoud* #ss00, etc. In this case it is equivalent in meaning to the verbal noun of the same verb, In sentences of this kind 6,8 is understood, but not expressed. ‘When the verb is in the negative, 2% is always expressed. Thus— Bsr god FHSS Sao S Breas? (Or VG Sei.) ‘What is the good of your taking so much trouble ? Qo BP Sno GSrvasssoo? (Or SKN.) ‘Whaat is the good of your going?ON VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 208 BY SoSISA OVAMKso Gs, (Or Sy AWssesesisn) Your grieving is no good. SA) Sno S Breas? (Or Swsiesio.) What is the good of your crying ? 504. Secondly. Before a sentence stating the lapse of time. In sen- tences of this kind the finite verb is always idiomatically put in the singwlar, although the subject may be in the plural. Thue— DH BB,-AS SQy, Oy Srrsatove wowsd? How many months have elapsed, since you came here. Bw Orr BOAR, Jos Weis wows? How long is it, since I informed you? Lit. I having informed you, what time has elapsed ? Bw 8 OPV GAN, Ter sorwstweo vous, Four months have elapsed, since I read that book. Adverbial formof the Negative Verbal Participle. 505. The termination vow is often attached to the negative verbal participle, and it then becomes an adverb; as—“SdS%our without doing. This form (together with any words connected with it) is inserted in a sentence as an adverbial phrase, and generally expresses nearly the same meaning as the simple participle in ¥. Thus— AY Qi Kiso Wasvoow GOS sorry ¥. You are merely looking at the book, without reading it,204 ON. VERBAL NOUNS, ETC. 506. This adverbial form is sometimes used idiomatically with the verb Gow attached to it. Thus— OH, WH daisy BAKO ayd. I cannot get a livelihood there. (Lit. There a livelihood is with- out accruing to me.) AomMBSS* Gass Tkom Gye, For some reason or other he is not coming. (Lit, Without coming.)ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 2 & CHAPTER XIV. 507. The three following chapters are on SUBORDINATE BENTENCES. (1) Chapter KIV treats of what are called in analysie ADJECTIVE SENTEN- ces, because they occupy the position of adjectives. (2) Chapter XV treats of what aro called in analysis ADVERBIAL SENTENCES, because they oecupy the position of adverbs. (8) Chapter XVI treats of what aro called in analysis NouN SENTENCES, because they occupy the position of nouns. 508. In Telugu, subordinate sentences always precede the sentence on which they depend. ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 509, In English an adjective sentence is always introduced by.a relative Pronoun, e.g., who, which, that, or by some word that can be used in the place of a relative pronoun; e.g., where, when, etc. Thus— A man, who és wise, is respected. ‘The book, that I gave him, is torn. ‘The time, when he will come, is uncertain. An English adjective sentence (and also many English participles and participial phrases) may generally be translated into Telugu by using a relative participle. Sometimes, however, they are best rendered by a subordinate sentence ending in “*, and including the pronoun ses orsome kindred word, ¢.9., dost, Jsyth, etc. PART I. ON THE USE OF RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. (A) GenErat, Exenanarion. On the forms of the Relative Participles. The Telugu relative participles are indeclinable. They are as follows— (1) The positive progressive present, ending in @y; as Sy sy. (2) The positive indefinite, ending in ™; as Wy. (3) The positive past, ending in 8; as GAS. (2) The negative indefinite ending in 2; as S79.206 ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 510. As already mentioned (para. 363), negative relative participles are also sometimes formed by prefixing the negative past verbal participle of any verb to the positive relative participles of 3%, eg., Sypeerateo yy Syeerdows, Byeareraieg. 511. Some roots ending in & and %, eg., St, Tt, 5%, sometimes contract the past relative participle, by dropping final %, doubling the Preceding letter, and changing its vowel into“. Thus S&S or 5%, OAS or OX. 512, In addition to the above there are also the four corresponding passive relative participles; as— Sy aout, Sycout, SydHUds, Ty, Gout; but these are not often used in conversation; and whenever the passive ocours in English, the Telugu idiom generally requires the meaning to be expressed actively. On the Translation of English Participles, Participial Phrases, and Relative Sentences by Telugu Relative Participles, and Relative Participial Phrases. 513. In the analysis of English sentences we find that PARTICIPLEs, PAR- TICIPIAL PHRASES, and RELATIVE SENTENCES qualify nouns and stand in the same relation to them as adjectives. For instance in the sentence— Call that Brahman writing—the participle—“ writing ”—qualifies the noun—'Brahman”, and stands in the same relation to it as an adjective. Again in the sentences—Call the Brahman writing in that room—and— Oall the Brahman, who is writing in that room—the participial phrase— “ writing in that room”—and—the relative sentence—who is toriting in that room"—qualify the noun—"Brahman”, and stand in the same relation to it as an adjective. In ‘Telugu (as has been already stated, para. 493) a verbal parti a verbal participial phrase can never occupy the position of anADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 207 but ® RELATIVE PARTICIPLE or 8 RELATIVE PARTICIPIAL PHRASE is specially used in the position of an adjective, and discharges the same functions as an English participle, participial phrase, or relative sentence, when used to qualify a noun. Hence—when in an English sentence a participle, parti- cipial phrase, or relative sentence is used in the position of an adjective to qualify a noun, it may be translated into Telugu by a relative participle or a relative participial phrase. For example—In order to translate the English sentence—Call that Brahman writing—we cannot use the present, verbal participle and say— Ss Cay Sy Seo; but we must use the present relative participle, and say—8 Sy Spy Ty Syrwd Boo, In the same manner the sentences—Call the Brahman, writing in that room—and—Oall the Brahman, who is writing in that room—must both be translated into Telugu by using the present relative partciple. Thus— 8 KAS Sy Cam Be. Norz—By a relative participial phrase is meant—a relative participle (cg. Sy 53%) together with the words closely connected with it (e., & XAOS), Hence 6 XOS* GY Sz is called @ ReLaTIVE pantict- PIAL PHRASE. On the Translation of Telugu Relative Participial Phrases by English Relative Sentences. 514, A relative participle or a relative participial phrase in reality stands in the same relation to the noun which it qualifies, as an English par- ticiple or participial phrase does, when used to qualify a noun. Hence in some cases the former can be exactly rendered in English by the latter. For example— 8 KBS* SS Syd bev. Call the Brahman, toriting in that room.208, ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. This can more especially be done in the case of passive relative par- ticiples. For example— Der KLWOOGS Ty Aowdw G|aw WANT. I read the letter, written by your son. But in Telugu pai relative participles are very seldom used; and in the case of the great majority of active relative participles it is impos- sible, when translating into English, to retain the participial form, and it becomes necessary to use an English RELATIVE SENTENCE. Thus in translating into English the sentence—Dr> Wises GAS BY WADs~sS—the participial form cannot be retained, but it becomes necessary to use an English relative sentence—viz.,—I read the letter, which your son wrote. Since therefore in almost all cases it is better, and in many cases neceasary to translate a relative participial phrase by an English relative sentence, throughout the following explanation of relative participial phrases they ave regarded as equivalent to English relative sentences, and the explanation is entirely based upon this supposition. Explanation of Relative Participial Phrases. 515. In regarding a relative participial phrase as equivalent to an English relative sentence the following points must be noticed— 616. First, ‘Tho Telugu relative participle must be regarded as includ- ing within itself the English relative pronoun. 517. Secondly. The relative pronoun included in the relative participle always refers to the noun which in the corresponding English sentence is the antecedent, and this noun is always placed immediately after the relative participle. 518. Thirdly. Any words which are closely connected with the relative participle to form the relative participial phrase, are placed immediately before the relative participle.ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 209 519. ‘The above observations may be illustrated by being applied to the following sentence:— a ny 4 5 Dr WH GAS Diao OAs oowa, 4 4 8 1 8228255 The book, which you gave to me, is torn. First, In this sentence the relative participle @2y% must be re- garded as including within itself the English relative pronoun “hich.” Secondly. The relative pronoun “which”, included in the relative participle gy, refers to the noun <)S¥a%u, which noun in the cor- responding English sentence is the Antecedent. And this noun “583s is placed immediately after the relative participle g2y<. Thirdly. The words xt 7%, which are closely connected with the relative participle gQy5 to form the relative participial phrase (ax TS gAyS), are placed immediately before the relative par- ticiple gays. 520. It may also be remarked that the relative participle is often pre- ceded by its own particular subject, as in the above sentence in which fs*W is the subject of the relative participle ys. In the same way it is often preceded by an object, as in the sentence—T% Bi OA¥s0 GQN SIH Sx% BOTW. (The gentleman, who gave me this book, has gone to England.) In this sentence §¥s%9 is the object governed by §2ys. 521. It must be specially noticed that the Telugu relative participle does not only represent what in an English relative sentence is the verb and relative pronoun, but that if the relative pronoun in English be preceded by a preposition, that preposition also is represented by the relative participle. Thus—in the sentence—Os~89 Sy SySy YO S00 Gar?—the relative participle \@75gNq represents the English words— “with which are twriting""—and the whole sentence must be translated a7210 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES, thus—is ‘the pen with which you ave writing, a good one? In like manner— SEHS BPS Gio Sa? Which is the village to which he went? wh THs Gky ga 7B. This is the house in which they are living. Baw DOD WoRs Socks Hwsra0-? Bring the gun with which I killed the tiger. On the Subject of a Relative Participle being understood. 522, The subject of a relative participle is often understood and not expressed. This is specially the case, when the subject is aWSsfopo6 or SSAbSHYOD, i.e, a man or men in general. ‘Thus— Bas BST Stogswvisy Bassas, ‘We must do a return-kindness for a kindness which (A Mas) has done (to us.) This sentence might also be freely translated into English thas— We must do a return-kindness for a kindness DoxE, But this would not be so literal as the former translation, because URS not dona is used, the word ssAbifoges or 28% being understood. Three Observations in Reference to Relative Participial Phrases. 523, (i) When a relative participle of any verb is not preceded by a subject expressed or understood, then the English relative pronoun in- cluded in the Telugu relative participle must be the subject of the verb in.the corresponding English relative sentence. Thus— Doxoyao BOOS SOA BPS oware. ‘The man, who called you, bas gone away. BPH G HH Gye OA IHS Gary ew? Where is the man, who gave that book to you?ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES, ain © GHEE BPS HAR gowr wdar? Has not the man, who went to that village, come yet? 524. (2) When a relative participle of a transitive verb is not preceded by an object (in which case it is always preceded by a subject expressed or understood), then the English relative pronoun included in the Telugu relative participle must be the oBvzcT of the verb in the corres- ponding English relative sentence. ‘Thus— Dr 2OOS S03, shod ooarss. The man, whom you called, ran away. SASS HrkH GOW Dyas DOA owsa. ‘The book, which he gave you, is torn. 525. (3) When a relative participle of any verb is preceded by a subject, expressed or understood (and also by an object, if it be a relative parti- ciple of a transitive verb), then the English relative pronoun included in the ‘Telugu relative participle must be PRECEDED BY SOME PREPOSITION. Thus- Bi TS GOW 9B Toss Wrars. s ‘The man, to whom I gave the money, is dead. AY Y AYO SAW Yosw Gar? Is this the pen, with which you wrote that letter? Ax DyFgoo Saw Typ ga. This is the tree, from which I cut the flowers. Aw KAOS SrrYssos* Bt Sood. JH. There are no trees in the road, along which I walked. Bret BIS Git SA? Which was the village, fo which you went? Dr THGSo GH GE Ter SOA. ‘The house, in which you are living, is a very good one.212 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. On the Noun qualified by the Relative Participial Phrase. 526. The case of the noun itself which is qualified by the relative parti- cipial phrase (and which in the corresponding English sentence is the antecedent to the relative pronoun included in the Telugu relative parti- ciple) depends upon the position which it occupies in reference to the other words in the sentence. In the sentence—Ds~t SOURS TAT 9 OB, GSB. (Where is the paper which you have written)—it is in the NOMINATIVE CASE, because it (viz., S*AdSs) is the subject of G8. But in the sentence—Or-W SAW TAT Dov ART. (He tore up the paper, which you had written)—it is in the owsECTIVE CASE, because it (viz, -TPASS9) is the object of DBRT. 527. Sometimes the noun qualified by the relative participial phrase is also qualified by an adjective. In this case the adjective must be inserted between the relative participle and the noun. Thus— SIN AGA SoD wagon. The good gifts, which he has granted. BAY AGS Tho YAHSKOS GSEHT ES Sao. ‘The boundless love, which he has shown to us. On Passive Relative Participles. 528, It has been already stated that passive relative participles are sel- dom used. Thus the English sentences—I read the letter written by your son—and—I read the letter which was written by your son—might Be literally translated into Telugu as follows—Ox> BWATS wrt DAS GAs GANT. But the more idiomatic mode of translation would be as follows—Oy> SSr*toess SIRS GAs HANIA. I read the letter which your son wrote. In the same manner the sentence—I measured the wall built— would be idiomatically translated into Telugu thus—(w7%) S43 A‘ SOOT. I measured the wall which they had built.ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 213 On the Affixes inso88, Og, and 8. 529. Sometimes wéniot3 is affixed to a relative participle. When affixed to an indefinite relative participle, &° is always inserted, and when affixed to any other relative participle, contraction takes place; as “Sg donated, Arwewso8, Whsreosot3, Baoxtnssoe3, Sometimes also ¢3 is affixed to the indefinite relative participle and ©83 to the other relative participles; as—S283, G2s¢. Thus— DF Wrwensol3 Sao sod Ty. On the Translation into Telugu of a Succession of English Relative Sentences. 530. When in English there are several relative sentences referring to the same antecedent but having different subjects, in Telugu S&>05S0t82y is affixed to each of the relative participles. Sometimes, however, to the last relative participle e4035083 only is affixed. ‘Thus— ‘These are the jewels, which I saw in Bunder, and which he stole. BAH woswos»t Gor OsdnNolI, Tra TTOADOAMWsolIy SXeo GS. (Or S*ADDStwso¥3.) bal. ‘When in English there are several relative sentences referring to the same antecedent and having the same subject, in Telugu all but the last are expressed by verbal participles and the last by a relative participle. ‘Thus— These are the jewels, which I found, and brought from there, and showed to you. Bx TAKIN OH, AMD BHITOSHy Ok KorhodS SK ow gf Lit. These are the jewels which I having found, (and) having brought from there, showed to you.214 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. (B) ON THE RESPECTIVE MEANINGS OF THE SEVERAL RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. FIRST. On the Relative Participle in 6%). 532, (a) The relative participle in 6%, or the present verbal partici- ple prefixed to Gy, is used to express PROGRESSIVE PRESENT TIME. ‘Thue— © Siyhy BORE Goth Sersromen gong. (Or Si Giy.) Give two rupees to that man, who is coming. 8 Poss? asp Giy Ag ISD? (Or Sys.) ‘Whose are the cattle, which are feeding in that field? 533. (b) The present verbal participle prefixed to 608% or in the Nor- thern Circars to Gy (the shortened form of Gos, see para. 376) is used to express IMPHRFECT Past TIM, 'Thus— Bay SyrasorsGod SSP Gods LY Sry so? wxoomwa. (Nor. Cir, Sig> B%y.) The ship, which was coming from Madras, was wrecked on the way. SECONDLY. On the Relative Participle in ~. 534. (@) The relative participle in ~ is used to express FUTURE time. Sometimes, however, instead of the simple form the infinitive is prefixed to as akkg, the relative participle in ~ of 3%. Thus— arte $y BE miso Sta? What is the name of the village, fo which you will go to-morrow ? OSes Sy BA HO Spot3? (or Busses Biog,) What is the work, that he will do to-morrow? (Or that he is going to do.)ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 215 585. (0) The relative participle in -s is also used to express HABIT or custom. Thus— wrt TE Saher MOOD TY. The works, that they do, are not good. DoSS8 BY sSr-¥sso SA? Which is the road, that goes to Bunder ? Bw BS Vso Bods. The rice, that I eat, is white. 536. (¢) The relative participle in -s or the present verbal participle prefixed to Go% (the participle in -s of 40%) is often employed, where in English we employ the idiom useD To expressing former custom now discontinued. In these sentences the word OG or soa generally precedes the relative participle. Thus— SProGaoo wT SAS SH) soohs sssrrvGu Haren. (Or Siz Gow.) ‘The Munshi, «who formerly used to come to me, has got a son. (Or—who formerly used to be coming.) Mowy BH IE OF sw sdyNowwas. (Or dss Gow.) ‘The horse, which formerly I used to ride, is dead. (Or formerly I used to be riding.) 587. (d) The relative participle in 5 is sometimes used, where the relative participle in &¥%q would be more correct. Thus— se Sy SDR Sto? Who is that man, who is coming? THIRDLY. On the Relative Participle in s, 538. The relative participle in is used to express PasT or PERFECT time. Thus— Bw SOs SO gow TSM. ‘The work, about which I have come, is not yet finished.216 539, used in reference to any time. ‘Thus— ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES, Dosa BowWy WADS Foo rv soOO, The stories, which we read the day before yesterday, were very nice. 8 BHH obs HD esifonwa. The tiger, which killed that cow, has run away. FOURTHLY. On the Negative Relative Participle in 9, The negative relative participle in 9 is 1NDEFINITE, i.e, it may be Sor SHH bw GHoroo Sosa ote Bes. There is not a day, on which our master does not send letters to England. Bw BRS HO WAoy, BHO Sd Bary. You have not done the work, which I told you; but you have done the work, which I did not tell you. Be SSotiss? sass Sorin Bao ae Bao. There is not a country in the world, which he has not seen. GENERAL EXaMPLrs. 8 BH Sy 8 HGH WABI GBYB. (Or KrBys. 3) ‘That bird, which is singing, is very pretty. HPSaod Hy WeQ aw, Sd Shoes? (Or Dxpxy.) (Para. 452.) What is the work, that you have been doing since dawn? (Lit. From day light, the work which you are doing, what ?) Aw BN%00 Sy) iy GSy SO goer Sar? (Or BSP Gos.) Is not the work, which you were doing yesterday, finished yet? BYS* Srrgrreiasr Shey SOR gowr vr°Sa. Theman, whois going to speak at the meeting, has not yet arrived. O88 BA whe vw S000. ‘The cloths, which they weave there, are very good.ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 217 Ort Ay ssw BS b 4 sd: From what well is the water, in which you bathe? BM GAYS Vos Sno Dray? What have you done with the pen, which I gave you? OSH DVIRW WS, why SOB? ‘Whore is the red cloth, which he has torn? BH BSD dw GPs loww SKoBFTrSe ‘Why have you burnt an English letter, which I had not read ? (C) Compostre Nouns rorMeD FROM RELaTrve PaRTicrPLEs. On the Formation of Composite Nouns. 540. Tt has already been shown that by adding the pronominal affixes arm, TO, Tog, B (for WB) and D (for WD) to adjectives and the genitive cases of nouns and pronouns a class of composite nouns are formed; as S0Dare% a good man, 8,28 a pretty woman, (See para. 202.) ‘The pronominal affixes may also be affixed to any of the relative participles, and in this manner another class of COMPOSITE NOUNS are formed, which follow the same general rules as the above mentioned class. Thus— TRAM. wow, Syrsars. SyHDar. 28 Those who are writing. ‘Those who write, or will write. Those who write, or have written. ‘Those who do not write, or will not write, or have rit written, etc.218 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES, Examples of the use of Masculine and Feminine Composite Nouns formed from Relative Participies. 541. N.B.—Before reading these examples, the student should refer to para. 398. Bw wos goLs’ BY, Sy Sarwss. (or Say.) Tam a writer of accounts in his house, i.e., an accountant. BS Sob WSarDy. (Or Tress.) Iam acook-woman, (Lit. One who does cooking.) DS Sao 50 Dharag? What work do you do? (Lit. You are one who does what work?) Dy Sao Sd Ddorsy? What work do you (fem.) do? VS% SEO Bdare, He is a carpenter. (Lit. He is one who does carpenter work.) 3 3 & gois* Sob Baha. That woman is a cook in my honse. “(Lit One who does cooking.) Doo Sob Bisrsiso, We are cooks, Ast Sao 0 Baars? What work do you do? (Lit. Ye are persons who do what work?) wh SSO Whar. ‘They are carpenters. BIOS Goes BQNark BEA SQy To? Have those who went to his house come back? @ SHB ISR? (Para. 145.) Who is that woman who is coming ?ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 219 6 xast SIR GAAS Boo. (Para. 206.) Call the man who is writing in that room ? DES os 59 Baodarow sito? ‘Amongst these, who are the persons who have not done that work? WSN Os Ad Sood, Sica» Bars. I will not give any help to those who do not read. Examples of the use of Neuter Composite Nouns formed from Relative Participles. 542. In the preceding examples the composite nouns are all of the mas- culine or feminine gender. The xevruR composite nouns in 8 and 9 are used to express that which, ise., the thing which and those which, iie., the things which. Thus— Derk Botwiy 8 Snoi3? . ‘What is it that you are eating? (Lit. That which you are eating, what ?) © BES Moser, wor? (Para. 337.) : Is that thing which is going a horse, or an ass ? Dr BPLSA wosor, Basarw? ‘Was that (place) to which you went Bunder or Bezwada ? BH GHA Orv WSK? Can you read what I am writing ? BdHS OAAS TDS SHY Gio Tyway + Have you given an answer to what he asked ? BASS TAPS TM stysada. ¥ did not understand what he said.220 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 543. Norz.—The same meaning as is expressed by the affix & is also sometimes expressed by using the word SoX® (thing). Thus— BIS BUS VONB ww stgsade, I did not understand what he said. (Lit. the thing which.) Idiomatic use of Neuter Composite Nouns in & 544, ‘The pronominal affix & joined to a relative participle is often idio- matically used to express the fact that, and conveys nearly the same meaning as the verbal noun, When thus used 4 is indeclinable. Thus— Saws Si Ser BPS dows? Is the fact that he went to-day true? i.c., Is it true that he went to-day? BAS SHB Ark Jerr BORNE? How did you know (the fact) that he will come? Drrt SQA Goes BORA. All know (the fact) that you have come. Norz—In sentences of this kind the word SoX@ also is sometimes used, Thus— DWH SQyS SoNG wowes BORWA, All know (the fact) that you have come. 546, Acomposite noun’in 8, when used in the manner mentioned above, often expresses @ DOUBTFUL ALTERNATIVE. The negative ulter- native is expressed by the negative verbal participle of the same verb with the afix 8. The negative alternative is sometimes expressed by the word a8. Thus— WD wosoHoo WH Saiaoio Bia Dasa art Beoioa? (Or S28.) Do you know whether my relations will help me or not? PALS EYSsb STVSA TYSHOG Ar% Toowosr? (or GOB.) Do you know whether he wrote a letter or not? Sch Saya TAB Sgr BH wees. I cannot tell for certain whether he will come or noteON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 221 Idiomatic use of Composite Nouns formed from Positive Indefinite Relative Participles. 547. It has been shown (para. 536) thet in the Northern Circars the relative participle in ~ is constantly used to translate the English idiom used to in such sentences as—The Munshi, who formerly used to teach me, has got a son, SEQ TS GY WE) MULE Srxirrvoew sare. The composite noun formed from the relative participle in ~* (or the present verbal participle prefixed to the composite noun formed from Go@%) is also frequently used in the same signification both in the Northern Cirears and in the other parts of the Telugu country. When thus used, the composite noun always occupies the position of the lust word in the sentence. Thus— Bao SoA SOHTar Swen aso WAGE BYaredy. (Or wresa.) Formerly I used to go daily to the sea, Wiis Bw G Syst Boras. (Or SPawes,) Formerly I (fem.) used to go to that town. Wr HY GAGS goyy’ Soto Gharsiar? Used you to do cooking in his house formerly? C5 SowH TBKfar Sor gols SAysrws. (Or swipe Gowarress.) Formerly he used to come to my house daily. (Or He used to be coming.) SB Mw G GIOS BPS. (Or Bhar ows.) She used to go to that village formerly. (Or She used to be going.) Wri Sasw 8 w gosys* Gowa, Formerly his schoo! used to be in that honse. hive Som 8 gots? Kotarsseo. ‘We used to live in that house formerly. Wohi Ort east Smowr guysroe? Used you to give him any thing formerly ?222 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. Bi WAST Soros TrersooB Boon GoBWarv. Formerly there used to be anany boys in this school. i Sosine Sosy Wr SrA. Formerly these pens used to write well. Certain elegant uses of Composite Nouns formed from Relative Participles. 548. (a) The composite nouns are often used elegantly as follows— © SBP Sod Garr? Equals 6 SH) MOGs Sodsar? Is that one which is coming a good horse ? Arto BAD Sao Soy? Hquals Mrr% BASo% Save? ? Dit. Those which you eat are what What fruits do you e fruits? arts JE By MIs, Hy OHS? Is the one which you ride a white horse or a black horse ? 206.) QB-A8 Sd) GawS aod FOYT? (para. Is he who is coming here a good Collector? 549. () Just as we sometimes say in English—Who is 1 coming? 50 in Telugu we may use such expressions as the following— © STA Isso? Who is it coming ? S KASS TYAS Isto? Who is it who is writing in that room ? N.B.—Both in Telugu and English such expressions as the above are chiefly used, when the sex of the person is unknown. 550. (c.) The positive indefinite relative participle with the aflix 8 is sometimes used idiomutically, where the future tense might be used. Thus—ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 223 x Soo SA? Or contracted BAao TAA? What shall I do? Zit. What is that which I shall do? © Srroxinen 22608 BABA der? How will they bring those beams on shore ? (a) By the addition of 2% to this form a negative progressive tense may be formed—S:s9 SAysde—we are not coming, Idiomatic use of Neuter Composite Nouns in & formed from Indefinite Relative Participle Negative. 551. The composite noun, formed by affixing & to the indefinite relative participle negative (Para. 544), is sometimes idiomatically used alone, where the word 6% 430008, or occasionally ey 588, appears to be understood. (In the Northern Circars, final & is sometimes lengthened into &.) Thus— Sty LOSDA, TH Gosls BUS, Lit, If there is the fact of their not inviting me, I will not go to their house—i.e., If they do not invite me, I will not go to their house. Dy SosyOFNA, SobeFAY SO Gola Ss. 57. Lit, Although there was the fact of my not touching you, yon say that I did touch you. All right—i., Although I did not touch you, you say that I did. All right. BM VODA, STDS O'SeH. If I do not call you, do not come in, Dre TB, SD IK, If you do not come, the work will not be accomplished. Soorven BOA, TMH AY SFxowos sINe. If L have not bearers, I cannot get on even for a day. Sots TDB, oes% BaD DDT? If the food was not cooked, why did you call me?224 “ee 8 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. GENERAL EXxaMpPues. arts OR SH wonda? Is the water which you drink good ? Sr°Gisoeo BAD S00 HS WO guys BAD sxy00. ‘That which I used formerly to drink was good water, but that which I now drink is insipid. Bx TE goess BParely—or— AH Gotland. L used to go to their house—or—I used to be going. Bi Dwy arth ISTO? sSr~ goss Sots Basra. (Para, 304.) ‘Who is this boy, sir? One who does cooking in our house. Swot Ywsta S eis? ‘What village is the one which appears in front ? Mos Bs YAR BY, OHS SoBiy BH Srviyow awry. (Setyobs~ Gowtarehy.) I formerly used to go to the Krishna, and sit there for a little while, Bi MOAo Soro~y Wer sada. Formerly this horse used to walk well. ConvERSATION. N.B.—In this conversation E represents an Englishman, and N a Native. E. N. fol s SHwst GS ah Js? wrth Te SNS. (Paras, 383 & 177.) . wrt Sno SO Bharen? . Mys 5 Boman Smysoaeas, (Paras. 486 & 476.) . Das SHE Bwareo? (Paras, 208 & 301.) 58, TWYosoVoW Haw SIV BWA. (Paran. 127 & 424.)ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES, 225 EB, due MY Gow Ark Jo oB TWH IAs? N. gos" SBs0H8 GA. (Para. 236.) E, Br GoFiso8 Ty Joss’? (Para. 377.) N. vars, o8,SSar! (Para. 438.) E, wro¥ ost Smo 5D Hazy? (Para. 306.) N. 28% Sob Diarm—ate wart Sie Storm —ga0s RY Bayo ave SGoTaree—oorewy MOS Qaros—gw GAP odes a GsHOR. (Para. 385.) B. 07% MOV, Feo, BwsPIO Spor asy ar? N. Womdss Tre, Tors Geo Gi,D. E, #4 seo Sw Jd, By, seo GKD? (Para. 306.) N. 2883 Bote Bx gigoB, 2¥e3 Be givvos, E. Yond 27% Your Moyes Jow¥? (Para. 87 Note.) N, nodl Teor MFsove, Sar BAGgAoos¥ 2 AyVabo, English Translation. E. Who is that (who is) in the veranda? N. He is my servant. E. What work does he do? (Lit. He is one who does what work ?) N. T appointed him to do any work that I told him. E, Is he a trustworthy man? N. He is more trustworthy than any of my other servants. (Lit. than all,) E. Besides him, how many more servants have you ? N. Ihave ten more, (Lit. There are to me ten more.) E. Why have you so many servants? N. Dear me! is there not need of them ! E. What work do they all do? N. One is a cook—one is a man who brings Bazaar things—two are water carriers—one is a waiter—four are grooms—and one is a ‘woman, who sweope the honse, and smears it with condang,226, ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. E. Have you any horses, cows, ete. ? N. Ihave five horses, and two cows. E, How many measures of milk do these cows give daily ? 'N. One gives two measures, and the other gives a measure. B. But why have you five horses ? NN. Four horses are for the carriage, and one horse is for riding. PART II. ON THE USE OF SUCH ADJECTIVE SENTENCES AS END IN «4%, AND INCLUDE THE PRONOUN st, ETc. 558, In Telugu a subordinate sentence ending in <# is sometimes used, which contains the pronoun «St or some kindred word, and is followed by some correlative, e.g., at. Sentences of this kind usually correspond to such English subordinate sentences as contain the words whoever, whatever, whichever, ete. For they usually express (1) GENERALIZATION—or (2) SELECTION, Thus— (1) 8 50 dseh SQonr Baarateret, ard, War Bw. Whoever does not do that work quickly, I will punish him severely—or—I will punish (him) severely whoever does not do that work quickly. § SVS GS Twi SSM WTS, (or TWyS*) Ves SAB Poh Bas. (Or Mow.) Whatever servant pleases his sovereign (he) will attain to celebrity. (2) d5* 8 SD Jiao We Days", ads SA sorechonen Say. Whichever of you does that work best, I will give him ten rupees—or—I will give ten rupees to (him) whichever of you does that work best. (Para, 424.) i wAS* Or 58 WSS, wd OI. ‘Whichever of these bottles you want, take it—or—Take (it) whichever of these bottles you want.ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCE! 2mm 554. In English the correlative is seldom expressed. It is, however, some- times expressed when the subordinate sentence is put first. Compare Rev. xxii, 17; Mat. xiii, 12; Keel. iii, 14; Deut. xii, 32. Thus— ‘Whoever wants help (he) must come to my house. ‘Whoever comes late, I will give him no help. In Telugu the correlative is always expressed. Thus— Swawito ISO WSS, wah T> gots TSORIA. St Gower Says", CIDE Sody Stas Gass. 555. When translating sentences of this kind, it must be remembered that the plural is sometimes used in Telugu where in English the sin- gular is more commonly used. Thus— G8Dorwer IS STOAOAS*, TOD SOYLsrw pond Sant, Henceforth whoever steals, government will imprison him—or— Henceforth whoever steals (he) will be imprisoned by govern- ment. (It would be less common to say—Henceforth who- ever steal, government will imprison them.) See, however, Ps, evi, 43. 556. N.B.—Since the correlative is usually expressed in Telugu, it is thought better to class these sentences, as ADJECTIVE sentences, although in Telugu as well as in English it mey perhaps be more correct to regard them as NOUN sentences put in apposition to the correlative. Bain remarks— The compound forms whoecer, whichever, etc., have a cer- tain indefinite meaning, and have their antecedents often left unex- pressed. The characteristic meanings of these words are more closely allied with the interrogative meanings of who, which, ete., than with their meanings as relatives.” On the use of «seh in the manner mentioned above. 557, 8 Dxywrog st wre Sysarh ISS, arch, Boo. Call (him) whichever of those boys is the best writer. Bt QHVSwvd* Ow 48 GAB, VB BEd. ‘Take (that) whichever of these books you like.£238 ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. N.B.—The word 00% is often idiomatically affixed to the pro- noun -)s¢ when thus used. Thus— St Bio Boson Bo Swot ISVS Sd BOWS’, OD Soy Loard poo Izv. Whoever does not pay the tax within a month to-day (he) will be imprisoned by Government. (Para. 555.) On the use of the Adjective Pronoun 4 in the manner mentioned above. 558, In sentences of this kind the adjective pronoun 4 is often used. Thus— best $ oxyares SOL Ir ase", & Daya aio Series Tots Tre, ‘Whichever boy amongst them passes the best examination (that boy) will get a prize. D8St § Kross mods, VA Sonor, Cut (that one) whichever of these beams is the best. (Para. 424.) Ash S QAVawen WSS, UD HH 04. Take (those) whatever books you want. 5 qyBogeo Treecindy. 89S SArsiswo Dery sso JOA a6 AorwhS*, wre Teer SBS SAB Totes, Whatever servant knows the indications of the king’s wrath and pleasure, and acts accordingly, (He) will attain to celebrity through the king’s favour—or—That servant will attain to celebrity through the king's favour, who knows the indications of the king’s wrath and pleasure, and acts accordingly. Examples of the use of .Joa% in the manner mentioned above. 559. Jos ator Gry SH, Tos STSOE Trsssoye. As many as are ready may all come in. (Lit. Howmanysoever are ready, they all may come in.)ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. 229 WrOGioo JOSE GAYTS*, Quipsd Srrar BOSE GAKSOANA. I must now give to as many as I gave to formerly. DrH My DQSVsoew WSSS, Vd BHD Saw. I will bring as many books as you want. Examples of the use of other words, ey., Jo, aénsso83, etc., used in the manner mentioned above. BWDE Jos Brissy ETHOS, wos Rsk pry Bane. ‘He spends daily as much money as he gets. (Lit. Howmuch- soever he gets daily, so much he spends.) Wid oS KO HA™, GEyeh VOT WAGSosoes Yams. He has now become as rich as he was formerly poor. SD, Lod WOES, HirE Sew wos WHOS. The daughter is as pretty as her mother. Sho Jos Mpsamg™, GI vod rR deiorry ws. ‘He is now suffering as much trouble as he formerly enjoyed happiness. Dr TrdHowH devo B GodT*, > Osyardaioo Diy Gloss Hi dowsses, ‘You must have the same love for my boy as you have had for me. SoS, NtnwSol3 Morasosos*, VasrrSouh kool} Aorasosow, The son is as worthy a man as his father. Bi Gy JénSo8S%, Nr Guo vinwosS. Our house is just the eame as this. WHS IWS SQW, was Yar, ‘They have gone to the very place whence they came. Bw ASpi SazS*, ESpA gays. Whenever I come, then I will give it. Biy SE Win Hogs Bret, rays © Gress Say, He will honour you in the same way that he honoured me.230 561, ON ADJECTIVE SENTENCES. Allusion to Noun Sentences ending in “, and including the Pronoun ats or some kindred word. Forms closely resembling those used in the preceding kinds of sen- tences occur in Telugu, where in English that kind of subordinate sen- tence is used which is called an indirect interrogation. But as such sentences are not followed by a correlative, they are (both in Telugu and English) unmistakesbly Noun sentences, and consequently will be fully considered in chapter XVI. Allusion only is made to them here to guard the student against confusing them with the preceding kinds of sentences. A few examples are subjoined. 562, the meaning of the English word perhaps. A few examples of its use DSB Ste Sno SD Bs*, Bp. Tell me what work you did yesterday. TNE Jo OHIBS*, FH. Find out how much he aske for it. In each of the above examples the subordinate sentence is a noun sentence, and stands as the object to the final verb. Reference to the use of the affix Sas, It has been already stated (Para. 303) that the affix SSs~ has are here added to point out to the student the difference in use between the affix °* and the affix SBo~. Some Passes Bayar Sarr, S58 BESS. Perhaps the gentleman is at meals, do not go in. Bw GQ Mothsy saowlo si dmyQoowdar, Perhaps his cough has abated owing to the medicine which I gave him. Tren 2D WISHES, fod JowH’ “rH? Why have you put the milk on the ground, a cat may perhaps drink it? >><<«—_—_ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES, 231 CHAPTER XV. ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 563, ‘This chapter treats of such subordinate sentences as are called in analysis ADVERBIAL SENTENCES, because they occupy the position of adverbs, In English adverbial sentences are usually introduced by certain conjunctions, e.g., as, when, etc. Thus— No one can do that work, as you are doing it. Did you not hear, when I spoke to him? English adverbial sentences may generally be translated into Telugu by adding certain verbal affixes, ¢g., £3, OSp%, etc., to various Parts of the verb, but more especially to the relative participles. Thus— © HP art Diyin, Astor, Aawdss, wtp.) No one can do that work, a# you are doing it. ie, Wage — Ax VSNS* BRysdyes, dH Odor? (ic, BhyS—wspem), Did you not hear, when I spoke to him? ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES AND PHRASES: EXPRESSING CONDITION. 504, In English conprTt0n is commonly expressed by a subordinate sentence, in which the word if is followed by an habitual present or future tense. Thus— If you give me t1oo rupees, I will go. If he does not go quickly, you must fine him. 565. In Telugu conprtion is commonly expressed by a form made by affixing @ to the past verbal participle of any verb; as 39%. This form is indefinite as to time.282 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 566. Verbs of which the root ends in % preceded by a short vowel (Para. 272), and verbs of the second and third conjugations use a con- tracted form. Thus, 29% (i.e., 2 the past verbal participle of wast with the affix B) contracted 80%; Wx87NS contracted ToF*0®; SyrS contracted 37S GXyS contracted 2%; S89S contracted S8B; otc., ete. 567. The negative form is made by prefixing the negative verbal participle to 38, The word 3S is contracted for ow, from 2%. Thus, Srp, Saers', otc. Instead; of BS the word Go (the conditional form from oh) is frequently used; as @yceY Goh contracted WT, AO80H, EXamPLes. DY WH Toth torcromen QB, BLT, If you give me two rupees, I will go. wrth BL BEVIS wozs Boss. (Or BY.) If he does not go quickly, you must fine him. Teh Horr BLY, wswxirrsews garg, If he goes quickly, give him a present. VSS TH Sstasie GH, © 59 Baorxors, If he helps me, I can do that work. Bx BYB, Vay Kora BolyByrn BLTra, II go, I will take you also with me. di Sone UTS, Wha w. (Or TO.) If he does not come soon, I shall punish him. On the aMix wb00%. 568. Sometimes in English the verb in the subordinate sentence ex- pressing condition is in the progressive present, the future, the past, or the plaperfect tense, or in the potential mood. In translating such sentences into Telugu the same form for expressing condition as givenON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 283 above may be used. But in addition to this form there is another form in frequent use, by means of which the exact time of the verb in the subordinate sentence can be accurately marked. This form is made by Adding ©3008 to the progressive present, the past, or the indefinite relative participle of any verb. ‘Thus— SBwrs 8 WR Wr Bey gonG, arvs ws08 Tos Bercronen GALS) A. (Or 3h.) If the carpenter is making that box well, you may give him two rupees. dH 8 DR 908.6 sour Biogond, Fy, Swarts Sorreh Sersrovw svodore gars. (Or ZH.) If you twill make that box very quickly, I will give you three rupees beforehand for wood. 2 BR bw IT, afb Tr Bspond, 38 soo omen gars. Brad, Sos gaye. (Or 3H.) Bring that box. If you have made it very well, I will give you ten rupees ; if not, I will give you only eight. 569. The corresponding negative form is made by affixing @¢3008 to the negative relative participle, e.g., QNSt3008, or by prefixing the negative verbal participle to the conditional forms formed from the rela- tive participles of S*¥e>, ¢.g., GI—VSoxwtjo08, Thus— S SBarwh GAS w SO Gosoysounpowd, goOwes gg SORsB. (Or Basson.) If that carpenter has not yet done that work, you must give it to another. Nore.—The word @{30%% is compounded of 4p and von, the conditional form of ©%, and means—if so be that. On the use of aS and Sot, 570. ‘In English the expressions—otherwise—and—if not—are often used to express Fy alternative in the negative. In Telngn the expressions234 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. SxIS and S60 are used in a similar manner, “60% is com- pounded of @¥ the primary negative verbal participle, and 0% the conditional form from éioz. (Para, 870.) Thus— Baws BOF, Say. Bias, orm. If he calls (me), I will come; otherwise, I will not come. Dr 5H, Vysood. Phot, Tes, If you come, it will be accomplished; if not, it will not be accomplished. On the Affixes SHasot%, SHxwk, and Ive. 571. Instead of the affix @43008 the affixes SKaGo% and SULissst (the locative and dative cases of 5%. As I have come. On Adverbial Sentences and Phrases expressing purpose. 595. Purpose may be expressed in Telugu by— (a) The dative case of the verbal noun; as—S¥awsw or Be’, (see para. 476.) Norg.—The following remarks will be found useful:—The dative case of the English varbal noun (j.e., the verbal noun preceded by the preposition for) is used in two ways— First. It is generally used, where the infinitive mood could be used instead, as in the sentence—I have bespoken a bandy for going to Bunder—or—to go to Bunder. Secondly. It is sometimes used, where the infinitive mood could not bo used instead, as in the sentence—I punished him for coming late to school. In translating sentences of the frst kind into Telugu, the dative case of the Telugu verbal noun may be used, since it is equivalent to the English infinitive. Thus—2oSto% B¥aS vod Srm~r-Aa~AS. But it cannot be used in translating sentences of the second kind, because in English the infinitive mood cannot be used. In the latter sentence “for coming” is equivalent either to—(1) For having come, which shows the ground, on which the punishment was inflicted, and which would therefore be expressed in Telugu by SQy 0tS%, (See para, 594,)—Or—(2) On account of coming, which would be expressed in Telugu by U*seisose (or GS). (See para. 475.) (6) Sometimes instead of the dative case of the verbal noun being used, the word Xeot%e% is affixed to the infinitive. Thus— 8 9 BasKXooros Ak Bor versromen gaz. I will give you two rupees to do that work.ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 245 (c) The affixes 2028, NHoifihoo, §°%, are attached to an inde- finite relative participle ;— n0S% BHowsw, vod Srerdwrar? (Or owsssws.) Have you bespoken a cart to go to Bunder? 8 OSVs WA ALomsw, boowd Bao. T have not leisure to read that book. 8 30 Bhsotsi, Hk SA tercroww gays, I will give you ten rupees to do that work. DOS BYOMritioo, vod sorrerdarar? Have you bespoken a bandy to go to Bunder? SOS WeHiatoin TAIT SHYT AB, I came to help them or in order to help them, N.B.—Instead of 2s the word NHs% Zo is sometimes used. ‘AHos§s% is more often used than §78%, but neither of these words is very common. c (d) By the affix ©43> (or er>Xe or e=%0) attached to an indefinite relative participle ; as— OSH BOE Azsiiwo Biybiy, Mhoowrs, I punished him, in order that henceforth be might speak the truth. ‘This form is specially common in prayer. Thus— Buss Ipsipasdgy DB gr STs. GSQotojy, Sears Baswass, Give us help, in order that we may always walk according to thy commandments. On Adverbial Sentences and Phrases expressing consequence. 596. Consequence is usually expressed in English by an adverbial sen- tence introduced by the words—so that~i.e—in such a manner that. In Telugu consequence is expressed by the affix ©9439 or OW (or OX) attached to an indefinite relative participle. Thus— Got8DrrB ode IAS Sg tofasn Serer. He talked, so that the house tiles flew off, i.e., very loudly. (He talked so loudly that, ete.).146 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. AWB TB, GAY By DBA saatabbyy, RS wD BR sa. Last night a great wind blew, sp that many trees were broken, and fell down. On Adverbial Seritences and Phrases expressing manner. 597. (1) Sentences and phrases expressing agreement or similarity— (a) The words Swsw, Sworn, 6B, DBsso7r, mean- ing as, according as, in the manner in which, may be affixed to any of the relative participles. 8 SD drt Bis, STs, ISA, Hasse. No one can do that work, as you are doing it. Or Boor GSS, Tse, ISVs, wr des, No one can write Telugu, as you write it. 8 SP Dt SYTOSS/WUsho, worWoy A, ‘That work is going on, as you arranged. N.B.—In every case 587% or D%so7" may be used instead of SiTrvss, (b) The affixes Oi, Wier, BL», BhyT, O%, and ernes inay be attached to a present ot past participle, with the meaning as, in the manner which, as if. 6 BD Drwto Boys Lp Mavory Hawdss, Fayey Swot.) No one can do that work, as you are doing it. BH BHStp, © SO Dhar, (BHF STs.) He did that work, as I told him. © SoXBD KBD, Q-¥ S*Dsty SAGA, (SSS TI.) Write, as you like, about that matter. CSPGOD SQySy, Vases sory wo, He looks, as if he had come from the jungle. SH, TH GF GH, 00 BmaIM Ty ww. He pretended to give me that stick, and then took it away again. (Lit, having given as if he gave).ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. wT mBrbotous Tem Thy WRB Saat wrvsenifosy hy, BD sPaoxor, ‘Wise men can make known the result of a coming event, as if they saw it. (Lit, As if it were appearing to them). Sometimes Je> is added to by. Thus— 8S His SHS Hr Dames, ‘He acted, just as his inclination led him. Norg.—The word wy or @i»7 in the sense of as if is often placed idiomatically at the end of a sentence, the word @ij)8 being understood. When thus used it often takes emphatic *. Thus— Seeyplowses Passe dash. My smelling the food, (is) just as if I tasted it. This form is especially common in proverbs. Thus— Sor as, Gor, Ses Moz SOON. As if, while there were the calf and its mother (to bellow), the post between them bellowed. (Used in reference to an intrud- ing person.) (2) Sentences or phrases expressing proportion— The word affixed to present, past or indefinite relative participle, means—in proportion as. Thus— Baw gays G7G, TOs GF Bis wHsowys. In proportion as I am giving, their desire is becoming greater, ie., the more I give, the more they want. Ax BELA sv var HS Dawwe«ws, ‘The more I speak, the more careless they are, SY iio0 worsen, Hho wetAstonwsa, In proportion as the rain fell, the salt earth sank in. AY SO Dawe dHonssr, 8 Siew SoPDio8. In proportion as you have not worked, you will suffer loss.48 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. On Adverbial Sentences and Phrases expressing time, condition, 598. (1) Point of time— (a) The affixes somv~, Swot, and Yr~wgato are added to the negative verbal participle of any verb, and answer to the English expres- sion—before, or before that. Thus— Bw Pin BawYssowo’s, vost Sasioms-v, Before I had taken my food, all went away. S OS are YTe00B, SBMS Wows Br. Before that boy was born, his father died. 3B Koken THs, or v8 NIBTrT?? Do they leave schoo! before it is ten o'clock? Der TH TorhASs0% Sod wth WO asa. ‘He died two days before you came. (0) The affix 7, when added to an infinitive, has the meaning of as soon as, Thus— Orr BI BA, vostor BOS omsre. (Or SYS so 8*3.) (Para. 474) As soon as you went outside, all went away. Aas TTS, ONS © Sp Gays. (Or SA) wrsehsind*S, or Sig>%,) (Para. 490.) I will give you the money, as soon as I come. The affix ety, attached to a past relative participle, is occa- sionally used in the sense of—as soon as. Thus— Bio gold! SAySiyAMs, GG. (Or TAA, or TSW.) I will give it to you, as soon as I come home. Sometimes however @{y7~S is only emphatic for &{y7, jand means exactly as. Thus— AS BRSiyrs © SD WdSsSORSH, ‘You must do that work, exactly as I told you.ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 249 The affixes Sots, SUS, (SieoHs or FFeoow) are attached to positive past relative participles only, and mean—directly, or the moment that. Thus— Dr BWHOS Ba BY, eaoss*® srruraara, Directly you told me, I went and spoke to him. L5H SHS SK, BYstors. (Or SS, or Boos.) The moment be comes, I shall go away. (c) The word p26, meaning when, may be affixed to any of the rela- tive participles. Thus— Aw So TUdpsyspem, HY EIMEMotmT AH; sodaraigi! (Or Biiop Gisy Byes.) ‘When Iam working, you are doing nothing. Youare a nice fellow! wr DW SO Ty Gy Spt, Bowe KD gQywrs. (Gud, Biz GoSSyes.) (Para. 538.) When they were working yesterday, I gave them their pay for the day before yesterday. In all such sentences as the preceding one, in which imperfect past time is expressed, the indefinite relative participle may also be used without altering the meaning. Thus— WH MW HN Whtoripto, Boowy 3 KO GQ, Nore.—In all the above sentences Wy~ Go2é7r would express almost the same meaning. TO Ay SOUWS pth, BoowyB SrO goywras. (Ww Sears) would express almost the same meaning. ‘When they had done their work yesterday, I gave them their pay for the day before yesterday. : wrt BO Whoops, KD Garza, ‘When they work, I will pay them. wrt SO Awsipth, SD gaps. (TRS Searwd.) When they have done their work, I will give them their pay. 32250 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES: In Telugu the negative with pa is not so often used as the negative with the word then in English. An example is added, CS TSowspt (TWiyt), SYsrwWako SoBTrA. (Para. 363.) ‘When he did not come, I sent a message (to him). When Jer is affixed to @Xpth, it means—whenever, Thus— THE io SUSSyBer, SVP SeAwZOA. ‘Whenever I beat my horse, it goes quickly. OSH Dio SASSipaer, hwy Gotardy. (Or TST SowssyBer.) (Para. 549.) ‘Whenever he did not read his lesson, I used to punish him. ‘Various cases of this word are used to express various time relations. Thus @%,23%00 when added to the past relative participle %yé38 means—from the time that, or since; ‘Thus— BH Boor GioPoOwsHy!Iwod, VAY Dyoy soo Sid. Since I began Telugu, many hindrances have kept arising. 9%yt58 affixed to an indefinite relative participle, answers to the English expression—by the time that. Thus— SAIS Bers SAOsyl38, Fo BYOB. By the time that he knows Telugu, his hair will be gray. Biege Saesyess, Fesoares. By the time that the doctor came, he had died. Aw BOA SHyodes8, Bho saire Favsorwa. By the time that I return, you must have tea ready. Aw BHowyese, coos gas Uy amym. (Oud. GoBs.) By the time that I arrived, he was taking his meals.ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 251 Occasionally this form, when followed by a past tense, answers to the English expression—upon (e.g., upon starting). This useof the word had better be avoided by a beginner. Like the word upon in English, this form when thus used, denotes to a certain extent cause. Thus— Be 0% 48 Shoes, cree OS Paw. Upon my going there, he treated me very politely. BH Vaio THY T-khgeosyess, Svat Tsay Taw, Upon my not speaking the truth, the gentleman was angry. TO FFs) WALL, KEKE SeaBarw. Upon the gentleman's being angry, I trembled. The affix S88 attached to an indefinite relative participle has the same meaning as ©%,¢38 attached to an indefinite relative participle. Thus— Bm BHSw, eass Passos Ways. (Cud. GOB.) By the time that I went, he was taking his meals. BS BoBsss, saws ode. He had not come, by the time that I started. Bw VY,As BUSH wer HOY Dare. Upon my going there, he treated me very politely. (d) After—The affixes SHS, Bayt, Orwse and BMY are attached to past relative participles with the meaning after, after that. BW Be SY GAWSHarS, Orv Krag WASH ww, (or 83385, or Os~eo, or BSE.) After I have read this letter, you also may read it. “Ass SQysotoard, BYsomars. (Or BaQbo, oF Brvwito, or “Bae) He went away, after I had come. © SP Gomsswars, SHS. (Or BEGEd, or BIKE, or BSYs) After the work is finished, I will come. ‘The negative form, which is not often used, is expressed as follows :— B8y5 SD dy Boas domssarw, gowr AS SO Jer gaya? After leaving undone the work ordered, how can I give you more?252 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. (2) Duration of time— (@) (i The affix 77 (Para. 888), when attached to the infinitive of averb, means as or while. This form is generally used to express TIME, but occasionally also (like the word as in English) to express condition. This form (except in the case of the word God from Gio to be) is always followed by a principal verb in the past tense, consequently it always has a past signification. ‘Thus— CS5H GB Oar MYT BMA SorDIr~W. . (Time.) As he beat the boy, I also saw it. Aw Bsyr dy Oar? (Time.) While I spoke, did you not hear ? Aw oe Psp gage Dy Sores Ser? (Time.) Did you not see (me), as I gave that money? Dre Ter 2 SY YowsA, (Condition. Not common.) As you came, this work has been accomplished. (ii) The word Got sometimes expresses cAUSE, but generally mix, The principal verb to which it is attached may be put in any tense, consequently 027" may refer to any time. Thus— Bw BO Ow Gots SHH XLT wry Srsse, (Time.) He came while I was at work, and so I did not see him. Bw SO OS Godin SST WLS, (Lime.) Do not trouble me, while I am at work. Bw BH wds* Grodin AY Twys. (Time) ‘You may come, while I am in school tomorrow. BW? Goss* WLY Gone TO Orv oh, wBSI-A. Condition.) As there was a loft in my house, I mounted upon it, and was saved.ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 253 (iii) The past verbal participle of a verb is sometimes prefixed to the word é:ozé7, In this case the principal. verb is always in the past tense; consequently G07 always has a past signification. Thus— Drvt B GIB BY Godnr SQyTr*W. (Time) I arrived, while you hed gone away to that village. arr TH Sp GD) Gotirr, 6 Sraiveo BESA, (Condition.) As you gave me money, that debt has been paid off. Note.—As the forms with 77 are not very commonly used to express cause, a beginner had better use them only in the sense of time. There are several other forms for expressing cause, e.g., the verbal noun with Sy or 8, wg} with the infinitive, etc. (iv) The present verbal participle of a verb is often prefixed to the word Gods, This form denotes T1Mx only. It may refer to either present or imperfect past time. ‘This form represents the action as being in course of performance far more strongly than the simple form in 7. Is may be followed by a principal verb in any tense, whereas the simple form with 7 can be followed by a past tense only. In common conversation the form Giotém preceded by a present verbal participle is far more common than the simple form with 7°, Thus— BS SYK Gow wy VSS. (Or wr Mosse.) While I am writing, do not shake the table. BB Star Bw WGoowirr aro SQ) ys Was, Every day they come, and make a noise, while I am reading. SAS WHY SooU7e Ord GUI wh Jr ALSSA, While he is reading, you must carefully correct his pronunciation. BLS Areboihootsn Ort ASpEIr Oy Tr? Have you ever heard him (while he was) singing?254 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. Daye BHsies Bas SSS Boosie arv ISS? a 7S BORG Srrereniso GAA. GAGS IS? (Cud. SrmYT eS Got38.) (Para. 448.) Yesterday as I was going along the road, you were talking to some stranger. Who was he? Dor qPtessibes Gey Godin SQy Te. He came, while you were at meals. (¥) The negatives of the above forms with 7 are not very frequently used. Two examples are added— WH Woes SStaosey Tao’ sf, Ors BO GEr- yO. (Para. 550.) While you are not giving me the assistance that I require, how can I give you employment. (Para. 363.) GOSH BBs SO Ay TAoy dr, gowr Sd der qazw? ‘As you have not done the work already ordered, how can I give you more? (Para, 522.) (0) The affixes S*7r, a6%§ and S*Se are attached to indefinite relative participles only, and mean—in the time that, or during the time that. (The adjective pronouns 6 and % are sometimes used before these affixes.) ‘Thus— Bw Si TEGSO WAS, Ort OD SSX? Can yot write these sentences, in the time that I read them ? Am sp BA) 8 Om, SaNrtp OdAT ED. (6 HE:) During the time that I was getting him the money, he asked me for it several times. (Lit. Ten times.) Sometimes the affix 57 is almost equivalent to the English word before, which must generally be expressed by the negative verbal participle prefixed to soa%, ‘Thus— Bm Bwhtetmr, Soy. He came, before I started. Lit. Within the time of my starting.ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 255 SP Srrt SBy He SHG, Or Gos BY SF WAT ED BHD SoS. (Or we Sm.) Go home, and fetch those papers, before the gentleman arrives. The word OcSs* (or Goss) in the time that, when placed after an indefinite relative participle, has exactly the same meaning as O77 or sSfg. Thus— BH Bs TSO GAS WosS*, Drv OD Sooo? Can you write these sentences, in the time, that I read them, When oie is affixed to a past relative participle, it has the meaning of when. But it generally implies a more immediate sequence than ©Sy%, and hence sometimes expresses to a certain extent causE. Hence this expression may sometimes be represented in English by «hen, followed by then. Thus— Aw Ssso DIwwoss’, KEK Seakareh, ‘When I was angry, he trembled. AP err GHOSTS, Syards VS, Nese Taz, ‘When you give a surety, then the court will release him. (0) S438 or S08 affixed to a relative participle expressing imper- fect past time, means—as long as, and when affixed to a positive past relative participle, it means—as long as, or as far as. In this case the word @o8 is usually inserted idiomatically before a9)8, Thue— Bo Ty Ry Sap V—, NSPS Gary w. (Or Sk aSoEgo8,) ‘As long as I was writing, he was sleeping. (i.e. All the time that.) Bw BQSosSHwH, Srreysrost Isom, Jeswosada. As far as I went, no one met me in the road. DG SHYoTsj pH, WeHyHE*, Read as far as you know.256 ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES, (d) The affixes GB, Sd, Segowseso, and Hpphs, when attached to a positive indefinite relative participle, have the meaning of until, Thus— Aw 06, Sdarw, Tome Bavgsrs. Until I awake, do not open the doors. Os LOWS, Gh, sS Gotsra, I will stay here, until you call. Boros SHymists, sor gout TeHUsio GIS. (Oud. 0s.) He lived in our house, until the cold weather came. 599. ‘The word &*8*, in the sense of until, is colloquially attached to a positive past relative participle, in which case final is always pronounced like 0, ‘Thus— BSros SHhowM, Sr gots THI GIy w. 600. Nore.—The word S08 (the dative case of €) is sometimes affixed to an indefinite relative participle to express the meaning of—by the time that. ‘This form is used in the Northern Circars only. Thus— Bio gots SHS, Sob gosr wd, Dinner was not ready, by the time that I came home. Bw BO oF, 48 BHH8 sass SBYstonare, By the time that I got up and went there, he had gone away. G01. The negative is expressed by prefixing the adverbial form of the negative verbal participle ending in wot to GoZtsty; but the word Goesz~ is almost always omitted, i.e., it is understood, but not expressed. ‘Thus— OSw GIOrK Voit SE6ow (Gotbiy) Modas. I punished him, in order that henceforth he might not tell lies. TOSS AY Wem, or Tere Bears. ‘They closed the lock gates, in order that the water might not come into the canal.ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 257 Be Ser Sie Bom, Sho¥seOTe, They hindered the boats from going to-day, might not go. .t., 50 that they N.B.—The affix eX or w= may in every instance be used instead of ©432, but it is not so common. 602. In addition to the above meanings the word ©439 sometimes has the meaning of that, to introduce the words of another speaker, etc. Thus— DB VOSWS* ars Weer VOWS y, BH Tres. ‘He said that it rained hard in Bunder yesterday. Such kind of sentences, being noun sentences, will be explained in the next chapter. 603. ‘The various sentences and phrases used to express time are exhibited in the following examples :— Bio BoBwsows, SQyT. (Or S08, Grogs.) Para: 598, He came, before I had started. (Or—ere.) Bw Booster, Saya. (Ur O's.) Para. 598, He came, before I had started. (Lit. Within the time of my starting.) Bw BwoFbosy38, saow TSS. (Or SI.) Para, 598, By the time that I started, he had not come. BR Be Swsr Godin, SQywes, Para. 598. He came, while I was starting. (Or—as I started.) Bw BeoAows Gy Spits, (Cud. Godssyes,) SOs. (Or BwB Versys.) Para. 598. He came, when I was starting. Aw BooBes Bobs Saywre, (Or Sfv%, S824.) Para. 598, He came. directly I had started. (Or—the moment that.) 33258. ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. Bw Bods, Saw. (Or Based *S, Bootosty 78.) Paras, 598, 474. Bee also para. 490. He will come, as soon as I have started. Bao. BwvAessyes SyT es. (Sometimes also BwAssos 6.) Para. 598. He came, when I had started. Aw Bootesiiooard BQH. (Or Bio, Ooreseo, Bw.) Para. 598. He came, after I had started. Bao WELRsyar, SEL wees Ghywe. Para, 598. ‘Whenever I examined them, they gave a good examination. BH uae BQ BA STS, ors © Gxt EAs Xoo? (Or say odes, say Wi HYG.) Para. 598. Can you write that letter, within the time of my going and returning from the Bazaar? (Or—During the interval of.) BH SAW, dF GK GosSGAS. (Or Sogosix, spss, SBA.) Para. 598. ‘You must stay here, until Leome. (Or—till.) Bi Serra wy oSapk (Cud. GoASodsiaopp'.) DY GROHSORSH. (Or SOHAL, Nor4 ANTAL.) Para. 598. As long as I am talking, you must be silent. ‘The same meaning may also be expressed by using the indefinite relative participle followed by the word 8%. Thus— Bw Sregrrmibosy SSD, AY GIO Sora, Derr BPSHGHOO, CK BArs OG Sahoo alesororsorwy ww. Para. 596, Since you went, I have been looking out for you daily.ON ADVERBIAL SENTENCES. 259 604. _In addition to the above adverbial sontences and phrases expressing time, the three following kinds of expressions must be remembered:— (1) Ba SQ, Toss XowoBH vowsA. Para. 504. It is two hours, since I came. 605. (2) BABS SHys sores Stes, Berke. (Or sass SQ mars Stevo Bootors.) I started three days after he had arrived. 606. (3) GY serve Stored aos Sawer, Beto. (ie, Say esr.) T had started three days before he came. Lit, As they ssid— “‘he will come in three days "—I started. ‘The same meaning may also be expressed as follows :— BASS TST NK Sores SerO¥ Srosorre Boo Beara, I started three days before his arrival. —— > ée——_260 . ON NOUN SENTENCES. CHAPTER XVI. ON NOUN SENTENCES. 607. This chapter treats of such subordinate sentences as are called in analysis NOUN SENTENCES, because they occupy the position of nouns. 608. In English noun sentences are generally introduced by the conjune- tion that, e.g., He said, that he would not come. ‘The conjunction that is however, often understood, and not expressed, e.g., He said, he would “not come. ~ 609. ‘This chapter is divided into five parte as follows :—Part I. On noun sentences which in English are not introduced by the conjunction that, expressed or understood. Pan II. On noun sentences which in English are introduced by the conjunction that, expressed or understood. Parr ITI. On noun sentences involving the repetition of words previously spoken or yritten. Parr IV. On noun sentences ending with the affix ©43 or wig, Panr V. On idiomatic uses of the words ©, 0%, oA, Bo, and ws7. PART I. ON NOUN SENTENCES WHICH IN ENGLISH ARE NOT INTRODUCED BY THE CONJUNCTION that, EXPRESSED OR UNDERSTOOD. 610. The principal instances in which noun sentences are used in English without being introduced by the conjunction that expressed or understood, are when they consist of—(1) AN INDIRECT INTERROGATION— or—(2) A DOUBTFUL ALTERNATIVE. (1) On Noun Sentences consisting of an Indirect Interrogation. 611. In English a noun sentence consisting of an indirect interrogation is introduced by some interrogative pronoun or interrogative adverb, eg., who, where, when, ete. Thus— How he gets so much money, is wonderful. Find out where he went. 612. In Telugu a noun sentence consisting of an indirect interrogation ends in “*, and contains the pronoun )&é% or some kindred word. Allusion has already been made to sentences of this kind in para. 561.ON NOUN SENTENCES. 281 613. A sentence expressing indirect interrogation may both in ‘Telugu and English occupy the place of SUBJECT or of onECT. Thus— SoHE Wo ASy SorM SiROs, VHLLESurr anys. How he gets so much money is wonderful—or—It is wonderful how he gets so much money. (Subject), Sas IW,A8 BLT, INCE Bowe. Where he went is not known to any one—or—It is not known to any one where he went. (Subject.) DBAs BYTE, VHF. Find out where he went. (Object.) Dox SHYT, rd wT. Go and see how many have come. (Lit, Having seen, come.) (Object.) DSB Bio Sno SD Brars*, Bip. ‘Tell (me) what work you did yesterday. (Odject.) 614. In sentences of this kind the word SoX® is sometimes idiomatic- ally inserted, and the noun sentence put in aPPostriox to it. ‘Thus— SIGS TS GNIBAS IS Gays, w HoAB Orww Beosos? Do you know (that thing, namely,) to whom he will give his daughter? DHS TB, SHS INA BOE, 6 Sono ved. Find out (that thing, namely,) where he went last night. (2) On Noun Sentences consisting of a Doubtful Alternative. 615. In sentences of this kind in English the first alternative is intro- duced by the word whether, and the second by the word or. In Telugu both alternatives are terminated with **, A sentence consisting of a doubtful alternative may both in Telugu and English occupy the position of susszct or opsect. In Telugu it may also be put in APPOSITION to SoX8, Thus— SEOs GB BES EATS" Bet, Sodsrisr saya. (Or SyRwB BOB. See para. 546.) Whether he wrote that letter or not is doubtful—or—It is doubtful whether he wrote that letter or not. (Subject.)262 ON NOUN SENTENCES. BaHS SIZE, WES (or BS), rar Waywross, (Or 8 37B.) I cannot tell for certain whether he will come or not. (Odject.) SAS SE WSs, Soe, WH BOawes. I do not know whether he is her grandfather or father. SIL © Xp gaye, gsce, © SoXB torgrr Bsywroas. I cannot tell for certain (that thing, namely) whether he will give the money or not. (Apposition.) PART II. ON NOUN SENTENCES WHICH IN ENGLISH ARE INTRODUCED BY THE CONJUNCTION that, EXPRESSED OR UNDERSTOOD. 616. A noun sentence, introduced in English by the conjunction that expressed or understood, is generally rendered in Telugu by a corre- sponding noun sentence, ending with the word ©®. Both in Telugu and in English such noun sentences may occupy the position of suBsRcT, or of oBsEcT, or may be put in APPostTion to some other noun. Thus— 617. (1) scowe rsp gagean 088 Bensoas. (i.e, Se .) ‘That he did not pay that money is known to all—or—It is known to all that he did not pay that money. Here the noun sentence occupies the position of subject to the verb Bessioxas. The same meaning might be expressed thus—Baos o 2s» QSQO SoNB (or GSLOB) VOSS Beosay, (Para. 598.) Or sabow © By QAQy S*sessseo, (Para. 470.) 618. 2) SESS Hy SH WD OIA. (ie, SAT OA.) heard that he came yesterday. Here the noun sentence occupies the position of object to the verb Dwys. ‘The same meaning might be expressed thus—SSiS Dxjy SQyS SoNB O57, (Para. 545.) G19. (8) BABS Swoon DIrAsO Ore8 SAV so iyo? Have you any confidence that he wiil give his assistance ? Here the noun sentence is put in apposition to the noun Bagveo,ON NOUN SENTENCES. 263, On the word ©. 620. Although the word &9 generally occurs in Telugu where the con- junction that is used in English, yet the student must not therefore suppose that the one is the exact equivalent of the other. The word #2 is in reality the past verbal participle of © (to say), and its use in ‘Telugu may be compared with the usd of the word saying in old English. (Compare Joshua vit. 4; x. 6, 17; St. Luke xv. 2, 3, etc.) Para, 496. 621. Occasionally © retains its full paRricrPraL signification, as in the sentence—BdoS Gags GAGE. (Having said “I will give”—he did not give.) But in the great majority of cases © may be practically regarded as the equivalent of inverted commas in direct narration or the conjunction “ that” in indirect narration. OH, A8 Bg WS* Bry Te. He said to me, “ Don't go there.” Orr Mxsrreoeh SQyrdo DD, CHr3, Soresarss SQywras, Having heard that your son had come, I have come to see him. Bao BH SAN SYMTwWay SQYSB. A message came, that he would come tomorrow. 3th F AF TTS TH S*wew, I do not think, that he wrote that letter. Soo SSBOTYOSD Owss Som? Do you think that it will rain? 622, When a noun sentence introduced by the conjunction that is the subject to the verb To BE, it must be translated into Telugu by a verbal noun, Thus— ‘That a man should tell a lie, is sinful—or—It is sinful that a man should tell a lie. SaAsirraessios srs, ‘That a man should be angry without cause, is foolish. Dan, Seatarr> H*SHzei BO Tes,ON NOUN SENTENCES. On a Succession of Noun Sentences. 623. When several noun sentences terminated with ©® are attached to each other, the conjunction Qy is added to ©. Thus— SAS CHAS Bray, wre GB,A8 SHO OT AG. I heard that he would go there, and that they would come here. PART III. ON NOUN SENTENCES INVOLVING THE REPETITION OF WORDS PREVIOUSLY SPOKEN OR WRITTEN. 624. In Telugu and in English, many noun sentences are such as involve the repetition of words previously spoken or written. Such sentences depend to so large an extent upon the contert, and the circumstances under which they are uttered, that practice alone will teach the student how to use them correctly. The following remarks, however, will be found useful. 625. Sentences of the kind now under consideration may be classed under the four following heads :— First. ON REPEATING A STATEMENT made by a previous speaker. Secondly. ON GIVING A MESSAGE (not containing an order) to one person, with a command to repeat it to another person for whom the message is intended. Thirdly. OX GIVING AN ORDER to one person, with a command to repeat it to another person on whom the order is enjoined. Fourthly. ON REPEATING AN ORDER issued by a previous speaker. 626. N.B.—In the examples used in this chapter the letters A, B, C, D, E, are placed after some words to represent different persons. Of those letters A always represents the present speaker, and B the person now addressed by A. (D On repeating a Statement made by a previous Speaker. 627. In English, in sentences of this kind, the form called the 1NDIRECT NARRATION is most commonly used. ‘Thus— ‘When I (A) called him (C), he (0) said that he (C) would not come.270 ON NOUN SENTENCES. WSO Kory Wsicoxes Doown wsas* Byoa. Please tell him (C) that I (A) will not give him (C) any assistance. SOT DSy SF GIS SOIT GRS* BSy, Tell her (C) that the gentleman (D) sent the letter yesterday. dy WSS DOH DPA sor Dd SMT H XAT Gt Drees AH Samy Setaosro Hasso | 5o85* Bay. Tell your father (C) that a6 you (B) left school without taking leave from me (A), I (A) will not henceforth give you (B) any assistance. SSMS BH SAV Bdy. Say that the gentleman will come tomorrow. oth gow TSSD Bip. Say that the mail has not yet arrived. (ill) On giving an order to one person, with a command to repeat it to another person on whom the order is enjoined. 638. In English sentences of this kind the subordinate verb is—either () compounded with the AUXILIARY must or ought,—or (2) put in the “INFINITIVE Moo. Thus— ‘Tell the carpenter (C) that he (C) must come tomorrow—or—Tell the carpenter (C) to come tomorrow. In Telugu also the subordinate verb may be expressed in two ways as follows :— 639. (1) By the avamiany SBS or SORA, Thus— Searre BH TSoWIO Bipor—SH TSoWAO SH wast Bay. Lit. The carpenter must come tomorrow, thus say—or—He must come tomorrow, thus say to the carpenter. 640. @) By the mrerative oop. In this case, that form only of the imperative is used which ends in So, a.g., S¢oso, r/cwsoo, Uy.ama ON NOUN SBNTBNCES. Inthe Cuddapah district, the form used in the above sentence would be. Soe Bey. But in the Northern Circare the form in #9 is.com- monly used for both singular and plural. 642. N.B.—In English sentences of this kind, in narrative writings (and sometimes even in conversation) the imperative mood is used in the subordinate sentence, as in Telugu. Thue— “Say unto him—Take heed, and be quiet,” oto, Iseiab vil. 4. “Tell this people—Hear ye indeed,” etc. Isaiah vi. 9. (IV) On repeating an order issued by a previous speaker, 643, In English sentences of this kind, either of the two following forms may be used, namely—(1) The verb to say, followed by a subordinate verb compounded with the AUXILIARY must or ought. (2) The verb to tell, followed by an INFINITIVE Moop. Thus— The gentleman said that you must do that work—or—The gentle- man told you to do that work. - 644. In Telugu the subordinate verb may be expressed either—(1) Bya verb compounded with the avxtLiany S8a or SoRSB—or—(2) By an IMPERATIVE Moo. Thus— S757 DF w 5D Passerwarmry ds. (Or Bassorweso BEy WS.) —or—B™S7TH Dy F SO Hawmsys. Or PasmieN Bdywr.) EXaMpces. SWB Nii SIPS Ty. The gentleman told you not to talk sPagary ce. Diy ayy: He told you to go, DW MGA TORT. He said that you must come quickly. Dr © AFI GNA, BH Sossok*ssn Byres. He said that you must write that letter, and send it tomorrow,ON NOUN SENTENCES. 273 DNy G WE sO godis BRITA BMA a. He told you to take that box to their house. SYard, CH Saysomo BIS* Baysres. (8883 @ADaG wd.) He told the maty to tell the carpenter to come tomorrow. 645, N.B.—In English sentences of this kind, in narrative writings (and sometimes even in conversation) the IMPERATIVE MooD is used in the subordinate sentence, as in Telugu. ‘Thus— “Saul said unto the Kenites—go, depart,” etc. (1 Sam. xv. 6.) “He said—Depart, for I will send thee,” etc. (Acts xxm. 21.) 646. When the word “order” is used in the preceding headings (see para. 625), it must be considered as including such INVITATIONS, CHALLENGES, etc., as take an imperative form. Thus— SoS gol BQ, He Aaso So FlawNk VO Wy. (Or WSBSD.) Go to his house, and ask him to come to dinner this evening. “He said to David—come to me,” etc. (1 Samuel xvit. 44.) PART IV. ON NOUN SENTENCES ENDING WITH THE AFFIX ©jp OR ep. 647, A noun sentence, introduced in English by the conjunction that, is sometimes expressed in Telugu by a subordinate sentence, terminated by a relative participle with the affix 33) or ©4307, instead of by an indicative mood with © attached to it. The two forms are in many cases interchangeable, and practice will soon teach the student when to use one form in preference to the other. It may, however, be remarked that the form with ©} usually expresses a certain degree of doubt (See para. 609.) EXAMPLes. SIS GUA8 Up OYA, (Or TSO.) T heard that he has not come here. St THE G SD Vorsiprr Soar? (Or VoUweD.) Do you think that that work has been finished by this time ? 35.274 ON NOUN SENTENCES. SAB RSet S08. (Or SEIS.) I think that he has gone mad. SOLS Nis. SHY TW BORH. (Or SQW.) I knew that he came yesterday. DSBS BASS Troms Awipnr Yard SQYS8. (Or WR sD.) A report came that he died yesterday. SUH AGGOD SK SHyLy BTW. (Or Swywry 8.) ‘They said that the gentleman was coming from England. BIS BOS JSG BBs? (Or BYT UO.) Who said that he had gone? rH AH GorB, 2F STONY SpH Qh TrasayH G2) wes. Ramaswami said, that last night they caught a thief. AY Tioarsoors SpA, NoVisw Losi a Oxy wras By, A boy said that you caught hold of a cobra, and squeezed out its poison. When used with the indefinite relative participle it expresses pro- bability. 648. sentences. Thus— ws SHhbbr Gx, 8. Rain will likely come—it appears as if rain would come. On the words wt and GD By». The words &%y4» and @D “S&ystp are often used in complicated SIMH BH SHQly Tse Bows. (ie, SAW WydD.) Rama (C) said, that the gentleman (D) said, that he (D) would come tomorrow. Lif—Rama (C) said that the gentleman (D) said—" I (D) will come tomorrow.”ON NOUN SENTENCES, 205 MSM arw GOA SH WANY Sed Bhp Vrsswo TS BRT, Rama (C) told me (A), that the gentleman (D) said, that the groom (E) had returned. WH Mos SH SayPip Deyo. ‘He (C) said, that he (C) had told the milkman (D) to come tomorrow. Q. DH Dey Arco Goo P*aTs Jowswo oS? As Shay dg TSR Sy SMTA Sd FS golls SSyip Dye AY GH,As BYNrs. e Why did you not come to supper yesterday evening? A. Subbayya came to me and said that the Munsiff told me to come to his house, and so I went there. Dr 0S BLS awowy py Bays. ‘He said, that you said, that you would go to Bunder. Art & Ses dove gao_ip wog js Taw, The peon (C} said, that you (B) said, that you (B) would pay the salaries today. (Lit. That you (B) said—I (B) will pay ete.) DY GUO GA Baoguwy se orvsodyno WI? Bhar, Ramaswami (C) told me (A) that you (B) said that henceforth you (B) would not do any work. Lit. That you (B) said— I (B) will not do any work. SIG Diy THEY THT. He (C) said that the gentleman (D) told you (B) to come. GALS MH Harr, CH BHO BAyspp Ow so. I heard that he told the groom to go tomorrow. Der Say Say iy Bsywes NY BTA, ‘He said that you told me to go, and so I went.276 ON NOUN SENTENCES. PART V. ON IDIOMATIC USES OF THE WORDS wd, OS, OSB, Yb, Vs. (2) Idiomatic uses of ©, 649. (a) The word 9 is used, where in English the word namely is used. Thus— HOW VA, MOY OD, Bens OD, ky VA, Trevor Toren EXD —or_HHH, ISH, BH, SHY wN Teor Boren eid. ‘There are four colours, namely—black, red, white and yellow. Bors PSchors SVYsw GXYFSw VO Gwe Bors DG. In the Telugu language verbs are of two kinds, namely, transitive and intransitive, 650. (6) The word ©® is used idiomatically a8 follows — Molar ON Si Giso Trovsioo ¥fxw MO Byars vO BO By Pi satin hogaws. It is difficult to obtain the reputation that one is a good man, but easy to get the name that one is abad man. Lit. (He is) a good man—thus the praise to obtain is difficult—or—It is difficult to obtain the praise, namely,—(he is) @ good man. 651. —(c)_ In some sentences the word © is used idiomatically to express reason. In most of these instances © may be translated by the words thinking, considering, seeing, as, because. Asoraa schon gd. ‘Thinking that he was a poor man, I gave him a rupee. BWW Lada, As he was only a child, I pardoned him. OPH Ty Hips Farr ON shosifooa es, ‘Thinking you would perhaps beat him, he rsa away.ON NOUN SENTiNCES. att 652. (d) When followed by a verb expressing fear, ©® preceded by Sas~ is equivalent to the English expression lest. Thus— Sor Ds arth SOS rsa Od wer sd&ars. (Or BOYS YSar.) I greatly feared, lest our child would die. (© The word ©, is used idiomatically with the word SB, to express intention or purpose as follows:— BH DoSpa SrsTGsO noF,.H E*esiioary 2, He greaily desires to see you. Lit. Self must see you, thus he) greatly desires. BB.A8 TSB Ter KdoGy soo Tegary s. He is making a great effort to come here. Boiiey CH BESVSO Gry so, We intend to go tomorrow. (2) Idiomatic uses of wo. 654. (a) ‘The word © (che indefinite relative participle of 3) is used in Telugu, where in English we use the words—named, called, or termed. Thus— DE Krys OS Tre The king named Vikramarka. Doss OD SEs. ‘The town called Bunder. WSs OS OKs. ‘The disease termed sin. 655. (b) The word 73 is also used idiomatically to attach a sentence to a noun, in order to give an explanation of that noun. (Instead of © the particle © is also sometimes used. See para. 619.) Thus— BT Gob, vio BY HQyOws Yaosods wes Sastonws, Lit. ‘They went away from a fear which said—If we remain in this village, we shall die from want of food—i.e—They went away from fear that if they remained in this village, they would die from want of food.278 ON NOUN SENTENCES. WH SAYS Og MCT DSypOrT OF NIGoTS wsDs dag BSyaFoow a, I did not teach him owing to # pride which said—Bhall I teach to others the learning which I have acquired’—i.e.—I did not teach him through a feeling of pride, that I ought not to teach to others the learning which I had acquired. 656. (c) ‘The word @% is also used idiomatically with the words Sorbo, SssrrarWso, ete., as follows:— OSes BOA SAAS ore SST. Do not believe the report that he will retum. Lit. Do not believe the word which says—“ He will return.” (3) Idiomatic uses of #8. 657. (a) ‘The word ©38 (the compound noun in 8 formed from ©, the indefinite relative participle of ©) is used as follows:— WPEMAB—BHMYTOA WAP saraiy, TAMGSORWA Darsgyr SP asessSooiioy. (Para, 383.) That which is called sin is—doing that which we ought not to do, and not doing that which we ought to do. 658, (8) The word @A is also sometimes elegantly added to a verbal noun, without materially altering its meaning. It may be com- pared to the English expression—the fact of. ‘Thus— Dr SOSA G Shore Fa, ore Tassossro$ mo 580 BowWwSty WS, The fact of your behaving properly is for your own advantage, and for nothing else. (4) Idiomatic uses of wot. 659. (a) The word %0% (the conditional form of ©) is often used idiomatically to introduce the words of a speaker or writer. When thus used, the subject to ©0%€) is never expressed, but it may be con- sidered to be JSBS* any one. Thus—OS% Ado SAW ow—ON NOUN SENTENCES. 279 literally translated would be—If any one say, what did he write? This is equivalent to—He worote as follows. The following example illustrates the use of this expression :— VS Soo ByWsoh, bY o BW goss Swero By, WBS, PasoTroises BBA BID vss, 2 Bagh Sowa GWA MH. (Or GSQSO Bye.) What he said was as follows—‘ If you do not take that box home, and repair it, and bring it again this evening, I will not give you a farthing even,” (thus he said). 660. Instead of saying Sd Sno DRywrtot—we may also say— SAHT BRA Sxvo%. This literally translated would be—What (was) that which he said? if any one say. This equals in English— What he said was as follows. 661. (b) The word ©&0% is also idiomatically attached to such words as Sas, Serr, a\sipts, I8,2, efc., and may be translated into English by the words—as follows. Thus— wT Wags Ssvob, My opinion is as follows. (Lit. What is my opinion ? if any one say.) Davifises SOS SOs Wrohgares, SS Tels OBS, AD Pots. VB Goerxobs, He who interferes in a matter which does not concern him, will suffer harm, like the monkey which drew out the nail. That was as follows. (Lit, If any one say—how was that ?) BE GV IHsob, AShoagn O48 Show BOS Gsya, ‘Their house is on the south side of Gopalaswami’s temple, Lit. If any one say, where is their house ?—It is on the south side of Gopalaswami’s temple. i Stee Sys ISptots, SKeo sarveh Noto’. ‘Today the unlucky period is at 3 p.m.280 + ON NOUN SENTENCES. 662. (c) In the same manner, 0% is sometimes affixed to the words DoS and IoxMH BS; as Jo%¥o%, Jo Bsso%. This expression literally means—Why ? if any one say. It equals the English word because. This form is always used at the end of sentence, to introduce the CAUSE or REASON of the circumstance mentioned in that sentence- Thus— BM As_ TS goss SHYT; JowsWow, wr8 Oy weOs Were WHIT yo. (Biot God.) I went to their house yesterday, because they were holding the birth festival of their son. 663. The student must be careful not to use the words Joa%¥o@ and does Bs0~% too often where in English for or because would be used. ‘They are not very often used in common conversation, and the Telugu idiom generally requires X#8, and reverses the order of the English sentence. Thus— Aw BS OSyarOs Wosro WHIMTM XAT TO golds Bors, (5) Idiomatic uses of wS7. 664. The word wm, from 2% fo say, literally means—As any one says, It is used idiomatically in the following ways :— 66! . (a) When asking the meaning of a word. Thus— DI GWeso ww Sols? What is the meaning of the word SUWs? Lit. says DTS, what is it? 8 any one- 666. This might also be expressed as follows :— DI Gio OFS Serres OF a0? What is the meaning of the word (called) S¥*Gwss? 667. N.B.—Sometimes instead of @X7, the word 80% is used; as DIT YSseo Got Saves?ON NOUN SENTENCES. 281 668. (8) The word @*7™ is used, where in English we commonly use the expression—that is, In writing this is usually represented by the letters, i. ‘Thus— Ripe GKTr SyParm, Iromyow BH. Krishna, é.c., the black one, is a god of the Hindus. 669. (¢) The word @7™ is used, as already stated (para.) 606.) in sen- tences expressing time. ‘Thus— eden EH SAixne BBs. I started the day before he came. Lit. As they said, “He will come tomorrow,” I started. 36282 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION. CHAPTER XVII. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION. On proper names. 670, Amongst the Telugu people, the surname or Go’8322 is always put first, in the genitive case, and is generally the name of a village. The personal name or && (anawering to the English Christian name) is that by which the person is always called, and is generally the name of a God or Goddess; us SH sow Fy Lawy (from the village 257%, 20.) ‘The whole family are termed 3% sary ea. On giving answers, 671. The following remarks on giving answers will be found useful :— 672, (1) Ifa question is put with a noux—as Oth Drow? Is he @ Brahman?—the answer is generally given by repeating the noun; as CHO Ves. By Aye Te, No. 673. (2) If a question is put with a vern—as ecos BQO? Has he gone ?—the answer is given by repeating the verb; as SQW. Yea, BES*, (or abbreviated) Be. No, Q-% SATO? Will you come? Saya. Yes. Tr. No. 674. FH also is used in the sense of yes; and frequently also such words as 8008 good, D¥so your will, ete. (Para. 821.)MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION. (3) The following idiomatic answers must be noticed :— Q. Wt INOD BOOT ? Whom did he call? A. Bay Te, HoHN|AAG. (The subject of Ws is Seis» under- stood.) Not me, (but) you. Q. 6 BO Asv Baar? ‘Who did that work? A, Ba Tee, sree. (The subject of FS is Waso2sso understood.) Not I, (but) he. On blessing and cursing. 676. To express a WISH or BENEDICTION, the word 78 is affixed to the indefinite tense. Thus— . SaHS SHyworrN! ‘Would that he might come !~or—May he come! Dr Barites Yeoroaerry | May you be happy! 677. To express a cuRsE, the infinitive movd is used. ‘The final letter is generally lengthened. ‘Thus— 2 Sos Br! May your family perish ! & gois* 28% Bovsr! May weeds grow in your house! On certain affixes. 678. ‘The affix S% attached to numerals, equals the English expression —at the rate of. Thus— TEE SoA Vorsronyen FIQTSA, You must give them ut the rate of three rupees.284 MISCELLANEOUS INVORMATION. Servo! CoB DAVeswey GsyWrw, They sell at the rate of five books for a rupee. 679. ‘The aftix zs denotes quantity (inside measurement), like the word ful in the English word bagful; as ees a bottleful, OSes an ell-long, Xo a basket-ful. Nouns ending in drop this syllable when adding Je; as 8°20, Sa a double-handful. 680. The affix B08 denotes size (outside measurement), or greatness of position. ‘Thus— 8 HOR ATG srerw GAs, ‘That man is as tall as a wall. Dr Wott BH, we Qa? If such a person as you speak, of course he will listen. 681. ‘The word Xz, shortened for “Fr (the third person singular neuter of the tense SAS from ©) literally means—Is it not su’ It is used to invite assent to a well-known fact or statement, and may be represented in English by such an expression as—You know. Thus— CBee SQ TAK, He has come, you know. Lit. He has come. Is it not so? 682. ‘The word Braen or Brsteom added to a word, means, I sup- pose. Thus— SAS BY Treaster, I suppose he has gone. 683. The word “os is short for SoresoMs~ (lovk), which is a yram- matical form of %o~%, It is often used to enforce what the speaker has said. ‘Thus— Dr Sore WSS, Masood. (Para. 63.) . Look! “You must ccme quickly—or—You really must come quickly. : GB Tree WA YAN, HO, This is-really very unjust.MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION. 285 684, "The word @é (vu, Wot) affixed to a word, means—They say— or—It—is said. Thus— BG SazKbo. He will come, they say. 685. The word 8 (or Go&) the imperative of Sie, is used as an aflix to express certainty of encouragement, ‘Thus— 8H sm, 3 I will certainly come tomorrow. 3 50 BH Baym, Bod. I will certainly do that work tomorrow. Onomatopeia terms. wO¥Seasven, 686. In Telugu, it is very common to use certain words which have no actual meaning, but which represent some particular sound, or some particular sensation, They may be compared with such English expres- sions as crack, bang, whiz, click, slap-dash, helter-skelter, etc. In many instances these words can only be rendered in English by using adverbs, and in some instances they cannot be expressed, but must be omitted. ‘Thus— : OHS JowwS SKSY SKB H? ‘Why are you laughing so loud there? Bm BOOS pth, KBE SBT eh, When I called him, he trembled all over. TANS Gas FHS SodSgre, (Para, 311.) He got into an awful passion with me. In the same manner are used 8268, XnXv, Foaoyiond, ese Bo, BIBD, XN, DY WW, ete.286 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION. 687. These words are sometimes turned into verbs by adding et, ©%, S78, Ry, or Sp; as PUPVAOAD or HI PWore, ete. Thus— Bi PMermiior SQYTS- You have come looking very spick and span. 688. A Telugu word is sometimes repeated, the first consonant, if short, being changed into A, and, if long, into A. ‘This expression sometimes implies a certain amount of disrespect. Thus— creo BF, Aes BF. There is no milk, or anything of the sort. yoo 8H, ASeo By. There are no sticks, or anything of the kind. 689. In Telugu there are certain words, each of which has a distinct meaning, but which, when coupled together, have a peculiar idiomatic meaning. Such expressions resemble the English expressions house and home, wear and tear, bag and baggage, rack and ruin, ete. Thus— SDE geo TRO BH, Ser BOs Meer Garis? He has neither house nor home. How can we give him our daughter? wBDE Sasing! VIS Ob SEXowres. (After Smo supply 5,5.) He is not in want, sir. He has some landed property. 690. In the same manner are used 2¢7° Seer, DR’ sah, tS BOTW? (4.) (Paras. 653, 681.) SrwyS GoW BrHIMHs rr Moss BLO. (Paras. 145, 8,48 Soo HARMS BPA? [654.) - WH Tos* —WAoMoijaooy ays NOwrlowostswsawod, (Paras. 304, 476.) & 29% SHSo ceo Garo? (Para, 377.) ar. BD Sot ory, BRO GN oorly, FAW OH.eosy Gary tod. 8 20 WY, Nar, eo? (Para. 385.) God WOH Tre, Bod Vara wrth, TAPS GiB. WH LO DwyMoeror, Yorgarsies Tay? PES Layers Tors 1A Ges sober Ee, &O DwyPodowwr 8. (Paras. 583, 407.) 2D Spy Sess Heir, Deagsor? (Para. 383.) WSS TH, Orgs Tso’. THSHA BOR GoBAy, TV oss’ DMW)PVoe-09? (Para. 491.) Darairates Baseesseses 38 SY, Siete O25 Sa, (Para. 368.) BB Gary, Bdomm, sso awoeiaes sodas? (Para. 592.) Sty BoHeisoo MONLY Tasitodoy, 8%. (Para, 219.) ATH Sod, WD Srrosio VHS SPronwas Ich PSB, VIZOY coi Dhara’ vos Hswmn ar WH SoStS Bh Gy h. (Paras, 531, 186, 560.) VFWO4, BOR Boddy, BT! Vd gasvG ard* awe BR Gary. (Paras. 491, 447.) G8 Be SOKA SawQod. ard B¥bsys, SAsars BP wor? (Para. 228.) BRbspeh, Sssarss BPH md, SAyowye, aod Dew SQYTA. Baarssoh Ghobo Gi Sed? (Para. 199.) BaarSihod Bors, OWpAwoN SSVI, FSV Vato MOD TETBG WD, GHYE*W HN, Ti ALK RS, WEF BESMYw, Godsivgodasory, Suse Gx, d.are GENERAL EXERCISES. 293, BSPIOD WTO SSXOT? (Para. 460.) Bi BIOs SESKv wd Syrereny A*ors8 SE, Sw. (6.) (Para. 466.) Baws awh AHO, FSCVHS ATSyor? (Para. 203.) GBY,, VB, AD’ w~D8 Troe Fsxw GSB. Rt ePS88 PaHS2y? UHI, BF Bow sore Gy wr? » RF ereS88 Sorts shdoeo Gis So8, (Pura. 377.) RéoS85* Boos Gots? (Para. 306. 1.) TASS SUOAS AGP God TD Gow OS Sv Gowsd. sDADROo Sostoe Fomor dowar, ‘Ghonve3? (Para. 535.) . Mews wd gs Goxoost WrPTeassor> Gods. SaUsN ww Spots? [(Para. 225.) . Garsrahes PHow BHYSS WSosowr Gow APE soe, BnSO wooo wossosar? (Para. 301.) A¥S* Gy Spt, SxoK BI S*SOE OAK. AEs SH, BootHboxs SOKO. GY. SH Ay osNors, AES BAB, Rmshgoritinar Sey) I7D Dar? DMMBYOOW Sr Tio TB SA Gomar? Saois! Sa sess, oS. (8.) SO Hr GSI Iejy Br VorOaror? (Para. 219.) er Soy Sora. Wyo, wPkSarAy? (9.) Dosh Krvar Srr-OarA. BID Ir Sips txor? (Para. 460.) . Sow BR, Spins S708. (Paras, 616, 441.) (C.) got aBvagtlo TomosidismrsMSoDs SoRsier. i geo ISEB? (Para. 425.) a¥ Ooxgrea. dos Bd vrasDoNaiv. (Para. 383.) gO SHH Sao? BY © BS Gry ov? (Para. 181) QBS GAY GAY tho TA Goiptho SATA. (Para. 273.) gO wee FS gewKa, SAGO Bowazyor? (Para. 681.)204 GENERAL EXERCISES. SA Seven somssivoard, BIS Dowdzw. — Woihy so OY Byer gaybo? Sow Vont wrsronv’ BB) 7A Qdyt SB toh ono’ SHS GSK. (Paras. 536, 110.) DB,HOD BSD Sd? WRSxoaIod. DASE G48 Jos Sorvixes? (Para. 326.) 6% S*xov0d. Rwy Ao GH,_AMOD alerr SAQA? . TE HLS* BHT, Biryw. SoS RA GAZor, HE Gayor? (10.) (Para. 542.) . My Bly GSS MATE, SD, aayrazto? SHS VB Soo BawysSas? (Para. 454.) rast gioy J, YOR, Boys Sra IK, Asydonos SB, 11. (Para. 494.) OS TVwo Jos Toi GossSao? . SoS, SD Sose9rh, Kore Bowryw WA Bos God, od MoOB, 8 deer GitoB0B, JoAsitar? . SoA wT Sof HH sifxig> GowsSGa, (Para. 513.) © Rei soo Seif GoAS, mrad’ so sasrr Ta;6? . BSW GOI BHLYVOS, GSarYUS Boke So2ad3Lo. 33 & a SRST & ioify so Aare SIS* so Baro? (Vizag. B'25a°0%.) (Para. 202.) . Whoo OP GHD, SorrdTrT? wrasse, Bi SD SireSBYWHy MBS GH, Sore? Ste KOs dons, Soe? (Para. 519.) . Mgt GB, Wr Baogtod. S*wkrOs Gory}, sods. Sets Gong, surge Bays, vB csr? - Gor BT SDA SAT od, SVN Wir sosssas. SOSSSH Sor Goo Sor Dayo? SAAT EHOITD Gorsssio¥ow Ass Bip Go's, Sows NAR.# ge ge Spe po ps ps ye y 2 2 ye GENERAL EXERCISES, 295 BY Heys Too, Siw? sip Hoh, GAGs? (12) Bo Sor TOS Sos. A. yysowG, wee Toxo Gobvo8. BW Hiyxoo How}, Sys cree WSs 5x08, OHMS. 808 HH SB—wd Sryt oY Bos |xys. Ort Dry w? (Para. 649, 272.) Gass Bx Ode, weds exSono? . SoS Lod VHB, vod S72; wHoorso Wo AGT oF Moy soo VWF Tom, Vos Asn Gotovo8, (D.) w8ORPODS Hosea . Bt BAB Dr Voy Jsipt gays? werBon SEK Vowssitoars. (Para. 821.) . wirBon SEL Tispes Waste? Goer Ayers Ba; Vows SG) Test ws ss. QSp “WY Gly MP Gh Sfwoot af Wyss? Bo Stross, BEBod, 200% Sioa wswrweoooo she i? GUS ¥&. (Paras. 433, 687.) ASBSE SE GS Wvsew7e gaz? (13.) (Para, 199.) Dugot arOar8 FOS gays WP Knot OYomotieisssst Serres. (Paras. 199, 466.) gota? Sssonwe SEcihiio Golwom? Ns Gost Sse da”? (Para. 219.) BLOKOAHOAH TWH WKH WH UGs. SLAwTao Sa. wowd ISTSEE SB Gh, GEr>, GA TOE S7 HAA. (Paras. 377, 441.) . . Ke ELH WK aSiGapgos ISeSomAy Seseisoo: FE? (Bara, 433.) ; SASL SONOS Dig Somaya. TE GRssows Sz. . SQA Boos ELT? GOT Koewyy otro? Sadar Sos EX Wazd. Fh _NarVowese Dots’,yp oeyee ys P P geRagR BY # GENERAL EXERCISES. . KoSHOAE Oy ArIS Taz? CEL SKsOH BOS Sys Tororry DIyW. (Para. 678.) . Ke SHO & Biiwwetior, dso Biawet war Gy or? (14.) Bots SBI GBBjYB; We SY, Qh Koa Bey aryt. (Para. 511) . Bre Bixeos* Hwxposoasyy gota a8 awba, Sy 53s Seo wi Gy wr? Sr Bis sok Hob af Seon Gots we FOLK cody, . Be Bist wt Teves, SAByeo BYP Hoes, oo w& 28%, (Para. 571.) art Soo woes ars EAN NYw. vAS* Sno sar . OL TOS. SMBH Gow ONG Bhywzw. ors so TMT GON Bowie, IHS? wwesrTs BWhywdz. BP OBE SO) Ghoo erPsoN Oxy SHystowd, LO Ropgahrows FF Too Goss, Irroeasioon Dsyowses. (Paras. 503, 651.) ONTO Bi sorb Wr BA. (15,) QUE SH, awTzawoy Soo BooxsO wd, Oxy TITS, aww Tzaiafssweo Jer Besson? . STAY grsiies FOWGB, NAY SAywS HBO, Bx0a. Lows Wosswroy SP Siwy Feoro’oo8. (Para. 199.) (E) Traegiersy omy cog, OSES + BBAS SoMPSe. . Ses Batod? ISH wrt? Bw VrMAHGWoA. (Paras. 393, 304.) S*SD8 G0. ows SQyare? Sao wesGss? (Para, 437.) Arr KS AwSS TY SP SOSA. Sao Baognooe? (16) dots’? Smo 0? . Darrah VOoisoo VosHurT BYSOR GisyH. (Para. 435.) 88 Davrasratoo?w eq Bq Ra BAB, a Bq eR 4 qege Bq aq eB GENERAL EXERCISES. 297 a Mxsr~HO. (Para, 202.) SB Dy TA, GAz59? (Para. 425.) TearKo BST Bao (GaN is understood.) JAE, O58? (17.) wow BEA. OX soo Spee? goer ah Sowkre Sorbeo KASSM. (Para, 217, end.) Dr TE Savona woos paos Yous? (Para. 432) BH MP ww DoS,cras'od. (Para, 383.) Joes BS GoT eser0¥s00? Gho¥ so B&H TOD Axrw7oGoO Srrhen HAsde, dod asp AAT H? . HOB STHfos{y8 Vhyossowry 8. (Para. 620.) GATS gos Ssbonw VSAsr-or? Em. we vse wahars wero, (Para. 535.) vod Sar wxgodsse Sa. . TBSAs TD SS TP ogso Sarr war Basse. 2SEV Derk TEE Sore GATT, Tog SKasrwOO8 Sssooar Bey ssw gig? YOA Gob, GHyrs wd, dé! wee sxerawwt Gary ds. (18.) (Para, 229.) dorsowas? . Be SoSTySian SOE 7B Sob S&, (Para. 377.) doh S¥aonw, wwe Brow Gono Bsr —Veyor? (19.) . SrHAPDs BVOwBoaryS WO (Asa!) ares Sor Saw, (20.) (Para. 119.) Cond BS Yous cH Wr Bsoor? . SDASEDSS We Boogaass wAvomrt, (Para. 655.) won a> aB8, DerBoti, at Brags wo Sia. . Ba Sovoyfsoo 60S, ON Nyro Ws Goes. (Para. 142.) Oo Gy BS Ayr GomS* 7m, oNB Sordi, KOS bir GiB. (21.) 38GENERAL EXERCISES. T, Bee Qe Brgrr VATiy S*xhoer? %. GHW WO, S*O’SAS Togs wre, wr. SSS Szkom Hx Sno Wha? (Para. 550.) Hh, STARS OGoWs GOGO. ar SY) TY Ghar oe Wr. (Para. 612.) (F) sxstoras 8, BS Sor’ Ssoopsors’6, (22.) Bi SONA wesawy wAY Serxovev. (Para. 165.) Hho Tastrosssist Bats, aye saci’, BrKEwMives Tyonod sasowowsXo Yoo. (23.) SHS SH (Para. 181.) GF-AwoD SISLoHyswwy BPs SHard, Siy Bobs vow BIsBon SG doiy soo Bip Gori, (Para, 653.) TWH aKa TALOASOMWS ond WO¥ eSB, ret WY SAD. GRysso TH Asis GNyB, Yond 08,5 nekrwisor Gi ots, SAO Orso Tree Scie Sr Gotbjy FaowesoHyB, wea} goer al wi owes Sonsswars none, si SOSH SQy THSK Voy Dwyer, Sh weBisow BESBS Soowssenrh Gary. GBQ. HY T Daviess Tort seissost says gow My. BH OMrOssSH. gory AYoo sys Boers G5, 8% BOaHs, KBesro& wise. Myo” (2) oF TESTS ModTrVyswo Ista VAY Dy swe FDA GobhD. wots Sp, Bx GBPowssrs, Wega VAY geyoteo oPDsysyd. Bi Thy Sorry BosoS*, BOawses. (Para. G12) Sav TH ops ar /Stovorwsoros TGs BOSE MYNsoo Fa DEsHwwos GOTH woz s. TW sopy cy Ssoooaty WAH SALKVTHAYy Gos SHE OMAIITH, oAgeo 7B WS SCOTS NOXB Sx Hfswwwss DFxsow Gwy ots, NYG Ty AOTPOm (25.) NAW Trahods soyrMoKsrs God, os Losses ahh stwtoarys. seston’, sromrores 3GENERAL EXERCISES. 299 CAT Sersve DTH DOP GATOS Seis, wT) Taw Trew BATA (26.) VOY gagwSa, BEA SHB, OLAS SreSonws BY (27.) SHAY SdH, are SoS BA. DFAS. (Gy sistora’, BF Sve Sahogrnts, SH Swdh wesaoy VAY Sersven BE, SrA wy SOD. Go Tavs, wry sx BrnEsssovo Syovod xo ANZ TSSSD Seosomy AS. (Para. 500.) SHS B. 0.9 Brot S8pws (28,) SHI Byowods GBBso oH (Para, 502.) Vote Noxon KRrodss. Sad. B,-BM\oO womenGs, Sas Th, srvwowre Soo Mvasrows Bows Xobok SG AoNsprdy, OHS Josie BoAwosss Wer GOS SH psy Syomodare. (Para. 647.) © Sond DO wer OuwSATrA. Iaddo Hao Tor yZ Ova Bo oof, YI Gots, GrI'S, wer Ta sopDoioews Sons BH DYsiwwS LFsarow GxyS NY O08.H evs Gots BD NispifoaTy A. SHH YI WoW Wis YOASY D2, TH Wer Sod *sso ComdB, — YowT SH GSW Pro (ws Tovey tay S500) (2Y.) SSo=Usessson8 Te oo8H GEE SOA Gy owss, a SOE How Thos Baatoro Gygw Dig Gary. (Para. 443.) BW Darra G2, ONG sivo Caos sso Bas, Bs OHLTOSSD SrHHSs Tks Gcoreasink OPZoSos Sos DodWodos, [I,S,xoo Sere Sars TSrasowwA. SUSBHS SS SH, Tao Srydaso BwEmow, sour eka SA Go Sis, TAD orsesaeonk srr 9g Pow, wer wolewsw7r GTA. Wasod Brmyario Potswwds ody ops»300 GENERAL EXERCISES. eur §208 BDA, Favsendorry se, Soot AQno Shao dao stBomryE* BOs. (Para. 322.) Sv gs BWasswrsy Te Sooo, S*swoom siyo HS, WSS Sto TSSKGED Thi wWtso Meow Sore EowS*, By GSTs Ts WTAHMVVOD Goer sorsig> GAAS NAT OIr.SQVAY TST nob Steoisoary SRY Tehot Now CMY GowSTSO Gay A. DWAowwSw, (H.) soxstora8, 3S SPOS Seorpsoss50, OED Mossy HET (30.) SOVDYso Gr AH wy Oy Koen. Tr OBSwirH, TRV A, mstorag, Seas, ST GiDE Rewrtore Duchsr. Wisp (B1.) T> Ter BI sds QUKra DBAod, Wx BsareiNowws (Para. 545.) NoNB Sa OF Sss8 OSTZOwS Te ToS" Moasretoa Soeyaagys Fae Fy WF DEWHOO, Tr Vbnoadasshoo NDoéfatoo WH Ssoomar Sas Boise BoosdzsO0, Bey SHOTRIW. — (82.)_ Ta GhyHVawwy, T Ginondssio soPHMssss CtLnowrd woo Gyr». (Paras. 655, 393, 401.) BAS GSpt Seorx Kase, 2¥ SSG, SD, AorSvows SAMO SHRowSod GHB. AH Ssonw Saw Boma Roy AAHBorodare wD SHH Nar T Boxee Sstsys showsded, Ghis wstasite Tomize*, da DBs) 8 WS Bays. (Para. 612.) BD VSrtee SAY UT Aiho gerry adot owes WW GR Sw. Sa wAo* Ss BHGAdtwsiol30y dso DGS SHyYStoNolWy SSKBE (Gi Sao SHyoS ASH Sy) BO) (33.) Sooxso Savtonossss, Sar, (34.) Se dow Ron Fe Dio SHysoS WwstooswTR, gow Tos Sosihys Sno Sm ONG Woo, wHY Fos08 weer BonoisSa, (Para. 115.)GENERAL EXERCISES. 301 BD WE Oss Daresrsioo TID, Ayers Siarons aw SOB (B5.) se Goss STONE V5 SS, drwy rsp, et Soto wrdrdoniposis, SI AMowwTe, wos GS wer Wea Nery Vow, OW, SSS asAY, aw Faost Gary a, dom Forlod, Tr sr Boot Faw ANgsswrwoms ESwrgrosshs NeoxUr, shoisBsd Sov, Foss Ba Mota. TUN ros a Serger Te Sexo eS Gay. ASLOT SH UBsex. (Para. 119.) (Kj sostorad, 2s SPO Srhoogrses, Bre Bipgtows HAYES sog, OBS Kerswen BB, we Sy SOND oso. Si HY Gi BW AQWSoaTLor aY OSD TYHIMD Gary so. WB DYAoH Gotht. (Para. 446.) SA S*erokose gh Aro 59 rd v8 bIrroD Roy GAySdph, Im soya» Bao SBSO TAS ro VSSsourse SUyS0% (Para. 596.) Sa0w SA WHinonsbearr> Teas Pros STasoow SQWp, Gb SD, SFere God, VTS Root BIBRA (36.) GOR, BEA goss BLSomars. QSptio TH OKT G|iiowy Sw BOA SAr~HBaiww SALp “BOA, BEA Si G0 ex S*StavousA. Bad Soyo HR wer ANsvvonNots, (Para. 404.) ReSonG, SQy Sts Tassawo PHVA Gays. Axy Dons BSG, (L,) soietora8, BF STE Wanpswts. HR SoD Sormurtoges OAY Serswey GR, Sy ay MHD Thao. Bi LBZ Bor AOD AY TYowods GYoso wos, 0% SoXBow Merrow, FAW BoMIrvs HGPsy WDD 208.) wAirosw7r? Gods AS (Para, 475.) Si Ie two302 GENERAL EXERCISES. soattoral, SETS wT way dob ApgsoormAsity bys SHS Tomo GYViSy, GOL, wer Sod *cOTW. Sw TH SA Stross Voy SawTewhowd, Sr dod, TS BPS Braise SKS, ods, Kross BY, © Sar BS KHIM Szw. om ATo, Ve sons? xs OAromows wooo ISvorr Bt; Krvrasory BY. gio» Soi3 Grnotsen Tree YOA GiyD. WodsSy WOH SHAR 0008, Sor Hoyjen Gi, MAA BL, BFS Areaisssoo BvsiyS70, wal surr Saz. SHH TAH VFS GTA, AGS Godsras. GBB Sze SE (Para, 407.) Bod, Bodowsd. say BoSeons ont Artie Sr WTioo Wr Gyo. soyygcoo HWS Howsd. Lt Sosa JErnr Hos Waossw7r GoGbis Vrsmtorys. DfAossSas. (MM) sestorn’, RF Sore Setopssssts. SORVHTAD TIT THI Sd. Bi Bey THM TOONS G|Vsw of, (Pars, 502.) Yorso Box Bow WiRrodwra, SSH worPMRT woBO BovroisxotHow (Para, 595.) 0000 B83 Sy (87.) Tots Brr~Qo Tawa HoLoOKdowS, Goto pb qArHO SyoodwTw. G/T KM¥SOE Grd TyowoOwWras, Toth saree Ses? sid XO DIeSawOOo!ssoo SID TAHA wo. Sw VY S¥LOares TSG (Para. 187.) Syowodst, GSpth SHaroFowtory Stes HOB 28, o888 (38.) o Wrsrow GRAD (Para. 589.) THD SSID GAYS. GH TVs Desens, Soma. SBVagth SZ IH SHRso DasseyyS*, Rey xosdonos Smo. (39.) DYAoHTGA.GENERAL EXERCISRS. 303 (N.) Booed FF, Sropwrrosos Ny Bsorosoeo OS BW we Gotars, dS BY Wer Toss Tomerd* Fass, Ti ws ORS Sor¥swen Gad AMT Gols, GG Tio sare Be “Wy GoM. (Para, 448.) SoS GB Mer Trosss eR SeawiHr SeMedsog{essors got) OA (Para, 502.) WTA NAAT, GALS SoF*NArifsi» woksjfoows Ses so Roda, sos BA rr (Para. 698.) SF x, GdroBwa, oth wes SOY Bae Xo, wd O85 SEsesa, STD ASSO BLANSLAS worrSs) (Para, 154.) Se DASoxs Bord, Drow gagrRe. Si SoKB Gass TE Basoern, T Wadd ayy das Scot Brym, ver Sovoxo Besxyesl, sod foow $ ward Stey BoAOT? GD Sota, —WaiIS? Bsyisoonto PoHA, (40.) Trawogwsns? Got eI gozoms BrOor BY yIHPO OLD, Orr Teds BOTS Pip cirssK Goss PQTyH. OB Ghorrewonw SP BaopsokKea (41) 8d BsyT, Gx MODS DLy, WA Trae a8 Srvyod, vrersy BOTS STBAOK HWM (Para. 51.) BsO¥ Sys SP DHpeah ds goss" SHI aMon, 2675. wes Brave, Pos 8 WA we SiyPotor> TesAs BO, FOB eS Psy, Gow Trev Trak} BOLO worm, oF BHT SON Tras VHLD, BWA eYNFssvev GODT, Naosoo TY Tonisors, shat ews sven Bonk, YSGTS BSS. GBS Ws BH seo Boro BSBA God, so sy Got, eso ABBIASA AVY wT SD SOY BORE TDspmos sSeo Bw Beye, Cotes Teer O98,.9 ROSS, GhHs> BHSV, GsivwoFAs. (Para. 411.)804 GENERAL EXERCISES, (0.) Boa FH. BE Ska? 28 SARS TS MNT Togirs a Sovsy BY Shawna Deas MBPT, SD awvoHF ol Godse, (Para, 598.) BY Tr BIST Sy © G6 sy BTroasd. sess 8 S48 HOVKSAS BLO SHG sdyfomsa. mod pbx Ba GI{SD BST, GAOT SBT, Is Ghia A Iss wessso BR. Gods @ Sao —Orr GhHAFOW soN Gson BI &9 gas Sor, Neon (Para, 240.) Wey pSSVOB VF Sos osear ewes MG SomT gays UP EHF OFswoy vBssreDssyesk, (42.) Os BEA 5s Thsk WSS BIS, VByh GYooartoo MTS wy OF TpSirPTesAs BQ, Bi SOXB BsyK, GAVSaiwddy (PI BIS Goad) SxorSoon pbeoSo0? Hwy Sorws ORY Defi Bye 288, & So6Y Osx sonar, Sox Tysirgrs Grea OR, SH THAW, OCA GD Boy GXOH SoWAR, SoS BUNS FHID SHSAE LOhowHD, Bissaxso b go's Fo Dk Tos Lark, wd By Sy PSHKo%e Soto “REY God, Aas Ax Tents SchoWarer WIAD Hy aiwsjoo BS) So8T7e, (43.) Vim oS ST STA, WH Lotion SodABod, Senw Bay Sim SWOBYT BY, VHS weoom GoBs. soyYW orasoahy BRS Trosess sy Heaton, 5s PIGS Forse Baogso RSBD Biyh7r, saow—O*a3 gose orEar, UD F20D, by BQ, Teh, TKN 0 Od HoyS* BHIw. ob vse Ss Shisor Bx BIVs SoS*Kawd* Serres FIT goss! BL, LarBOrr BL Gx, Soy Bsns, wD BS BY Gs Ho Kote OL SADsFowsD, Gowsls S79 Bs owen SADT SAS age OP, Boss SQ), Tr Kotieo Does SKOM Barve? er OIDI*T Peas, STrYW Troy SAs BL, wsirg, BaGENERAL EXERCISES. 305 VST SISONHOD TO GowHKy Korie w SY SKoo Yar, SlwSo8 Godien BH GF WochAowso*ds GO Bot Bph ary wo. Cod. GY TH SKOM sy aspP Aw wT Mow we carr 878 Gotie §D GAZ GD Tay, FaHis agBowr ad eas, oti SOrGSOrS, Krar MHI? Biyr, deh Oswttaw XY SoSH MOYSor-awyy—wDySomws ionaiosy SADT oows Kotor Ghoweises MyGso TN GO NHY SAOsfows oto dry HQyoms Gsontoxsry Dep 0d Boot aas. (P.) sore ¥g, 28 Skyisost a ore Koes, (Para, 432.) CSith—Tr-ervoses SXO. VBP GL, TBM OSAMA. Asoo ar Desk Bh, TIP Goxs—aw 6089" sorta Bd, WASH Fao BR, SxXeo DS era DFyowoswHsrary ch. S STVso—HS OFT Sexo Got Sswose sKvow SoHo BHI, Swsfow, TOS Praises Bosvons sso THF SOROY, woes jae BNO. KR BEXSORSSON, EBrRoSS A TwKom, FS Tws a‘BAo BdErED BAW Sour Bays. (14), BS Wiioo atorosoodi7r, ware 2H Boss SKev Boss Brrswwosptio (45), O98 H BYOATD Gay |Xto DSme BH ore CPT VLG GOS VF Mr ABUGWG SD, go¥ Swen why SS Gods» SoD, O08,-H GHVQsA, Doar GVOATA Gosssw ss oF Seay HY, GollarAd BOI. gos'ST Ter SES Tosh xR Brormsowy noes jBoes, a Dw Swogery Levi avy SBE SO), eo STONE OD Sip, TS AE BWSTAMKow, ST oSHoT Gy, Vossb rs Ve SoXB SS s608S* BH 7, CB DLO GLBaLYSOR Golnosy Ted By. sys THB Dy woN4Oo SA ers Sos? 4d Bowszs. vod) SOG Owasso Poms? GotsoRISD noes oor RODHy Te. BEWTwy HS GYawe poowst Gob, Ist giao TersrAre. WSO Si vols Hoe, Jot Ayres wo ARB, S~ SOAB NIH JOAGED By, BHBa O08, H Sys 39306 GENERAL EXERCISES, Myyreitér BoA’, (Para. 418), Wotw no eT jSou BIOgsA, west BRT, GS Tr Be Dismiss BoD GAAS, arto — arto Agr sakes EBBoAyLN Er, Mire. WONG Bow FowS'D BIT, GoSh Te O08,.5 ver Sy, veo CARB, OSH wr Soo BATE (Para. 659)—Arsso a SoHrs VAY SoSSyosiveo SSivoy Brava. ONS God BSI Srv Gagv Er, arts at WH Kw BWW. GS Mops gXeO 2¥ ore GoBoosze. CoS? GID Srasgan aebasagiras (Para. 511.) BSressesrr O08 Veet OHS WMy, xn’ Sra BdBHnYaH SAO Hors DA, G BSH BUSSTYW. Yom Ba Svod SH Kasey BH GYH HHH APSO HS OD Bey, AS sev0% SQ) WH AW SYK Mg 4D TE WSO Tos Saremag, (sr WSF Terdsiwrs) omer Mbsray BA TyrsarvoPosw, Bt SOKB SirSE Ure Gord, —ssiion aS BisowS vragen BT_ sy. Hw crs y HN Seow wis? DoBod, BoNB- S- HOBS* sO Hour, Sim — Mwai. Senso Trego Be QA Teves GQYER, SE weer sow. GBSABSEP TTT, oA $80.) PSTD Leys ord SOFSS BEywre, Corl G Ura SBD, SS Tragaos 6 Oxy rod BOYER, Tras GOUND SaySomwran, Teas} BOO TK SES VTPIKoarw w TeHsGs BAS ews. (R) enn? 8B. ae gryoabow a¥ goky* 8D, SoG, Suk, Mae MHdasw Gok’, Hvowts BOarom. HES Sr wns sgaravaos Paomats Toss BPoipte, oF By ATsay 2¥ VB AGA, Ses Bow, Toss Mi Motw Gow. GoBS* KrrYsow BLS Gos a¥ warac—how womb, w SrrBaioo IH,_As BKLisoox, Bisog HR weAT, Sx ABoa Briso GAMBA KEP By AG sD SdsHto plasGENERAL EXERCISES, 307 OA BHT, SharW Bs aarso—As AGoss MGod wsNeixoo Sih, Sry GMGBOD GAMBIT ASD BH wre, Gots @ Soar —H FO AZ QUE SIHto% IHS GUTH wd TRA. God GB Yara _ie BOMarwmH OO Kirod, IS SrYxow Trav BPS ome, GoSST Tom ro EA IG Soros, wi SomrB Wy Gy 09 BSD SQy, TS “WDA “VISA. Paw Wows Fo WS TOK? TPoiwTt Krad, BoP *Sssoore SreerresoFob Gi Spt, Was!’ Pegcsor ahh ems FQ) Ageo OSes HowssE sow, Bory worrsy pgeo Bomod WyTsd SS BBS ayy sow VE, rods, Vode OSD Tog, SSH SOTO YFS* Siporsryso ws, oof otss4, Bt SOKB OES BiyHwd BR, SPS owwa. SHIT GB Gols BL, HAS? vrvdy08 AAW Botw> Gy OFED $rD,—BH Jossesrt ¥gsa, D Set wy so BHD FS (Para, 587.) Say TPO ST ASO BodBpHsyB. wosseo VHB WS Boks Sy MAFWMBOD Helen NOB GSH OD GHD, 08.5 BRS OBTB (46. Ho T Wl3 Sor Bods PSp Betws md h wyytrSp Sati Ex ed Bh, Goss" BY, Ve SoXB BS BWONWIS™ GBRWA. Gow saw BA Botx> Bib, MALGMOD Sw Wg Sts AG aay sara, dy BosOs BHespes (Para. 598.) TWH WIS WAYS, wosl¥ow IHS Bo BHI Bseiss Sw Bywras.SUR GENERAL EXERCISES, NOTES. (1) =~ literally means furrows. In the Cuddapa District 7% is used instead of 68. “After having first ploughed the land two or three farrowa, they wet plough it. Before doing so, they sow seeds for sprouts in a sprout bed,” i.e., to be transplanted afterwards into the whole field. (2) This sentence isin a parenthesis. For © see para. 649. 8) HA SHHow. To milk-giving cattle. (4) AAMSrroStahoo from Soro a village, VoSS%9 difference. Hence it means another village. (3) FSH equals—O8 (i.e, LO Diy e*Sais) asso woo GHB wd. (6) 8%. If the sreshes come down. (7) Literally. Where is this? Where is that? i.e., The Dowlaishwa- ram anicut is 80 much larger, that there is no comparison. (®) After OB the words BiesySNIWO are understood. (9) So0°Oaro> is understood. (10) og shells. Sao BFomots to slake lime. Hence oA TWD means—slaked lime. Lit. That (i.c., So%y 30) which they have slaked. (yy axysame, to put in heaps. (12) Is it better to plaster, or only to prick out the bricks with chunam? (13) ‘To whom and on what principle do you give the prizes? (14) The more grammatically correct sentence would be—# SKB a Bist Gor? SF dis Baws soar eso? (15) These words are ironical. (16) Lit. A little work has come with your horse, i.e. I want to have the use of your horse.GENERAL EXERCISES. (17) A child of how many years? (S§ from Ses a year.) (18) sia is here an exclamation of sorrow. Alas. (19) Lit. To whatever extent (it) may not be to them, i.e, Sob Teoh, esfooissyesé, although they have had no harvest. (591.) (20) They live (in the manner they do) for the sake of respectability. (21) GoesS*, How your fate will be (Ido not know), but when I consider the matter, it seems as if it would be accomplished. Lit. It is that it will be accomplished. (22) All these letters are addressed to Mr. Smith. Sstss—psos% means to the presence, and is more respectful than merely S76788. (23) This is a common form with which to commence a letter. It literally means—You are the one in authority (8%) to grant them, having caused, ete., etc., ie., It reats with you kindly to favour me with the news of your welfare. (24 This is a Sanscrit Shlokam, meaning—There are many obstacles to a good work. (25) As this is evident to yourself, I cannot write more, i.¢., to make it more evident. (26) You must kindly tell Subbarayuda Gara that I asked much after him. (27) A favourable letter in reply. (28) The letter 8 before O_9 stands for 89, which means—dated. (29) The feast of the ceremony of name-giving. (30) 28S A Hindustani word meaning place of residence. (81) When you made a visit to our village in your ride. (2) The expression “Rox, SAS Tasoe> is often used, as here, in the sense of to say. (33) These words are in a parenthesis. Having allotted him such a salary as your kindness suggests. (34) Ber. Lit. Is it not so? This equals—If not. (35) On the very day on which the house-warming took place.310 GENERAL EXERCISES. (86) ct Bastod is often used in the sense of visiting a place. Lit. Favouring a place. (87) ‘The word 8 in this connection is commonly used in the singular. (38) 8.0838 is a valgarism for 2¥888 or 2Se30t88, para. 238, (89) Lit. I beg you will inform me, at what time if I come, I may visit you, i.e. when I can visit you. (40) All the words from J* QODo’...to... BSBA are connected by ©9 to Sd, His wife knowing this (para. 496) reflected thus (@2)—My husband is spending money to no purpose. Although he spends it thus, will my mother-in-law’s wish be accomplished ?—Hut (para. 494) being afraid to speak to her husband, ete., etc. (41) All the words from O22 T°E7T...t0...GHSCSOVRSA ‘are connected by @2 to BSyr". As she said thus—Your king, ete. (42) All the words from Qs5* CiowoX¥oR...to...gaz% are connected by @D with wBxsr~Osxe88. Although he besought him thus—“I will buy and give you a better elephant than yours.” (43) All the words from “8ié3 AWa%...to. -0°S% are connected by © to cSmieo GBR. He told him a stratagem, namely, (9 see para. 619)—Tomorrow put the door of the porch of your house ajar. (44) Not only did he command that all the people should sleep in the day time and work at night, and that the police should patrol in the day time, but he also said—“ we will punish those who do not do s0.” (45) Spe here equals SV. At the time of the second watch, é., at mid-day. (46) BXsrOSQo-B being angry-minded. BX» wrath—OSy ‘O>e> feminine form of Dyes. The neuter form is D§xo.PART Itt.312 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. CHAPTER XIX. ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 697. ‘The remaining portion of this book forms an INTRODUCTION to the study of the grammatical dialect, It is intended to convey such inform- ation, in addition to that already given, as may enable the student to study a Native Grammar, and to read such books as the Vikramarka Tales, Késiydtra, Panchatantra, Nitichandrika, Vémana, etc. 698. Without such an introduction, the student would find much difiiculty in reading a Native Grammar (which he ought in course of time to do), for all are written in highly grammatical language, and on a system different to that pureued in the present work. But after reading this introduction, it is believed that the student will be in a position to under- stand a Native Grammar; and he is strongly recommended to proceed to the study of Chinniah Soory's Grammar, since it is generally regarded as the best authority, and has been principally consulted in the prepara- tion of this part of the present work. For this reason, reference is occa- sionally made to Chinniah Soory’s Grammar, throughout the following pages, by the insertion of the letters C. 8. The edition, to which refer- ence is made, was published in 1858. The number which follows the initials, refers to the page. 699. A considerable portion of Chinniah Soory’s Grammar (and of every Native Grammar) is taken up with an explanation of the various changes which Sanscrit words undergo, when introduced into Telugu. As this forms a distinct branch of study, it is entirely omitted in the present work, since it is very difficult, and not essential to enable the student to understand the grammatical dialect. Its omission, however, renders it necessary to state the rules in a manner very different from that pursued in a Native Grammar. 700. It may be here remarked, that the system pursued in all Native Grammars appears unnecessarily diflicult and complicated, except for a person previously ucquainted with Sanscrit. The reason of this is pro- bably a8 follows :— 701. There can be no doubt that the language, which the Brahmans originally spoke, was Sanscrit, and that they wrote it in the Naguri character. On entering the Telugu country, they found a languageON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 313 peculiar to the country, which was written in characters entirely dif- ferent from Négari, and which contained sounds which did not exist in Sanserit. 702. ‘The Brahmans soon commenced to learn and use Telugu, and in course of time, some of them composed Grammars of the language, in which the system of Sanscrit Grammar was applied to Telugu. These books were composed on the supposition that the reader had some knowledge of Sanscrit; and not only were all the grammatical terms borrowed from that language, but the Grammar itself was written in Sanserit, 703. It is no doubt upon these older books, that the earliest Telugu Grammars now extant (as for instance Nannaya Bhattu's) were based. And upon these latter are based the Modern Grammars, Hence, when we carefully study one of them, we find that it in reality presupposes a knowledge of Sanscrit, that much of it is taken up with an explanation of the manner in which Sanserit words are introduced into Telugu, that in many instances it appears unsuited to Telugu, and that it introduces distinctions and terms, which are unnecessary and needlessly confusing. 704. Upon opening a ‘Telugu book written in the grammatical dialect, the student will find, that not only do the forms of the individual words difier very considerably from those used in common conversation, but that the words are so run into each other, and have their initial letters so altered, that the whole is fendered almost unintelligible. In order, therefore, to read a grammatically written book, it is necessary to know— (1) The grammatical forms of the individual words. 2) The complicated rules, according to which they are strung together in a sentence. 705. The former will be explained in this chapter, and the latter in the next chapter. But in reference to the latter, it is necessary here to remark, that the rules chiefly depend upon whether a word belongs to the class called DB FSIBNY, or not. By this term (which will be more fully explained hereafter) is meant a word which ends in 3500, ie, the letter €. (Para, 43.) This letter often becomes 9 or 2, but in this chapter all words belonging to this class are spelt with &-, in order to assist the student in remembering which they are. In the counnon dialect these words never use &, but change it into & or ®, or omit it. 40Blt ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN Books. I. On Orrsocrarny, ogrsieh sass, 706. The consonants ¥, %, &, 5, 3, are called StMswev, ie, Hard. The consonants X, %, &, &, 2, are called S8¥saven, ie, Soft. The remaining consonants are called ROR, ie, Fized. 707. The division of the words of the Telugu language into S&ysbsooe, Sey Schoen, BIsooen, and MT AVBS\e, has been already explained in para, 93, SBysoshou are subdivided into Sox, ySsasirev and SAySssHsK0e0, according as they are derived direct from Sanscrit, or from Sanscrit through the medium of one of the Prakrits. (C. 8. 6.) 708. - All words used in the Telugu language, except Sort, ySHaosnen, are called BH, (C. 8. 50) 709. ‘The letters aw, awe, %, BO, +, @ g, ¥, SS, and the aspirate letters, do not exist in ©), but have been introduced from Sanserit, with the introduction of Soa}, y8Sxos000. Hence every word which contains one of these letters, must belong to the latter class of words, (Para. 40.) 710. ‘The letters J, 2, 2) and c, do not exist in Sanscrit, Hence every word in which one of them occurs. is ©). ‘The letter < may, however, occur in the Telugu termination, affixed to a Xoxy ySSsoasoo; as Sun. Ors. Tel, Trsoaceh. (Paras. 44, 712.) TLL. — The letter 0, called Dossesoay Sr PPSoAGomo, or WrePPory, has already been explained in para. 90. 712 The letter c called Sry, or STAAL, or CYDIA, is only used in the grammatical dialect. ‘The conditions under which it may be used in case of Sof, ete., will be explained in the next chapter. Theoretically this letter has a nasal sound, but practically it is silent. 713. ‘The letter c is always inserted before final 2%, of the first declen- sion, and of any tense of a verb: as DPSasccio, Trees,ON THE GRAVMATICAL DIALECT (SED IN BOOKS. 315 714. In ©) words © and ¢ never occur before a ZO», hence when o does ths occur, the word must he a Sox, ySrsossoo; an SOS. C8. 5.) 715. When preceded by a short vowel, ¢ may be changed into 0; as Sxyceh or Sxj0%, SHB or SH’, Gores or Gowors, 716. ‘The letters © and & can be changed into Wow and By except in Nov, ySRADsiwe; as Gomd or O. 717. Tn para. 89 it is stated, that in Som, ySXsoNoven the letters and 2 ate always pronounced ch andj. When, however, nouns of this class ending in © or #@ change these letters in the plural into % and 2, they take the sounds of fs and dz; as DO, Sven; ava, Tare. ‘The word O*2" also takes the sound of dz. II, Ox Posrrosttions. 718, 'The-grammatical forms of and 0 are Sowe~ and God. The following postpositions are used in books only—eesvk, eessdse- with, SoWe on account of, Bo, Boowk with, Shck through, SE through, B® from, by. 719. The postpositions Std, 343, W&, God, and ABoO or KrBy, are always affixed to.an objective ense. All other postpositions are affixed toa genitive case. Those mentioned in para. 148 may also be affixed to a dative case. 720. A list of the postpositions in common use is given in paras. 148 and 148. With the exception of the postpositions Giw8),.. B_, God, BR, 343, Skyy, SorBy or Noe, and all those ending in i», vis., DOoea%o, rgodso, Seo or MSH, DKAGE, KOK, Vs, and FPS, all other postpositions end in X59; (705;) as S7estOer. 721, In Native Grammars there is no term answering to that of postposi- tion ; but the postpositions Wée- or Be, S*ae- or S*E-, Sestie-, Bp SOS, FOB, HY, Beh, SSoe or ST, Vode, SE are316 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. called case afizes (2%8300), a term which will be explained hereafter. Many of the remaining postpositions are merely cases of nouns, and are treated as such in the grammatical dialect, ¢.g., DDoS, Soh pSsor, ‘WOsrSssoNE. The remainder are regarded as particles (WSZasoxe0), Cg, SBE, BSE. When 02% is attached to a genitive ending in \, or 9, the letter S, is inserted. But if the noun be of the second declension, or a Not, ySWsoi0 ending in %, instead of inserting the letter S, contrac- tion may take place. When 020& is attached toa singular genitive ending in any other vowel, the initial € becomes o%. In the plural either 8% or contraction may be used. Thus SSswwSo2e or SWROE; SSSVVGLONVE or SWaL Vor; TraoowoXHe- (not HaborHer); ov Hote or ABwSozs\e-. (Compare para. 146.) 723. Se or See has properly only the meaning of amongst, and hence ought to be affixed to the plural number only; as % Sexes amongst these pens, Sometimes, however, it is affixed to the singular in the sense of #02. Paragraphs 145 and 149 hold good in the grammatical dialect. IIT. Ox Novus, DBS giswoo on TST UT sve. Paragraphs 96 to 111 hold good in the grammatical dialect. 24. All parrve cases end in 850; as TsO, A*edoe, 725. Before affixing %6€ to form the dative, genitives ending in v or 3 insert %; as SiSsSoNGE, raSHE, VY SKE, NOT SE. 726. The onsrctive case is always formed by affixing & to the genitive. NyB¥es0eo. Thus SSS, AE, Hence all objective cases are S75 SOKO, SSswor, 727. The Vocative case (Para, 108) may have the final vowel long or short at pleasure, Thus T-Sxcd, or TOKE, ON, or OT, OHO or OroON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 317 728. A plural vocative, when connected with a verb in the second person, may take the same form as the plural nominative. 729, Wot ySSxosSveo of the first declension, in all of which final # of the nominative is preceded by , may form the vocative by dropping &%. After dropping 2, the preceding \ is changed into “ or a8 TeSwcds, Vesa, Te, Tea. If, however, the word has another form of the nominative ending in %, ¢.g., Motct# or otow, then in the vocative, the preceding © is merely lengthened ; as tcc, Modoc, (9858, AO) or ADK. ‘The reason of this is, that all crude Sans- crit nouns denoting men, which end in ~, take the affix 2 or %, when introduced into Telugu; whereas those ending in ~, take a only. 730, All nouns of the Fst DECLENSION in which final 2% is preceded by \, besides being declined in the regular manner (Para. 114’, may also form the genitive by simply dropping final a; as S&3ct6, gen. SS. Hence the dative and objective may be Sxpsmer and SSpr. Hence also before a postposition either form of the genitive may be used ; as Sp Bsr or Sspodae. The forms mentioned in paragraphs 115 and 116 are not grammatical. 731. A few nouns of this declension form the plural by changing final &» of the nominative singular into ous; as Sing. Nodes, Pl. Koto. Nouns ending in Bvt, as Bé5*ceh. form the Plural in og, or em; as cbs, or Pceorsre59, (Para, $8.) Sov yi¥asox5w00 of this declension in which final & is preceded by ev (eg. Were, Grech, Sdorrevces), whe ord Scie Bre, and a few es) words (e9., SXBocth, Wercts, wWadsvceh,) form the plural by changing final &% into &; as Sing. eos. Pl. Wess. 734. In the grammatical dialect there are « few words belonging to this declension of only two syllables. See para. 114. Thus ceo. Gen. BO, Pl, Beeseo or Bows.318 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 735. In the SEcoND DECLENSION (Para, 117) there are a few nouns which are not always neuter, for instance, 98359 means a friend.’ So in like manner S8riio, Sys, Gio. (UW. 5. 34.) 786. The word o%o (Vulg. Doss.) is formed by adding ess to “Zo, and in the grammatical dialect does not belong to the second, but to the third declension. (C. 8. 90.) 737. All nouns of this declension, in which final *» is preceded by —, may change this vowel into ¥; as A*@rabo or A*soo. (C. 8, 181.) All nouns of this declension are declined according to para. 117. 738, Final 59 in the singular nominative of this declension may be changed into Sp or ow, Nouns in which final ao is preceded by —, must change — into ~ before taking these forms. These forms may be retained thronghout all cases singular and plural, and before any post- position. Thus— Sing. N. & G, Sito, Sxip, or SSoaw, D. SSH, Seaspstor, or Sowers rh ON. SSxhown, SWAPO, or Ssoewen, D. SSshooe8Oe-, SSSpOwE, or SSowosor. Postpositions, SSSVCLOHIT, SSSpoahow, or Sow ORG. 789. Nouns of this declension when affixing the postposition “€ in the singular, and throughout the plural, sometimes drop 9, and lengthen" the preceding vowel. Thus Sexe, DSsrev. Para. 119. 740. The words and 30 respectively. Thus—Sing. &788. Pl. 8000 or Sty. Sing. Bhp. Pl. Biy2eo or Bey. (Para, 128.) 3 746. Nouns ending in 9 form the rLcRat as follows—Sing. 92. Pl. Ep, Goren, or Gog, (Para. 126.) TAT. Nouns ending in &%y form the rEunat, regularly; as Sing. ¥&y. Pl. Bay O0, (Paras. 128, 135.)0 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 748, In the singular, instead of §*@a%, the form §"e8 may be used’ but in the ritRax §7ecSXeo only is used. In the same manner are declined Yom, Tors, Sed, NSA, Rear, SMH, Sos, SrA. (Para. 138.) 749. The nouns “6a and A*A% use the forms “eX and A*cM in the singular at pleasure. In the PLURAL the forms Ec%oe and A*cXe0 only are used. 750. The nouns mentioned in pare. 139 are declined grammatically in the following manner—Sing. Nom. ep. Gen. 6088. Pl. Hee. 751. ‘The following puvRats are peculiar. Sing. “20&® or “wo. Pl. oZom. Sing. TR. Pl, oriowo. Sing. Boswy. Pl. Boswsoo or Bamyen. Sing. Sor or &%, para. 820) may be used. Thus instead of GHBS the form BF xocesns may be used. 769. A noun of the second declension, instead of affixing ous or OX, sometimes changes final &%» into % or of; as DOG Bos FF or DSH or D©.80%. Nouns ending in *», which are not of the second declen- sion (¢g., S80, Gish, etc.) usually change final 9 in S; as 3S Bras, gros Root’. Paras. 154 and 162. 770. Before the words wg, G8Tiho0, GrVG oo, SFX, and BSS, and their masculine and feminine forms, the dative case is sometimes © used instead of YoWE; as Tr-esoP¥oBE ORG ced or “OsoO8e— wages (C. 8. 71) :ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS, 323 V. ON Paoxouns, SOgaraisoves, 771. All pronouns are B¥geoou, In the grammatical dialect they take numerous forms, which are given below. Paragraphs 168, 172, 177, 181, to 201, refer equally to the grammatical dialect. The forms of the objective in t%y and y are ungrammatical. Paragraphs 202 to 207 on composrrE Nouns refer equally to the grammatical dialect, except that the grammatical forms of D*th, 2%, WH, and © are aflixed. Grammatical forms of the pronouns. 772. Sing. N. B%, 8%. G. a. D. THE. 0, BAQE, SAE, Sing. N. BY, BH. GD, —-D. ABE. 0. Dae, DADE, Pl. N, Avisos, Simo, Biv. G. S._D. SHEL OL Sir, save, N. asso, (169.) G. SS. _D. SST. 0. abso, PL, N, 87°, Bid, Oreo, Sto, — G. Or, D. Qe, 0. Beppe, DowDoe. : Sing. N. Bret. G. TAD. O. THE. N. Hees. G. 2, 0. HAE. © Pl N, BS, TO, TO Kwy, Hh WO, TV, TO, ete. Pl. z . £%, Hvev, Soi). G. 58, S80, Dog. ete. Sing. N. ASeceh, Sarceh, Jace, ISK, Seas. G. ISA, Soro, JAK, SQN, AD. ete. Pl. N, ASH, Sar, darges, dale, 4%, Swsen, dayoen, Sart, IA KO eH, INOS, ISO, G_ ISB. ete, Bing. N. CSch, Gch. GSeth, Meth. ISet, SSces, (115,) Sing, N, GBo, OB, GT. WB, He, WT, Sd, SB, SB, (176.)324 Sing. N. Pl. Sing. Pl. Pl. Sing. Pl. Sing. PI Sing. Pl. N. N. ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. Wm G. SS. 0. SHE, SHE. Sih, TH, GS. G. I. O. SI, Bor, N, So. G. Seoé8, 588, D. Seoe88e~, 5e88-. etc. (Para. 187.) Worse, Boden. G, Yorses, SoS™es, (Para. 191.) + Oy. G. ON, B, Ny 088. ete. + G8, OB, BaHA, wOasga. G, TA, Bard, OFA. ete, WD, ODL, SALA, OGHBD. G. TTD. ete, GB, 9B, BISA, Gasgd. G. AN, Bard, GEA. etc. +99, GN, BaD, gag, G. Ha, ete. - £8, 28, 32, Sasa, Jasga, G. Gr, Sara, Ig. ete. 49, JD, ING, Sa, JoHgD. G. So, Sara, JOGO. ele, N.B.—It will be noticed that the grammatical genitives of © and ® are the same as the genitives of aces and Dees. 773. 774. 715. The genitives 5, 3°, and SS, may add & at pleasure; as H&%, The forms of the word o3@ are very numerous. See C. $. 59, When the demonstrative adjective pronouns &, %, and 4, are prefixed to nouns, they may be changed into their corresponding short vowels, and the consonant following them doubled. Thus—es5°0%s becomes ©5%,-089, This cannot take place, if the first letter of the succeeding word be ¥, %, %,°3*, 8, or exp, or has a subscribed con- sonant; as & 8%, 6 Byes. (Para. 189.) 776. Instead of the affix & to form a feminine composite noun, the aftix & is sometimes used; as A*YS. (Para. 202.)ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 325 VI. ON THE CopunaTive CoNsUNCTION, Sisoty dR, 777, To express the English conjunctions—both...and—the termination SE or OF is aftixed, if the word to which it is affixed be a WH SSNy B¥ sss, orifitend in \, vw, or 9. Inall other cases Gs is affixed. (Para. 167.) Thus— . WHA TsoNsd Ages By, Iand Rama have no cows. Asi ATBaiw SB. An ox and a sheep have come. VII. On NuMERats, Bogrgaravsoooo, 778. ‘The ordinals are formed from the neuter cardinals by adding ©. If the neuter cardinal ends in 9, contraction may take place. If it ends in ©, contraction must take place. If contraction does not take place, initial © is changed into a%. Thus IOOBaSS or IONS, Toss. The ordinals take pronominal affzes. 179. The words 2c, 28, 2883, have very many different forms, e.g., Sing. Nom. 28th, 287, 28, cth, BY, 2, doce, Hees, AE Voth, BWI eth, Boao, Beth, Bow, Bi. See C. S, 60. (Para, 231.) 780. The following list shows the grammatical forms of the cardinal numbers. For their declension sce para. 238:-— NEUTER. MAS. PEM. 2, Bors, geo, GOO, 3, Srecth, MOH, SMHvO, Sor’, 4, Wer, Beoree, 5, Bont, Sx, Wome, SX.05,326 90. 100. 1,000. 10,000. ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. NEUTER. ea, Sm, . AND. ST DNB. sa. + SAT NE, . 0 ots. . SeSosooreceso,. ScHoaTroors. |. SAHSont%, Seo Bao, Sears, Seo Bes. SAORODA. BoB DB. geese. QUSBTTER. ete. S9S)B., Sens, Send. wens, . Tey. dan8. Sond. irveno, Bow, Saden, MAS. FEM. Sea, Arbor, SIO ho. BEML, SAH, SAMO thy, SAHOO). SHITE, Ay Heo, dy 700, SMI, SAHA, Saoss7eo, Sebwoorer, Srhsomasrer, Sao Ar, SeHArewow, Seo Bevo7ow, SMORSEO ce, SodT IHS, GBs zo), GOAN, cfc. Boss5y0 2). Sooo zs). Scex0 2%). Seoso w Bro 2, x50 Hoy S020, 40, Mrrenorors, Aw, SAAS, 781. The letter X> in the termination 9% may be changed into % at pleasure ; as GUOg%, so~¥U.ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 827 782. When a pronoun or cardinal is coupled with # noun, it may be put in the nominative case, or may take the same D¢¥§ asthenoun. It may either precede, or follow it. Thus Woxen SMapgusor, Vorsesd si APYOWE, SDAIPYOoNeRGE, SHASRHZOKONetor; Teor Rie BE, TEA’ AMOHE-, ASziew Trehol8Be-, “A FeOs TrovAosS 8. (C. 8, 74.) VIII. Ox Arrixes. 783. ‘The affix ~~ (denoting a question), the affix * (denoting emphasis), and the affix %* (denoting doubt), are sometimes shortened into “, ™, and 784, ‘The adverbial affix, FE (para. BAR) in a WS SSSOTao. The consonant § is always changed into §, and its vowel may be shortened at pleasure; as Bussossoorre- or Bsosaone-, TX. Ow Verss, §cten, 785. ‘The forms of the verbs used in the grammatical dialect, differ considerably from those used in the colloquial dialect. They have a positive and a negative form, but being more uniform, are not divided into conjugations. Para, 258 is strictly observed. 786. N.B.—In Native Grammars the SAsopPoxisbo (first person) is always put first, and corresponds to what in English is the THIRD PERSON. The soxgasweoxiwos ‘middle person) is put in the second place, and corresponds to what in English is the secon PERSON. The @&§ao%yto x0 (principal person) is put last, and corresponds td what in English is the FIRST PERSON. Formation of the positive form. 787. (1) The infinitive is formed by changing final © of the root into ~€-; as root So%, infinitive Sots.328 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS, 788. (2) The verbal noun is formed by adding ¢ to the root; as Sotse>. 789. (8) The present verbal participle is formed by adding *%— to the root. The progressive present relative participle, and the progressive present tense, are formed by adding to the present verbal participle, &% and the tense Gay % respectively; as NOW, Sori, Nomis, ss. 790. (4) The past verbal participle is tormed by changing final © of the root into 9; as So. The past relative participle is formed by adding 5 to the past verbal participle; as So&s. 791. (5) The indefinite relative participle uses the same form as the root, or changes final of the root into “ws or ~8; as Sows, So%s, Sowa. 792. (6) The future relative participle affixes ¥© to the infinitive. When thus affixed, Yo becomes Xo, and ¢ is inserted ; as SodéicXe, Para. 432, 793. (1) The past tense is formed by adding 8E- to the past participle ; as S88. 794. (8) The indefinite tense has two forms. The first is formed by adding SS to the root; as Sous. The second is formed by chang- ing final © of the root into "&e-; as So@se. 795, N.B.—'The indefinite tense and the indefinite relative participle are used to express habit, custom, conjecture, benediction, and futurity. 796. (9). The future tense is formed by affixing the tense ¥o& to the infinitive. When thus affixed, Yo becomes XE, and c is inserted; as SoescXor, Para. 434. 797. (10). The imperative second person singular and plural are formed by adding to the root 0 and cto respectively. The final ~> may be changed into D, 9, —%, or “, Thus—Sing. othe», Sows, x0 Gobo, Sowsoss, or Sorha, Pl. Sorsrth, Sorsck, Sore’, Sossocar, Soest.ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 420 798, (11) The imperative first person. plural is formed by adding 230 to the root; as Somes, In the grammatical dialect the three following forms are used :— 799. (12) First. The Aorasgyesso, This is used to express the sense of although or if, and where in the colloquial dialect the form made by adding @ to the past verbal participle is used. . See paras. 591 and 565. Hence it is frequently used as the connecting link in narrative writings. See para, 587. It has the same form as the past relative participle with the addition of &; as So&Se-. 800. (13) Szconn, The eSoSo~gxVs, This is used, where in the colloquial dialect Stars is affixed to a past relative participle. Para. 598. It is formed by adding 2& to the root ;.as Sozsstsoe. 801. (14) Turrp. The oborsg yy sce, ‘This is used as an optative mood, to express a wish, a blessing, or a curse. It is fortied by adding S€ to the root, or by changing final © of the root into “ssf; as Soesese~ or So%ee. When followed by a word commencing with a vowel, the final & is changed into 55; as D% Sse KORINBE-—or—Keo MoSsNSBWE-. (C. 8. 96.) 802, (15) Roots ending in dS» (para. 274) always change o& in ©, when the final vowel of the root is changed into D or ~, Thus from root oS are formed GR, URS, Bae, Bra, Ber, Boe, ds BE, ete, . . Conjugation of Sot and Bas, 803. Root. Bosh, Bom, Infinitive. Soe, Base, Verbal noun. Soweto. _ Bost, Ver. par. pres. Soest, Posie, 4aON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. Ver. par. past. S08. ie. Rel. par. prog. pres. So2sotsowy. Basis. Do. past. Sods. das. Do. indef. Soth, SoBe, SoBA. Ueto, Daw, Sra. Do. fat. So%cro, Panne, Tense. prog. pres. Sodstsiry %, Posorsary a. Do. past. SoBe. B28, Do. indef. Sotheoe, SoBSE. Basotoe-, Beer. Do. fat. SoescKor. Bavexwr, Imper. sing. 2.1 Sotssssoo, Pesos. -Do. pl 1. Sotkstssio, Poswrsate, Do. pl. 2 Sothocetso. Pasoces, Berrngyyaseor Sods. Base, BSOBOGAT I, osbeeseer. Pome, oboragyriase, Sombie, Sommer. Damier, Saver. Prog. pres. tense. Past tense, Future tense. Sing. 1. Soro, — SoBE. Sotienor. 2, SONGS. — SoBBD, S049. Soweroy. 3 {x Soseroary cto, SoBe. SoweKectio, FN, SomiGyyB. SOB. Soticxors, PL Sotswary so, SoABav. SotieXows, 2. Sowa, — S08BB. Sotierets. 5 fe F. Sowtoary%. — Sod8. Soterors, Un Soesessy 9, Sour. SoweXoY,ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 331 Indefinite tense. Sing. 1. SoLsotsen, SoRKE, 2. Somes, Sor’, SoBSY, SOTA. 3M. FN, SochE. Sotewe-, SoBAT. PL 1. Sotto, SoBesesn 2. Sorte, SOBs, 9g, BER Komen, SoBst, “ln. Soekse-. Somer, Nomar, | 805. Roots ending in % preceded by a short vowel (pars. 272), when | followed by %, may change %% into subscribed %, or change final &% of the root into 0; an STAISE, SANE, SOLE, ete. | 806. In roots ending in *% preceded by a short vowel, when *% is followed by 6, 8, &, or &, the letter % may be changed into o. When thus preceded by 0, the letter 8 always becomes 43, and the letters &% and & thay become and & at pleasure. Thus S08 or Sots, S*DBE- or S08, SALLE or STOWE” or Sowa, SALE or S029, (§7od8s% is not common.) 807. The letter &, when preceded by o& , o& or of, may drop its vowel, and be subscribed under the preceding letter; as S70%% or Soe%,, Soe or 870 20)5 ST S.0%0% or SE.c ho, 808. Roots of two letters only, of which the first is short (¢.g., §"%, ©, Ses, etc.) may insert Doh, whenever the final vowel of the root becomes ~; as SBE or S*DEE, SBM or SDB, SSE or SORE. 809. Roots ending in &%, preceded by a short vowel, and the roots URE N.B.—According to some Grammarians, the roots ending in Dow take 5 Pono%, Tonos me, Tomog rosy, Tomo ioary a, in the present verbal participle, and the parts derived from it, as 814, Roots of verbs ending in %%, which are not causal, observe the following rules in the imperetive second person singular and plural, and whenever final © of the root becomes *. (1) If final % of the root is not preceded by © or ¢, the letter .5 is changed into %. (2) If final +S, in a root of two syllables, be preceded by 0, the letter Sis retained. (3) If final 1% be preceded by ¢, some verbs retain ~5, some change it into 5, and some take both forms. (C. S. 110.) Thus— Roor. INEIN, IMPERATIVE. Boots. Sense, Reosjivoo, Sem. Sse. Stemi. Sow, Bose. Sows. Sets. Seas or Seam, Keiates or Sega.BB4 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED 1N BOOKS. 815, Regular verbs, ending in y, retain. 5; as Boty, Bote, ete. 816, Seat, Doow%, and a few other roots, may drop'the third syllable in the imperative second person singular and plural, and whenever final © of the root becomes “. Thus—Beowsjsoo or Bess, Beoxse or 208, Conjugation of 200% and Show. 817. Root. Reo. Show, Infinitive. Beose, Qe, (616) Shower. Verbal noun. Soothe. Shore. V. par. pres. Rooter, Bowwer, Do. past. BOD. (253.) Bhod. R. par. prog. pres. 2eos%woi5y. shows, Do. past. 2005, BRoows, [ShoBa, Do. indef. Bevis, 20TH, 2038. show, shows, Do. fut. ReoseXw, SocKo, shows, Tense. prog. pres. oototsowry ao. Showswsary <6, Do. past. BOO8E, B8oNBE-. Do. indef. Bevdor, BOGE, shor, hos [mer, showee-, Do. fut. BwoSXOr, BOK. shox, Tper. sing. 2. Reowssoo, Bevis, Eon. [25s69. Do. pl. 1. Borwdasoo, (LeysKoo.) 88083, Shox Do. pl. 2 — Benxeeso, Bercess, Bhowew. Doragyvess, 200s, shoose, SHOOT so, Deowane. Rowe. [e6e-. oborng grass, Rooms, BOTHER, oom, ohoDON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 385 818. The verbs Sy, Gio, ty, rm, Bry, Sy Sry, and $s have the following peculiarities — ROOT. ‘Ines. IMPER. SING. IMPER, PL. Si). we. Say. Bows. Fiy ME, BET, GAY. ot, By TST, TT, TTB. WP ceo. Sr. Sore. Soro, Soreiocese, By. Ger, dor. Bsy, Beis. | Bows, Bees, ST, STE. STB. Sees, Tm, SSE, HE, THR. S* S05, Sem, ESE. Bw Boss, 819. The verb St may drop its second syllable in the past tense, and in the indefinite tense. It may drop its third syllable in the imper- ative second person singular and plural, and whenever final ‘\ of the root becomes ~. Thus S808 or BOGE, AIS or Ave, Conjugation of Go% and OX or OF, Goth. (Para. 370.) 8%, O or Z. (Paras.318, 820. Root. Infinitive. Got. wre, [319.) Verbal noun, Godot», 608, OXb, THbo, V. par. pres, ouster, ORE, Do. past. God, Won, R. par. prog. pres. Gay. CMB, Do. past. Gods. - Sons, Do. indef. Goth, OTL Om, VoRKe6, [4oR8, [wag d, vane, wad. Do. fut. Bcticxo. wre, ‘Tense. prog. pres. GA). COMBI , Dor past.. God, Goll. wom, Do. indef. Gothter, Gor, WAGE, SEU, [Gomese-. [eagee. Do. fut. GovcNor. Kor,336 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. Imper. sing. 2, eos, CRDi, Tay. Do. pl. 1, GodseeSihoo, Gozshoo. OMDB. Do. pl 2. Gotkocts, OKrth, Fors. Baragyy ats, GOS, GSE. YowNe. SHOTTYT A, Gores. OME, We. borg ys, Gothie, GoBLE. VIE, WHS, Wse, [eee , Voge. 821. N.B.—The second letter of ©X> may throughout be changed into %» and then the two initial letters may be changed into Z: gs OME, Hd, or GSE. The letters Woo may at pleasure be changed into ©, a8 Woow or 9. (Para. 716), Conjugation of 3S. 822. Root. SS. (Para, 319.) ‘Anfinitive. se, Me. Verbal noun. SH. V. par. pres. Swe, Do. past. Sooo, R. par. prog. pres. J eythwy. Do. past. Sons. Do. _indef. aS, Meo, Sand, Do. fut. SscKo, exo. * ‘Tense. prog. pres. Seer a0, Do. past. SoBe, Do. indef. Gwe, Beso, Sasser, Do. fut. scror, Texoe, Tmper. sing. 2. STH, Srey, ST Sshoo, Sesshoo, Do. pl 1. Desh, Deas. Do pl 2 HSceh, Toth, Meee, Sacas, Porasg yrs, SHooowe-, SST. TOE. eboresg yet, Hse, soowe-,| ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 887 823. Reriexive verss (Para. 830) are formed by affixing the verb 873% to the root, or to the past verbal participle. Roots ending in a take the latter form only. ‘Thus— Root. SoAS*A. (Or Sozs87A, etc.) Infinitive. SoA se, “Verbal noun. SoAS* hbo, SoAS™od, V. par. pres. SASH, SOBA, SAMO. Do. past. Sods". R. par. prog. pres. SoAT* Gy, SOAS, SOAMOwosy. Do. past. SoS, SoAH Ny. "Do. indef. SoS", SoS Aw, SoAIRS, SOAS D Bows, SOAs DHS. Do. fut. SoAS*ScXO. [soar a, Tense. prog. pres. SoBS*HATY MS, NOAH yA, MS, SoAs0 Do. past. SoASo83e-. (SoAS*ABE not used.) Do. indef. SOAS SHE, SBS OME, SAH othe, Sod SO RSE, SoA DEAE. Do. fut. SOAS SK OE, Imper. sing. 2." SoAS7ADS9, SOAS, Do. pl. 1. — SOAS, SOAP oho, SAM orssoo. Do. pl. 2 SoS "xt, SOAS 02s. Doragysats, SoBS ASE, SOME E. HOST PYT A, SOAS AE. born gyrase, oP AUT, SOAP RUT, SoSH DTI, 824. Cavsat veras are explained in paras, 333 to 396. In the gramma- tical dialect a few of these verbs take a double objective case after them, and hence are equivalent to the English verb to cause, followed by an active infinitive. These verbals are the causals of So%to, Bx, Dabo, Briyt, SABld, ete. (C. G. 119.) Thys—orsosceh SS 7 AHSOI0 woot. Rama caused me to obtain a village. . 43338, ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. 825, Passive vers (Para. 328) are frequently used in the grammatical dialect. Before %e the letter ¢ is inserted. This verb is occasionally added to another root, without altering its meaning as; Deowses, or Deosearweo. 826. THE NEGATIVE FORM of verbs is formed (as in the colloquial dialect) from the positive infinitive, which in this position drops final &-. 827, (1) The past verbal participle, the verbal noun and the indefinite relative participle are formed by affixing ¥, 0, and 9 respectively to the positive infinitive. Thus So%¥, Sotfao, So%0. : F os 828. (2) The indefinite tense in formed by adding the pronominal terminations to the positive infinitive. The first person singular is a HSN OH. Thus Sing. So¥K, Sotsy, So%ceh, Sores, Pl, SoBe, Sot, SoS, Sods. 829. (8) _The imperative second person singular and plural are formed by adding 839 and Socth respectively to the positive infinitive. The vowels of the final s and 2% may be changed into 9, 9, —> or “, as SoMGro, Sotss6Ns, ete, NoBict, Sock. ete. 890. (4)_A negative present tense may be formed by prefixing the positive verbal noun to 82%; as Sotto 8%. (Para. 360.) A negative past tense may be formed by prefixing the positive infinitive to Sa; as o%8%. (Para. 351.) The form mentioned in para, 866 is also used. 831. (5) ‘The negative verb is sometimes formed by prefixing the negative past verbal participle to the several parts of S*¥) as Wcoy Bigo, Baey Sows, Book sfomBe. (Pains. 363 and 364.) 832. (6) Since the negative verb is formed from the positive infinitive, it has the same changes of form. For example, since the infinitive ‘of Bwyd is Se or Gve-, the negative form is @¥ or Boy, ete. MiscELLANgovs INroRMATION. 833, When the pronouns ss%éS and 78S are affixed to a progressive present, a future, or a past relative participle, initial => may be dropped,ON THK GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED tN Books. 330 and the final vowel of the relative participle lengthened. Thus Sos Wy AAS OF Sow wiry dA, Soshotoiby TY or, SowsoeHoaTry< BH, Sorority arcth or Sotto th, Sodsiorhy wrOso or Noth WNT Bike, Sows sows, WV oF FowisaTry 8, Sosfo soi ar or Som HAI, So NOTH or SONA, ele. SodSarrcdsas or SoT%s. ete. (C. 8. 115.) B84, Instend of the Weragysate, the past tense, with the final vowel changed itto —, is sometimes used. Thus 89 SQse or Sx SPIT. If Igo. (Para. 578.) Condition is also sométimes expressed by adding the particle SDé~ to any tense, but most frequently to the past tense. Thus Sx BQBSe. 835. The word @8 (which is-changed into 8) attached to the root, has the force of SGa6 attached to the infinitive, (Para, 454.) ‘Thus Br Oyrk KH ids Hawess. They must help you. (C. 8. 96.) 836. The affix 7€~ or Xé is often affixed to an infinitive, in which case ¢ is always inserted; as So%c7re or SodscXE. This affix may, however, be omitted at pleasure, without altering the sense. (Paras. 598 and 784). Thus O°Saxch Sodsc7e, or orsorcts Seek He, or Wrmxcth Sove. As Rama was cooking. 837, The following is a table of the principal grammatical terms con- nected with verbs :— : WEE ES. A transitive verb. OSE Eas. An intransitive verb, NGBE a0. A passive verb, OY SSar BES. A reflexive verb. ET YES.. A causal verb, SwSrSs¥ BD, A finite verb. OHSS Fd. A verb that is not finite.340 ON THE GRAMMATICAL DIALECT USED IN BOOKS. Poy. Soswon y NAV. Pay Ves, THRU. Begyesos. SSM Beats, PON LSYID BS.catss. IO YTD Braise, SAOyYTO BS cats, SSSrsTrvss, SS Tow, POSSI vss, 58 Yrross, CAPES. NEE rye. SEO SE ELEVA, SOEs ryan, SOSH YTD Saicatsoo, BIMHHBAD. AGH, SFM OwWsAisds, x5. ay. The root. ‘The infinitive mood. The verbal noun. ‘The present verbal participle. The past verbal participle. ‘The present relative participle. The future relative participle. ‘The past relative participle. ‘The indefinite relative participle. The present tense. The past tense. . ‘The future tense. ‘The indefinite tense. ‘The imperative mood. The negative forti. The negative past verbal participle. ‘The negative verbal noun. ‘The negative relative participle. The first person. The second person. ‘The third person. The agent. ‘Phe object. N.B.—The information given in Chapters XI to XVII, so far as general principles are concerned, apply as much to the grammatical as to the colloquial dialect. ——»>€<«—___ON Koh, GS, HP, ETC. Bal CHAPTER XIX. I. On S08, 2% Sas, HH, ETC. 838. In Telugu books written in the grammatical dialect, numerous rules have been adopted to prevent any incongruity of sound. Owing to these rules, the words of a sentence are so run into each other, and the initial letters so much altered, that a knowledge of them is indic- pensable to enable the student to understand a grammatically written book. 839. These rules fall under two heads, namely— First. Those rules which are observed, when the following word begins with a vowel. Secondly. Those rules which are observed, when the following word begins with @ consonant. The changes which take place, when the following word begin with a vowel, are of two kinds, namely— 840. (1) %o®, ie. the union of two words, by dropping the final secondary vowel form of the first word, and substituting in its place the secondary form of the initial vowel of the second word; as OvsSoocek + FBO, Tad Byer. 841. (2) The change of the initial vowel of the second word into ite secondary form, and attaching it to the consonant oS or S. The former is ain insertion to prevent hiatus, the latter is the final 2% 3x ‘of the preceding word. When attached to o& the form is calle 8,8. Thus 0 + GScth, SEATeh; Bae + stoowe- PaswvoPowe. (Para. 705.) 842. In order to apply the rules, all the words of the Telugu language are divided into two classes. called SG yO¥swev and Stes,348 ON Fh, Sys, ab HO ETC, (1). On G8 SSyBEsveo. ‘The meaning of this term has already been explained in paragraph . This class of words includes— (1)-All dative cases; as T°SaOBE-, T™MOONNO, SiiawOXOE, (2) All objective cases; as Tx or Dr, SSO, HOF. (3) The locative or instrumental case of irregular nouns; as gobe, ATE bE. : (A) All postpositions ending in &; as S7S%E-. See para, 720. : (5) The words SS and Bx. (i.e, BE BE) (6) The first and third persons singular, and the third person neuter plural of the past tense, and of both forms of the indefinite tense, and the first person singular of the negative indefinite tense; as So&@E- SoGe, Sowhtoe, Nose, SOBs, SOBAT or Soe, ote. (7) The infinitive, and the present verbal participle; as So’, Sosboior-. (8) The Boragyyaco, the GWoHO-GANaGs, and the esborugy me, (0) The conjunction dé or ASE". (Para. 777.) (10) ‘The adverbial affix 7€ or AE, and the atlix SOE or Se. Paras. 784 and $34.) 5 " (A1) A few other words, ¢.9,, Jo’, Wome, Godse, awe, AXE, dgySower-, dey bor, 2). On SBen, 844, The class of words called §®eo includes all those which are not SSI OV SIED. Hence it includes—ON 09, GH, GAB, ETO. 843, (1) All nominative, genitive, and vocativg cases, except the words Bx and TAS, : (2) The postpositions which do not end in &. See para. 720. (8) All parts of the verb, except those which are 2 /5S¥: Sven. (4) The affixes denoting a question, emphasis, and doubt. (5) All exclamations. First. RULES OBSERVED, WHEN THR FOLLOWING WORD BEGINS WITH A VOWEL. (A). When the first word 4 a SSS¥ Ws. 845. (1) When a &% 858) 88x00 is followed by a word commencing with » vowel, that initial vowel is dropped, and in its place, ité secondary form is attached to the final & of the 2% ,8S¥)B¥%s.. Thus Xogsisooe~ + GOO, MoggxOQe; OIDET + Gd8, EDDA. 846. (2) ‘The words mentioned below, have the power of dropping final ©, and then taking So8— (a) The objective. canes SE, DYER, HP, Dossy, SMO, dour; as Skye + AAS, BBAAC, (Or May SAAB.) (0) All dative cases; a8 DreaoOEEK + FQ)» TMD, (Or TMIYWID®.) TOKE, +. GB, TAOBDYE, (Or THADIOKGONE.) (c) The cansal affixes S"es8e and Bote; as T*dSowe 4 OF, Mdomre¥. (Or Tasodsoar¥.) . (@) The present verbal participle; as Sete + Gok, veo WGHOAB. (Or SehtHA048.)344 ON 40h, CoP, cOH,B, ETC, (e) The words got%e, wore, and dows; as godse- + GTP Cth, Gory céh. (Or Goraoary + ms ss -— MH + . ~ ta = 4 = B + wy, BBo eth. 7+ He — Si + B= UEC - + @& = = So, + Geese BOSS Serbs, 7+ @e — So + GH = Nope, ~ + op = — ve + wR e me. ~ + Sos — ss + dv UBS. as +5 = — Shir + dysus SA RESI sm, vo + @ = — BY + HZ = BE Segvgso. +e = = wow + DESY = VOKRISE SH, ~ he — Bete + bes botsTress. —~ eh = — Kom + bie = KOR pose, a — KowG + BSH KOBE YW Reese, a — Kom + Bgl = Konmag gin. o + 8 = - wv £ oro = wMgy, 5b +e = — wo + ery = ogrysen, an — rl + bes = rertgssn. Db 4+ @ = — Bh + Gineg = mxgirHegess, wv tee — SH + wo = sg. wee = — SBF KGS SEEKS, as +e = = B+ vl = ST pSorss. oa +8 = — Sry + Kn = SROs. wees — Rf 4 esas = Kersanssy, 7 bee — Ft Bw OBIS, N. B.— ~ + © sometimes remains and ~ + & sometimes becomes 5; a8 Sry 4 Well = Soto, So + Sede = wbte,ON £08, Sir, aYh,B, BIC. TABLE OF CONSONANT COMPOUNDS. Fo+ a = Ky as Oe S +o = & — of S +o = Fs — oF 5S +e 3s Ss +89 2 os Foe 6 = oe So + ote os 5 + 8 = 3s 5S ¢ ns os Fo + & = or S + we ae Stn os S + H = of 5 + w= oo T+ we 65 5 + b= as 5S + 8 = 505 5 + b= 305 5 + 7 = oor 5 + o = sen S + es sod 5S + e = 565 S + f= 655 S + 8 = 5 S + w= oT S + 6 = a5 5 + = oT 5 + &- on 5S +e = 3s wv + Fe ae et Pe 5; — ah ~ + = S — e REE EEE EEE EEE EHH EE HEHEHE HEHEHE B08 vty exh tts 085 os ots us wre osT GAoa ass. erties, em Kiss, Seretyss, ent se, TK Riso, BE Sx, BE eyes, SrySKyoo. Seapets. Say. esos, Sows. Say wUgso. bbe. Seow, SHOTS. Gory 8. Beye, B65 KD. roost. Satire, atx so SRnETH_o Soxyonoyiss, sss. SHAS Ts. Be Sos. aaoEEyyy He, ater) os. eas. * When \ is affixed, it coalesces with ~ or —~, and becomes **. N.B—Instead of 5, the letter s may be used throughout. . F.C. K. PRESS, VEPERY, MADRAS—1905.INDEX Arden’s Telugu Grammar COMPILED BY B. J. ROCKWOOD, aa,,5.> to form verbs, 387. » PB) BAS, 30% to form verbs, 988. declension of : 1st, 114-116. 9nd, 117-122, 3rd, 123-198. formation of, 96-100. gender of, 101-108. having same plural form, 140. irregular nouns, 129-142. » on ending in 3, 188. » oo» 9 Gp 189, number of, 103-105. peculiar forms of in pl., 128 seq. qualified by rel. part., 596528, rules for formation of cases, 106-109. 1» Genitive, 190-186. termination of two nouns closely connected and coming together, 104. use of cases, 110-112. with 2, 235. verbal 800 ‘ verbal nouns ’. Noun sentences 607, seq. ‘consisting of an indirect interrogation, 611 s09. » doubtful alternative, 615. ending with affix 4p or pom, 647. in apposition to %oxd, 614. » oy BEG¥I&, 619. introduced by ‘ that ', 616 seq. involving repetition of words previously spoken or written, 624 seg. in which, in English, ‘ that’ is not used, 610. subject of verb ‘ to be’, 622. succession of, 623, Number. agreement of verb and subject, 295 ; 297. of nouns, 108, Numerals, 290-248 ; 778 s09. attached to S8 = at the rate of, 678. cardinals, 281, 720 s09. indefinite, 240, masculine and feminine cardinals, 236. neuter cardinals, 982, » 9 declined, 288, ordinals, 241. pronominal affixes with, 249, Aaii INDEX ‘Numerals 280.248 ; 778 seq. auocession of, 989. used with 2¥ as last number, 235. reduplication of to express ‘ each of two,’ etc., 197. Objeotive case of inanimate things, 298, 726, 730. Of himself or herself, 183. Omission of first verb in affirmation, 295. Onomatopoeia terms, 686, Order, of words in sentence, 294, Orders how expressed, 637 ; 638. repeated, 643 seq. Ordinals, 941 ; 242; 234. used with pronominal afixes, 249, Orthography, 29 se. Passive verbs, 328, 825. remarks on, 329. rel. part, 612. Participles. Relative part explanation of, 515-521. forms of, 609, 791 seg. future, 792, prefixed to #43 or wt7> to form noun sentence, 647. subject often understood, 522, » of how expressed, 523, indefinite relative part :— form same as past v. part, 492, 791, 827. habit or custom denoted by, 636 ; 53: meaning of, 534 seq. neg. ind. rel. part. formation of, 348, prefixed to ot, sx, ovtiSo, 598 (2)b. on BoB, 598 (2) note. yn BST, SOK, Wigotise, seps%, 598 (a)d. pn 88, 600, » 9» 88, 808 note. Pe Sa my St, ARs, BOK, 505c. ty 9 B0XSB, 5046. v1 Syl 598 (1)e note. » 9» 808 598 (1)e note. » 9 & to express future, 650. nn BF 8iko, 6m, Nsom, 597 (1a. oy OB, 597). used with a& to form neg. pres. t., 363. ‘used to form comp. noun used in conditional sentenose, 583, 47,tnpEx iii Participles—contd. negative rel. participle. formation of, 363. meaning of, 539. Prefized to vorss, vorsiiy, vorss, 5045. yy BoesB, 5B4e. w» 9» BYBB, 590. passive rel., 612, 528. past rel., part see 833. of verbs ending in 2, 511. meaning of, 538. prefixed to wots, 598 (2)b note. vy BIH, 5D. by BORE, SDHC (1) & (2). 9 SMBsi0B, 598(1}e note, »—» Bthard, Bho, Oreste, BLY, 598 (1)d. » x» SHB, 590. ny» Sots, Borisy, wot BS, 5045. » vy GFSise, 687m, Nsw, 507 (1). - o> Sfp, Vsp, OH ete, 597 (1b. present rel., part prefixed to sor%, 504c. v9 BBE, 590, vy» BOSS, words, wor Ts, 5045, » » BTS, 6am, DFsom, 597 (Iu. oo» OPPs hy eM ete, 597 (1B. Verbal participle. continuous action expressed by, 499. kinds of, 487. uses of, 493-601. negative verbal participle absolute use of, 602, formation of, 346, Profixed to o% to form neg. ind. tense, 353. ny 90TH, 505, 601. » sora and used with éo2%s; 506. used to form nog. rel. part., 368 ; 510. » » help express strong affirmation, 368, past v. part, 790, 827. receding resis and enfses, 50% anal { belore ae ‘tating lapse of te 604. ‘emphasised, 492. incompleteness expressed by, 501 prefixed to a verbal noun, 474 N,xiv INDEX Praticiples—contd. prefixed to @ to form conditional, 665. yo» Grote, 598 (2)a ii. » » Ry expressing although, 491. wa» Grobrvm, 445. » 9» Grothe, 445 note. v1» Crothews, 448. same form as ind. rel, part, 492. ‘used to express reason of an action, 497. present v. part. ‘emphasised by ~, 489, 490. lengthened form in ,, or with sy, 488; 780. prefixed to sc), 500. oy Gy, 582, by» Gos, 588, yy 0B, 586, Geotsrm, 508 (2)a iv. wore, 504. Grote, 444. » Growin, 446. used to express strongly marked progressive prosent time, 443. Perhaps, expressed by Str, 803. Permission exprossed by says, 453; 468. Person addressed expressed with 5%, 635. ‘» im objective cage, 641, Place, rules, with reference to, 394 s69, Please, expressed by od, 804. Plurals of irregular nouns: rules for, 128. » same form for different words, 140. Posssesion denoted by use of dots, 377. 1» 8dj, pronouns, 190, ” composite noun, 425, Post positions, 148148, 718-798, 765. with genitive, 148, 719. objective, 148, 719. n dative, 143, 719. used as adjectives, 149, declined, 211. used with pronominal affixes, 496, Pronouns, 168; 172; 197; 181 seg. 771 seg. 782. Panotuation, 92. Purpose, expressed by dative case of verbal noun, 476; 595a. nn» Xecthots affixed to inf., 5958, 1» 1» VOXWSS, DABaso, O88 affixed to ind, rel. part, 596c.INDRX xv Purpose expressed by wip, ennis, on16 ind. rel. part, 595d. yn OA with SB, 653. >» 9» in negative by nog. v. part with wow profixed to éroBtoty, 601. Prefixes, .. Sanskrit, 698 to 696, Primary verb conjugated $70; see also, 247. meaning of, 375 809. Probability, expressed by 43» + ind. rel, part, 647 note. Progressive pres. time, expressed by 4%) or pres. v. part prefixed to a Probibition, expressed by srt, oS, Si, 455; 498. Pronominal affixes, 202 s69. ‘used where in English Copuls is used, 420. » to oxp. Comparative and Superlative degrees, 424 seo N.B. 9 possession, 425, » With postpositions, 426, s608, used instead of, 207. used with adverbs, 212. » om odinals, 949, Pronouns, 168—201. personal, 169—179. Ist person “Ax declined, 169, and, '% 4, IT Srd » 178176, peculiarities in use of, 399—400. used to denote respect, 172; 174; 177; 178. effect of on noun in predicate, 392—400, demonstrative adj. interrogative adj., 189. ributive, 193—197. emphatic, 183. indefinite, 188. interrogative, 184—187, 189. possessive adj., 190. referring to number, 191. reflexive, 180—169. relative, 617. Proper names, 670. Proportion, expressed by &7g affixed to pres. past and indefinite relative participle, 597 (2) Quantity, expressed by affix Deo, 679. Questions, how expressed, 299, 672 seq. ‘Reason of action expressed by w9, 651- ” » past, v. part 497. yom nw sed absolutely, 50% note. » ow Verbal noun with sp, $8, 5949. 532,xvi INDEX, Reason of action expressed by rel. parts with wots, worisp, woro8s, 5045. » 9», ot and rel. parts and pres. v. part, 594¢ Q), (@)- » oy inf. and wf, 594d. oy ROE, 5OKe. » Short cond, form, 594f. Readiness, expressed by inf + wos + dro%, 481. Rodupltcation of numeral to exp. ‘each of two,’ oto., 197, » — Bronouns ,, , several, respeotive, various, 199. » MoWN yy» each, every, 193. Reflexive verbs 830 ; remarks on, 331, 823. combined with causal verbs, 936. s¢0 also, 340. pronouns, 180— 183. Relative. participles sea under participles. pronouns, 517. sentences, 515 seg. 530 seq. Repeating messages or words, 627 ; 637 seq. 643. ‘Repetition of an action, expressed by pros. v. part with x3), 500. 8 Telugu word, 688, yn a» ¥orb in cond. sent. to denote certainty, 688, To require or want exp. by TSB & dative, 437. nin negative by o¥),08e%, 438. Respeot shown by wod, 804. by use of personal pronoun, 172; 174 ; 177; 178; 181; 185. s20 also 206. Respective, various, translated by reduplication of pronouns, 199. Besult, consequence «439 or e165 + ind. rel. part., 596. Roots. defined, 245 N.B. ending in & or % peculiarities in reflexive, 331. pooulisrities of in Ist conj. ending in =, 272. oo 8 8B: 30d, yg, kn, 945; 974; 282. nn Std, yy 3, 2455 284, used to form nouns, 100. Rules with reference to place 824, seg Same plural for different words, 140. Sanskrit prefixes, 692 seg. 969. Sooond caso, 758. Second declension of nouns, 769. Self, exp. by reflexive pronoun, 180; see also 183. Sentences, order of words in, 294. Seventh case, 768.xvifi INDEX habitual pres, and fut. colloquial form of, 309; 310. neg: formation of, 362; 364, » used to express strong aflirmation, 368, ‘used to express habit or custom, 306 (1). » on» — future, 808 (2). imperative, 797, 798. imperfect. continuous, 453, formed by prefixing pres. v. part. to drot3p, 448 ; 533 » in Northern Ciroars, 449, nog. formed by dotde> + pres, v. part., 450. » — »_ in Northern Ciroars, 451. use of, 449 note. indefinite, compound forms of, 446 ; 794. contracted, 312. negative, 352, liar form of, 817. Ese of, 308 past colloquial forms of, 311. neg. formation of, 351 ; 364, 830. strongly marked ayy or droi8D + past v. part, 447. ‘usos of, 307. to express ‘if’, 578. peculiar tense, 317. pluperfeot formation Gas or @ot8 + past v. part, 447. progressive future tense. formation éots~ + pres, v. part., 444. nm Neg. rots +4, 5, 444 note. progressive present formation of, 364 ; 275 ; 291, 838, nn eg., 849; 860; 864; 550d. Termed, named, called, expressed by v7, 654. That, introducing noun sentence, 616 #09. That is, exprossed by wim, 668. ‘That, these, expressed by & and %¢, 189. They say, it is said, exprossed by ets, 6&4. Thinking, considering, seeing, as, because, expressed by 9, 651. Third case, 759. Though, see although. Threat, expressed by ¥~, 227.INDEX ax ime duration of — as, while, expressed by mm + inf., 698 ()a (i, (ii). Goth, 598 (2)a ii. » + past v. part, 598 (B)a iii, » + present, 598 (8)a iv. a8 long 98 43% or 38S + a rel. part., + Yo¥, 508 (2)c. in the time that, during the time that, expressed by ot, ig oso + ind. vel. part,, 698 (2)b; see note, until expressed by =r3~, 2085, wigodsw, Spp0%+-ind. rel. part., 598 (2)d- » yoy BEY + past rel. part., 699. point of. after Sew~S Basho, Drees, BY + past rel, part., 698(I)d. 8 goon as, 1S + inf, 698 (1)b; see note. 8*% 4 verbal noun, 474, 800 also ‘ directly, at the moment that ' before, before that si0%, snot, YrUGswo + negative vorbal part., 598 (1)a ; 698 (2)8 note. by the time that exyi38 + ind. rel. part., 598 (1}c note ; 600. directly, at the moment that, Sob, S42% + past rel. part., 598 (1)b note. from the time that, since, exye%o + past rel. part, 598, (1)e note. when, wig + any rel. part., 598 (1)¢;; see note. » 9055+ + past rel. part., 598 (2) note. ‘Too, expressed by aftixes, 218. ‘Transitive verbs, 244. ‘Two or three, four or five, 240. Unless, expressed by cond. form in 8 with % + wD or mA, 589. Until, expressed by avs~, s0%, wUgotsn, spp5 + ind. rel. park, 598 (2)d. Upon, expressed by 4%, seo 598 (1)o note. Various, translated, 199. Verbal Noun ‘a8 soon as, expressed by S*8 + V.N., 474; 490. cause expressed by sy or 45 + V.N., 476. case of, 472; declension of, 469. English infinitive expressed by, 483 seq. forms of, 469; 788 ; 827 ; formation of nog., 947; 470. neg. prog. pres. t. formed by, 849. noun sentence subject of verb to be, expressed by, 622; 488. purpose expressed by dative case of, 476; 5960. subject of 471; » succession of, 478. ‘Verbal part. seo participles,ax INDEX Verbs, 785 seq. agreement with subject, 295. classes of, 244. conjugations, 245. ‘contracted in conditional form, 566. defective, 498. forme of, 246, formation of positive, 252; 275; 284; 289. of negative, 345. number of with several subjects, 297. omitted in affirmation, 225. parts of positive from, 251; of negative, 344. peculiurities of 1st oonj. ending in xo, 272. person, 786. Very well, expressed by #8, 228. Vocative, (5, 727, 728, 529, 764. Vowel initial forms of, 28; 38 s09.; 83. secondary , ,, 23; 40. sounds or prounciation of, 36 seq. Valgerisme, 64. What, expressed by Sio, 187. Whatever, 553 seq. ‘When, expressed by short conditional form, 587. » 9» Bye 598 (1)c, see note, » 5 ¥0Se*+tpast rel. part., 598 (2)b note. ‘Whenever, exprosed by UX yZg~, 598 (2)¢ note. ‘Whether—or not, expressed by repetition of esxiyt88 or a, 599; also see, 615. ‘Whether—or, expressed by repetition of =, 615; see, 215. Which, expressed by 9, 189. » » OB, 184, Whichever, whatever, whoever, expressed by rel. sent. and %, 558 49. While, expressed by 7-+int., 598 (2)a. » 9» Grodtérm, 598 (2)a i, see alo ii Who, expressed by Js%, 184. ‘Whoever, 553. Why, expressed by Se + inf., 482. ‘Wish or bendiction, expressed by 7, 676; see 801, Without expressed by neg. v. part. + “ors 505. Words used which have no meaning, 691. Yos expressed by US, SOB, OG iso, 674; 321 iv.INDEX xxi e ©, Tho. e90t> (vulg. for wis) affixed to a word means ‘They 88} e90% used instoad of str, 607. affixed to Jor6% and Jor Gs because, 662. » 9 Dds, Sern, Avge, ey % as follows, 661. ‘used to introduce the words of a speaker or writer, 659. contracted form of on, 586. 08 added to words to show respect, 904. G08 inserted before 0%, spp%, 598 (2) c. used to express size or greatness of position, 680. declined, 191. 08+ + ind. rel. part,, 598 (2) b. + past rel. 598 (2) &. 08t> with gon. and emphatic pro. to expres e90%06 declined, 191. Sot postposition, 148 ; 146, 722, declined, 209. gots + any rel. part., 694 (¢) 1 and 2. + an ind. rel. part., 595 c. wots, vorssig, worsBs + pros. past or nog. rel. part., 694 b, @¥,,% doolined, 209. eo¥,08eo used with inf, 477. used to express ‘ not to need or want’, 438; 459. WKB ‘letter,’ 82. 9% 768, 820, wry tego words, 93. Way ‘vowel,’ 83. 9%, 108, 709, 710, 714 &b affixed to a word, 684. e993 afixed to a rel. participle, 529. ejjoo8 affixed to rel. part. to form condition, 568. composition of, 569 note. tepprctow to express if, 580, erxdo88, UB, 6, 529, 530, WexsolBAy, 530. tip with rel. part. to exp. noun sentence, 647. introducing words of another speaker, 602. spontaneous actions, 183,xxii inpex ‘ip with ind. rel. part. exprossing purpose, 595 d. » 9» Consequence, 696 &, eojgr7 used with rel. part., 647. gp affixed to past rel. part. to express ‘ as soon as’, 598 (1) 8 gp affixed to pros. past and part. to exp.‘ as’, 697 b. caygo7 affixed to pres. or past part. to express ‘if’, 597 8 n, 98% declined, 175. 98 declined, 178, 174, having value of 38%, $35. wassmm nsos of, 664 seq. » When asking moaning of a word, 665 a. » to expross ‘that is’, 668. » o» » time, 669; 606, eoxypp used in complicated sentences, 648. wig Bvgss words, 93. 0 used with 58: to expross purpose, 653. to express ‘lest’, 653. » to express reason of action, 651. » idiomatically ‘ namely *, 649 seg. to introduce # noun sentence, 616 ; 620; 621. » 8 &n equivalent to quotation marks, 621. » omitted when #% is used, 680, e993Ry%$p used in complicated sentences, 648. wang used to indicate « succession of noun sentences, 623. ny declined, 191. 9% uséd instead of, Hg, 630. WWEGeasoos, 686. © idiomatically used to express named, called, 654. ‘used with noun to attach sentence of explanation, 655. 1» Sirk, KMrEPseo, 656; 666. 29°88 uses of, explained, 657 ; 658. eoxgs0, 710. 93iy!38 used to express ‘ although ', 690. » on» ‘by the time that ', 698 (1) ¢ note. rr do. » ‘whether or not’, 592." ey!8:00 used to express ‘from the time that’, 598 (1) ¢. eaiigé used to express ‘ when’, 596 (1) 0. declined, 209, oSyTir used to express ‘ whenever ', 698 (1) 0.INDEX xxiii wiosreesoos, 106. +4 x used as termination of nouns in predicate, 995. changed to form nouns denoting agent, 97. Box», 716, Yon + 0% used with inf. to express readiness, 481 w defore érods, 401. » to express spontaneous action, 183. ows used to form indefinite pronouns, 188, 9 Bdjectives, 154 ; 158 ; 162 ; 768; 769. » 9 Somposite nouns, 203. » when one noun is put in apposition to another, 164. ows used to express ‘ either’, 214. no» feven’, 216. indefinite sense, 219. gon 8 used with per. pro. to express ‘ as for myself, etc.,” 183. edirg used as an interjection, 229. ©966, declined, 189. cage plural epi or werog, 116. ©9% conjugated in positive, 319 ; in neg., 358 ; 820. meaning of, 381; 467. use of, 408; 716, (935+ an interjection, 229. 8. — used to express a question, 299; 783. » With Qnd form of past tense to expross ‘if’, 577. w defore etm, sug, ose, 598 (2) b. ‘& demonstrative adjective, 189. see also, 834. 5 or U% oss have no meaning, 691. 3 added to an adjective, 155. 6% used as a prefix to denote feminine gender, 101. 80% third personal pronoun feminine gender, 176. SHO EET 0, 800. OD, 176. SoG, 175. Boos used with inf., 477. SoA TE used for Sao, 233. storsgyres, Sol.xxiv INDEX 3. 4, 716, * of past v. part. lengthened to express ‘ although‘, 491. Rom, so87¥e to express ‘ another’, 901. "ow used to form casual verbs, 938 ; 341; 818. ‘08 ‘80 much ' declined, 191 Goses ‘so many ' declined, 191. ‘ots declined, 209. Yj, declined, 209. ‘%e%) imp. form used with S*, 228. conjugated, 827; 818. used with inf., 477. ‘482 third personal pro. masculine, 175. bdsx, 719. ‘32 third personel pro. feminine, 173. declined, 174. ‘3% used to express ‘ both ', 237. ‘Ry ‘80 many ’ declined, 191. ‘ust declined, 209. ong used with 3, 227. oy OF, 998, ‘gp declined, 135. we. %i with past v, part expressing ‘ although *, 491. used before star, sug, ose, 598 (2)b. demonstrative adj. pronoun, 189. imp. form of 3%) used with 34, 228. also with 5~, 227. 40 third personal pronoun feminine, 176. Bm ,, rs 5 » 116 Brass ,. >» mascoline, 175. ae. & changed:to ~ in verbs, 310. Gotrs + past v. part., 445, + pres v. part, 444, 08D + pres. v. part., 448. + past v. part., 447.iNDEX xxv 0% Used with negative verb past to express neg. cond., 567. Preceded by pres. or past verb. part, to mark pres. or past tense strongly, 576. Go% conjugated,-374. Got distinguished from B¥, 406. Got, 598/20. Got distinguished from 8p, 408-410. 0% used in compound tenses, 445, 446. 4 0t48 used in compound tense, 450. Gor used adverbially with neg. v. part,, 605; 601. » mg td roe, 808. + GroBbozyo, 01. Gods, 533. @o% with neg. v. part, ending in com, 514. n inf, and wow lo express ‘ readiness’, 481. conjugated 372 ; 829; in neg., 874. meanings of, 375. preceded by 7 used impersonally, 390. used to express English ‘ to have ', 877. vw with ORS and ag, 878. » when ‘ to be’ is not @ copula, 380. » with word ending in wo», 401. Got with pres. v. part. to express former habit now discontinued, 536. Ge otiagg, 671. Gow, 48. ©8550, 710. 46% with or without a pres. verb. part., 533, use of in Northern Cirears, 376. rH + post v. part. perf. or plup. pert tense, 447. use of in Northern Circars, 376. Gi. es declined, 193. ‘we, 709. aur, 709. , 709. w, 109. a. a, To. 308 used in adj. sont. ending in +, 560. declined, 191, Dsavi INDEX ‘D026 uso’ in adj. sent. ending in >, 559. declined, 191. Dots declined, 209. DotG¥or because, 662. caution about use of, 663. DotsFsso% because, 662. caution as to use of, 663. 38,25 declined, 209. + 80, 631. Seosol8 used with adj. sentence ending in ~, 560. Oto used in cond. serttence, 573. 2% an affix denoting quantity, 679. 286:69 name of vowel >, 87. OR used for 43, 185. gy declined, 191. S%pzo declined, 209. + vob, 641. 226% use of indefinite tense of, 440 N.B. gr added to upp, 597 b note. » Sgt, 698 (I)o note. Dgpod declined, 310. sto used in adj. sont, ending in «5, 558-557, declined, 184. used in noun sent., 561; 612, 958 feminine interrogative pro., 185. 38% used with si OT & to expross, ‘each ' followed by ‘ his own’, ‘her own’, 196. DSBs, 609. 4. ~ used to denote emphasis, 300; 783. » oo» timyselt,’ ete, 188, vm With past v. part., 492; 446; 447. on» infinitive, 480. » present verbal part., 443. +» conditional sent., 583 ; 589. » rel. part to indicate custom or habit, 535 ; 536 ; 547. 9 used in adj. sent. ending in ~<, 558, interrogative adj., 189. . followed by sv or to express ‘ each’ followed by ‘ his own,’ otc., 196,INDEX, xxvii ‘eso (singular) plaral, 128 (a). ‘S8gsm name of vowel ~, 87. Se declined, 184. 0 to indicate ‘if’, 579 note., Sob, 660. S20 187; used to express ‘cither-or ’, 215. D008, 695. ‘Ste used with #9 to express ‘lest’ with verb of fear ’, 652. used to express ‘ perhaps ', 662; 908. Svs declined, 181 ; 140. Se added to intnitive, 482. Serr + wor, 661. 8 affixed to numerals, 678. D8gs09 name of vowel 2 (>), 87. a &, 710, AFot88 or 28038 used for 28284, 238, &¥, 22h, 2.8 or 2828 in each member of sentence to express ‘ another ', 200, 807)-¥j- toexprose * each ', ‘every *, 193, 867, Si or 2871,%),-B to express ‘ euch ’, ‘every ’, 199. BEKGis0, 82. . a8 name of vowel 2,, 87. 8 mark of aspiration, 82. &%6 deolined, 187. & * torminating on adj. sent. and including Sst, 553 sq, » hom oe » 5, 558, » 2 mon » etse8, 559. » mw wo» » 308, deasso’8, 580, » yy NOUN yy » dst, 561. used to express ‘ whether-or', 615. +» » doubt oF reference, 303, 783. " form ordinal numbers, 241. &6gs0 name of vowel, 87. f5sreo ‘ alphabet’, 83.xxviii INDEX gg. v0. . Togs» name of vowel Z, #7. T's G8V Son, 153. ¥, 8 + pos. inf. used to form neg. verbal part., 346, WoW used to form comparatives, 151. ¥o8 added to positive inf. to form neg, imperfect, 353. ¥] added to neuter nouns to form feminine, 98. Ve used with verbal noun to denote continuous habit, 433. Ver} reflexive of ¥%, 381. Vey doolined, 136. plural of, 126. ¥ es, deolined, 189. Boos, 494 ag. preooded by dative-to get, 430. with subjeot in maso. or fem. gender, 431. oquivalent of dws and éol%n, 492, connnot be used as a copula, 482, irregular rel, part = Xe 482. See sleo, 460. 4 used with verbal noun to denote cont, habit, 433. uused as an auxiliary to express ability, 484 ; 460. F inf, of #8, 319, ‘ jolned to %* to express ‘never mind’, ‘ alright", 297. sw Bost 4 dative to express * to want’, 437, HP nag. inf. of wy, 358, uses of, 220-399, Wom uses of, 290 2. ys causal form of FTI, 885, We ite cauaative form, 335, WS pl. of, 1385 We added to neuter nouns to form mase. 9 hm, aa, he me B>e used with 48 to express * unions "IQ wane of, ENB, te expense webs or which is oF was net. RR . = Thar 22d seither or . FasINDEX xxix ‘Wb to express never mind * all right’, 327. ‘W's rales as to use of 418 26g. also, 400. ‘used with prog. pres. tense to form neg. prog. p. t., 349. » mast tense to form neg. past t., 365. ‘Wrvpy used in Cuddapab Distriot, 438. ‘Ws*es, 682. ‘Treo doolined, 184. pl. of, 1288. ‘Wd declension of, 198k ; 187. Bots declined, 311. postposition, 148. 8-32 name of subscribed consonant §, 88. % added to pos't. inf. to form nog. imp., 853. roots ending in—peculiarities in reflexive, 331 Woxsreseho pl. of, 116. ‘Wore used to express prohi » With inf., 477, * 5 8 postposition, 148. $708 declined, 191. #806 declined, 191. § ¢ conjugated in pos. 270 ; in neg., 354. 678 affixed to past or ind. rel. participle, 597 (2). €7 ay declined, 191. 7% used to form reflexive verbs $80, See also, 340. conjugated in pos't. 278 ; in neg., 367; 811. nd imp, and verbal noun, 330. #7087) reflexive of &7s:, 881. sp name of vowel w, 87. Pgghgo, 4» 8. 76% affixed to ind. rel. part., 695 . postposition, 143. Few declined, 138. € bm pl. of, 128%. §* used ag inf. and imp. of #7, 330, © "tée0 declined, 184. #*398 pl. of, 1280. #°°e used with inf, 477 TAO pl. of 128d; geniXXX INDEX ESE sso, 195. 5 (Eyer name of subscribed consonant \_/, 88, Gos, 165 29. Becsoises, 757. x Kesxes, 086. Kor ‘you know’, 681. Mare, 683. Ko affixed to inf. gives future significance, 413. » » Boun 4 foree of adj., 166. used with pronominal affices, 204. Keotso% affixed to inf: to express purpose, 595d, Kow conjugated, 314 ; 434, used to express ‘ ability *, 450. Konww conjugated, 434. used to express ‘ ability’, 461. TH added to inf., 598'(2)a 836. used with adj. or noun and 0%, 387-391. peculiarly to express ‘similarity ’ or‘ doubt ', 405, hv to form adverbs, 208. 778 used with expressions of ‘ wishing’ or ‘ benediction ', 676. Tp used to express ‘ either—or*, 214 » for 37, 293 59. » with 8 to expross ‘ unles ‘ whether or not’, 598. T7 used with an inf. express ‘as soon a 178s, 179, ‘A or A used with repetition of a word, 688, 1% roots ending in—peculiarities in reflexive, 331. Mo% pl. of, 128 d. %4 name of vowel *, 8°. Meabygo 4,» $87 Kop plof, 128 a. Ker declined, 131, Hari declined, 138. Be, 18%, AT ys 5, 205. BT ockeN gp, Ol. fxs declined, 132. ysis, 93. 589. *, 698 (1)b.INDEX xxxi . ®. Forswyoos, 685. a ®, 109. wv +S how pronounced, 89 717. SsSy conjugated, 897 ; 818, Seb gs, 160. ‘Wow used instead of 3, 485. ‘Wronski used instead of Koi, 44. W°D4 deolined, 187. DOGS, 683. 5085, 481. Serw conjugated, 327 818. Dep pl of, 1280. Bef contracted form of As, 511, ‘3s used to express ‘ apioce ’, 198, ‘Wye declined, 134. 76 used with verbal nouns, 475 ; 5940. ‘a postposition, 143, Beragysiss, 799-834. av pl. of, 128g; 137; 188, ow declined, 136. ‘B:s10% conjugated in negative, 356. Pmowirs 4, » positive, 333, 336, Gsm conjugated positively, 281 ; 803, a reflexively 830 in neg., 857. ” negatively. 356. °53y conjugated, 818. tex pl. of 198 a; declined, 137. % scan interjection, 229, 8. 8 how pronounced, 89 ; 717. cs conjugated, 282, owe, 685. * gy, 700.xxii INDEX &. 4S inserted between adjective ending in and noun beginning with a vowel, 157. 4, 3, e pl. of nouns ending in, 1984, d. yp used as pl. ending, 1284, &, B. & & & pl. of nouns ending in 1988, d, k. Genitives of, 131. & used in gen. instead of » in nouns, 115. 3, 186. om oom Pronont & & & pl. of nouns ending in, 198. > some roots ending in—contract past rel. p., 511. & used as a pl. ending, 128. n By a8 termination of noun in predicate, 393. » a» Objective case, 115, 6. 84 contracted form of Rx, 51). SBysos, 93, 707 Sgoo% or Sifrxsors, Sir added to past. rel. part. to express directly, the moment that, 598 (1,5. Sayssos, 99. 6:5 used to form abstract nouns, 96. ‘Gxjy used to express ‘ except’, 222. Sesar8 used to express ‘ after’, 598 (1)d ; 800. Geos used with inf., 477- Sexpp nameof vowel, 87. ECs used to form abstract nouns, 96. BH pl. of, 1986. ww, 632. declined, 180. Gree used to form pl. of nouns, 136f. Byb srnwy, 759. Bow causal form of Br, 335. Bo 385. ‘Bsxy conjugated, 327, 818. Boase see, 440 309. %S with past verb. p. used to form conditional sentence, 565, 799.INDEX xxxiii 3s, 818. Sw used to express ‘ unless *, 589. S** used with verbal noun to express 8 postposition, 143. to indicate person addressed, 635. S**% examples of its use, 441. Ses uged as postposition, 143. SSS ,, with past rel. part. to express ‘directly, the moment that’, 598 16 note. as soon as’, 474; 490. &. SRS used with crow, 378. declined 911 ;, 143, Shot used with verb expressing ‘motion to’, $24, SR8800 with verb expressing ‘ motion from ', 324, > used for o, 315. asroust and Sols used for avo04 and rs added to pos. indef. rel. part, ‘ until », 598 (2)d. es 4, TAN. ws vocative form of composite nouns ending in 8, 25. 8 changed to o~23 and 75% as terminations of composite nouns, 398, 542. cortain elegant uses of, 518-549. Idiomatic uses of in comp. nouns, 544 547. ” » to exp. doubtful alterative, 546. » oo» Sif’ Calthough ', 351. 8-28, 983. 4's name of vowel 7>, 87. = Bigs words, 93. S761 and SCD uses of, 179. S76¥ example of its uses, 441. xfs, 105, 729, 724, 898 seq. Kb xorg, 758, 75°. *. ® equivalent to O in past, rel. p. + avr, 5:9. postposition, 143; 145. Sesows conjugated, 288. 833,560 in apposition to a noun sentence, 619, "T> used to express question, 299; 801. » with past. rel. part. to express ‘although ’, 591, ae ; . ‘whether or not’, 592, i» 88 possessive adjective pronoun, 190. ®xxxiv INDEX ‘Tras declined, 181. Thars¥snos, 724 seg. Tro oF So0N'S used indefinitely, 240. declined, 238. used as termination of noun in predicate, 393 "affixed to pos. inf. to form indf. rel. part,, 348. 9 adjective, 156. of genitive changed to &, 115. 2% goolined, 210. ‘Poogoo or Dax~ Zo affixed to ind. rel. part., 595c ; a postposi Ry with past v. p. to express ‘ although ', 491 ; 590. +» @8 to expross succession of noun sentenoes, 623. used to express ‘ both—and ', 217. ny with Bong, 239. b used as a possessive adj. pro , 190. b% peculiarities in uses of, 394. declined, 171, (188 % added to interrogative pro. to express indefinite pronoun when verb is neg., irregular nouns ending in, 188. added to grammatical conditional tense to express ‘ although *, 591. used as termination noun in predicate, 393, 00 postposition, 148. ‘used to express ‘ motion from’, 325. #06 declined, 181. %y used to express ‘ both-and ', 317 (2) plural of nouns ending in, 1286, irregular nouns ending in, 185, with pres. verbal part., 488. Sevom plural of 128f ;, 136. ‘Sr declined, 288. looative onse of, 239. “Bub declined, 130- “Bong without meaning, 691. 7B to express emphasis, 300. used with @ + 7 to express ‘ unless’, 5 1. to express continuous action, 443. i With pres. verbal part., 489. om om oo $0 xpress ‘a8 goon as’, 490 Bes declined, 210. Bowery without meaning, 691-inpsx xiv “hs peculiarities in use of, $98. : declined, 169. “Hoss declined, 136. “Hei used instead of 8, 465. Bow, 819. “Hogs used instead of xo, 464. Fay, 18. #26 declined, 133. Sosarnge, 761. ‘Sow pl. of 140; 198d ; conjugated, 803. Sow plural for so%> and ¥y, 140. Soa8 pl. of, 1285 k. Sysv, 693, ‘Sxeo declined, 134 754. S% used in forming passive verbs, 328 ; 337 43 contracted form of 325, 511. 85 used for 24, 318, $8 or added to ind. rel part., 698 (2)¢. $5, used as a termination, 139. Sg pl. of, 140. SiG pl. for sox and go, 140. ‘$00 used to form conditional sentences, 571. a8 added to Adjectives, 165 ‘37S an Interjeotion, 229. ares declined, 134. os used to form causal verbs, 333. 329 added to past rel. part. to expre Lebos conjugated, 333. Som conjugated, 817. £2, pl of, 198 . Soswssoen, 776. 1H (9) pl.of, 1984. after’, 698 (1)d.soxvi inpex $785: used in sentences to express ‘ custom’, 586. added to neg. v. part. to express ‘before’, ote., 598 (1)a; 770. “Bow conjugated, 292. ‘343 combined with nouns to form verbs, 338. ‘Beseso declined, 131. Bs pl. of ete., 198g; 198. ‘Bes pl. of 1286 © ; declined, 133. BS postposition, 143. or pl. of, 1982. Sr used with Bt or zo0g, 228. \ ‘iy past ¥. part. to form neg. inf., 363. instead of &+, se’ used, 316. Sra" used to form nog. prog. hab. pres. and fut. tenses, 354 80 used to form neg. cond. sentence, 579. ea affixed to a neuter noun, 99. Bxy, Stows, drag used to form-nog. rel. part,, 363 322. S8=y% compounded with inf. gives future i ‘used in formation of neg. tenses, 364. 3 used to form neg. cond. sentences, 567- 24376 used to form negative imperative, 853. 2i* 9% used to form neg. indf. tense, 352. 356 used for IHS, 315. 215 oar, 591. soars usod to form neg. verbs, 364. S*atéss used to form nog. verbal noun, 847. 2" used to form neg. rel part., 363 ; 610. conjugated pos. 319 ; in neg., 358 822. combined with nouns to form verbs, 338, used in forming compound verbs, 323. peculiarities in indl. touse, 315. imperative of, 316. 84468 used to form neg. verbal noun, 347. S)¥°Sso affixed to any relative part., 597 (1)a (88 used to express ‘euch, 1:3. Sssrngy, 758, 765. (SBerzssso past rel. part. used absolutely with, 603. BN YBsoisows, 707. GH declined, 137,INDEX xxxvil 0 attached to en inf., 5944. ‘WS added to inf. to form neg. imperative, 367. Speyer, 195. @S"dog used with inf, 534, #85; used to form nog. imp., 967. 7K, 686. GriBr, 680. $08 used with pronoun referring to number, 192. xox used asa prefix to denote mase. gender, 101°. sSoppp8 added to rel. part., 598 (2)c. » —» indf. rel. part,, 698 (2,4 sory, added to indf, rel. part., 698 (2)b. x04, used instead of pronominal affixes, 207. Sages used instead of sxsy, 170, $05, used as 9 termination, 139. Serdgyvasors, 766. Rasregyasers, 766. Ss used as & possessive adj. pro., 190. Srv used with 9, 655, example of use, 666. x7 declined, 137. ds-a.y conjugated, 292. 1% used instead of Do, 170. ‘9045, declined, 189. Do used as possessive adj. pro., 190. box declined, 211- ' postposition, 143. boxe added to past rel. part , 698 (1) d. boss declined, 138. ues peculiarities in uso of, 396. x of 2nd declonsion changed to % in composite nouns, 208 : 769. Swot added to neg. verb part, 698 (1)4. declined, 211.inpat Swe uses of, 53. added to neg. verb part , 59S (1)a. Smee pl. of 198 (¢) ;, 581. serv declined, 238. “bos declined, 138. “hos peculiarities in use of, 395. ‘sooKy declined, 210 Baisies, 754, BMG added to inf. to form neg. imp., 867. oS. HHP, 838 sq. Sr~ used to express questions, 299 (2): : o> used for 5 of Srd person neuter, $09. pl. of nouns ending in, 148 f. genitiveof ,, ,, 136. 650 added to interrogative pro. exp. indf. pronoun when verb is nogative, 188. 6% used to express ‘ both-and', 217 (3). ‘As used to express emphasis, 300 (2), Bak}, postposition, use of, 143 ; 144. ‘Bx postposition, 143. ‘Bs used to form ordinal numbers, 341. w. BByow causal form of seoy, 885. dow conjugated, 288, 817. Showswes conjugated 328; in. neg, 357- ‘3 the word a used instead of, 916. “37e used to express probibition, 456. “rsa % 630 ; with inf., 477. "J7AmHy governing objective case, 479. 58 attached to any rel. patt., 597 (1)a. 3 & 8 pl. of nouns ending in, 128, c, k. genitives no» 188. @>irrogular nouns ending in, 139. 7% used as pl. of nonns, 128c. “Bo% used to express ‘ both ' 237 ; deolined, 288. “By declined, 210.ISDEX, xxxis o. 7763 affixed to ind. rel. part., 696d ; 696. » pres, or past rel. part., 6975, O79 used with past verbal part., 503, © irrogular nouns ending in, 190; 198 b, i, . dropped before 22, 679. ©9 irregular nouns ending in, 134 Pl, of nouns, 198 6, h, k. 2} Pl. of nouns ending in, 198 ; 136. a fovea ‘a6 affix to express certainty or encouragemont, 685. ‘bx, 818. ‘By distinguished from drots¥, 406 seq. ‘Bssow goo example of use of, 407. Gs used to express alternative in neg , 570, ‘Bvertooss used to express lity, 468. Wxo% used to expross alternative in neg., 570. Ges used with positive verb. noun to form neg. prog. tense, 349 ; 360, ” ” inf. non ow past b, 351. pronounced as , 359. ‘God distinguished from -écza, 408—410, rules as to use of, 418 seq. used with nouns to give force of adj, 166. 1» » pronominal affixes, 904. ‘Br used to express inability, 462; 465. conjugated, 349. rules as to use of, 418 seq. G% emphatic for 3, 480. &* postposition, 143, 723. declined, 211. ‘used to form superlative degree, 151. O7 added to ind. rel. part., 598 (2)b. 6S added to ind. rel. part., 598 (2)b 728. s. Soaers, 828, Sc%) conjugated 319; in neg., 358, 818. causal form of, 835. with pres. v. part. expressing repetition of action, 500, fg an auxiliary, 469.xl INDEX, Sty8%08 name of vowel 9, 87.” $e name of subscribed consonant, 88. Sx postposition, 148. used with dot, 378. ‘S00 used with verb expressing ‘ motion from ’, 325. 588 used with verb expressing ‘motion to’, 324. ‘Sz used to express prohibition, 457. »— » with dative to express‘ not to need ', 439. ny int, 477. Sos added to indef. rel. part., 598 (1)c, note see, 598 (2)d. nv Fel. part., 598 (2). 1» ind. rel. part., 598 (2)d, see 598 (1)s, n. Sogo, £2, So8sa as auxiliary, 454, used to express ‘command’, ode common use, 485. as auxiliary, 436 ; 454; 689 ; 644. with “3 and dative to express ‘ want’, eto., 437. ‘Sg used with verbal noun, 475 ; 594a. postposition, 143. Sysres uses of, 466. Systs-s uses of, 466. SB postposition, 143. $8 used to express ‘command’, 639 ; 644. 39; 644, swith ¥9 to express ‘ purpose’, 658. as auxiliary, 454. with infinitive, 477, 885. a7 declined, 174. © used as termination of noun in predicate, 994. of 3rd person pl. changed to ow, 309. Dyso7 affixed any rel. part,, 597- Deg, 86. DtsG soe, 794 409. DVseoscovs, 768 80g. ‘Def declined, 174. S used as a tere jion of a noun in the predicate, 394. Bots" added to past rel. part., 598 (1)b. ‘Bay, no meaning, 691,1aDEX wi BiQG-S no meaning, 601. ‘Bess added to past rel. part., 698 (1)d. declined, 211. Soovg takes affix 2, 239. Bewerey¥ name of sign «, 85. ‘Sow declined, 238. ‘ose added to past verb part. to express ‘ completeness ', 339. ‘os declined, 138 ; 140. ‘Hos pl. of, 140. ‘Sip pl. for S06 and tes, 140. %, 109. & for & in Qnd conjugation, 283. , 700. Agoesg, 702. s. Sowrges¥sves, 290 seg., 778 sag. ‘Sox in apposition to noun sentenoe, 614 ; 615. Soh, 838 509. Sos iaS Fes, 74. Sox,_y6 Xs:029, 707, 708, 709, 710, 714, 716, 717, 722, 729. Sgorngg, 763. ‘Ssrartan used with 9. 654. Sawity.soa0, 777. 608 added to ind. rel. part, used in North Circars, 600. Sogarsoisves, 168, 172: 177, 181, 201 seg., 771s ‘aay names of O, 90. Aron, 683. Bw added to ind. rel. part., 603 note Gome, 708, 714. Bsss00n, 207. 37x09 ‘consonants’, 82, Yli INDEX % used as plural ending, 128d, d. Oy © (soi) see, 90, 711, 714, 715. before 8 omitted in 8rd sing neuter, 810. o&, in plural, 781. . og and 042 plural endings of nouns, 128 d,c. « 710, 712, 718, 714, 715. D 2 (x4), 86 5 709. PRINTED AT THE S. PC. R. PRESS, VRPERY MADRAG—I917.THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN, DATE DUE